Skip to main content

Full text of "The philosophy of music; a comparative investigation into the principles of musical aesthetics"

See other formats


THE    PHILOSOPHY 
OF    MUSIC 


A  Comparative  Investigation  into  the  Principles 
of  Musical  Esthetics 


HALBERT  HAINS  BRITAN,  PH.D. 
/P — 

Professor  of  Philosophy  in  Bates  College 


.CM! 
f»"V-* 

»x 


,    .  ^ 


LONGMANS,  GREEN,  AND   CO. 

FOURTH  AVENUE  &  joTH  STREET,  NEW  YORK 
LONDON,   BOMBAY  AND  CALCUTTA 
I 


COPYRIGHT,  ign,  BY 
LONGMANS,  GREEN,  AND  CO. 


875- 


Printed  by  J.  J.  Little  &  Ives  Co. 
New  York 


To 
E.  F.   B., 

who  has  helped  me  to  see  the  Beauty  of 

Goodness    and    the    Goodness   of 

Beauty,  I  inscribe  this  book. 


PREFACE 

IN  offering  this  book  to  the  public,  the  author 
feels  constrained  to  ask  for  it  the  kindly  considera 
tion  usually  granted  to  pioneer  work.  For  while 
the  bibliography  of  music  is  voluminous,  attempts 
at  a  scientific,  psychological  analysis  of  music,  and 
at  a  systematic  discussion  of  the  principles  of  musi 
cal  aesthetics  are  surprisingly  few.  Of  all  the  books 
examined,  Gurney's  Power  of  Sound  was  by  far  the 
most  valuable,  though  its  wealth  of  keen  observa 
tions  and  valuable  conclusions  is  all  but  buried 
under  a  great  mass  of  needless  verbiage  and  other 
forbidding  infelicities  of  style.  Under  the  circum 
stances  it  seemed  best  to  the  author  therefore  to 
start  boldly  out  trusting  to  his  psychological  knowl 
edge  for  chart  and  compass,  and  to  his  philosophical 
training  to  lead  him  through  the  subtleties  and  half- 
mystical  generalities  which  for  so  long  have  be 
clouded  this  particular  field  of  art. 

The  thanks  of  the  author  are  due,  and  are  here 
gratefully  given  to  those  whose  sympathy  has  given 
him  encouragement,  and  whose  suggestions  and 
criticisms  have  proven  most  valuable.  Among  those 
who  have  thus  contributed  to  whatever  value  the 
book  may  have,  mention  must  be  made  especially 
of  Professor  H.  C.  Macdougall,  and  of  Professor 
Horatio  Parker,  who  have  kindly  read  portions  of 
the  manuscript  and  offered  many  helpful  sugges 
tions. 

H.  H.  BRITAN. 
LEWISTON,  MAINE,  July  14,  1910. 


REFERENCES 

AMBROS,  The  Boundaries  of  Music  and  Poetry. 

BARTHOLOMEW,  Relation  of  Psychology  to  Music. 

BELLAIGUE,  Musical  Studies  and  Silhouettes. 

BOLTON,  Rhythm,  "American  Journal  of  Psychology,"  Vol.  VI,  No.  2. 

BUTCHER,  Aristotle's  Theory  of  Poetry  and  Fine  Art. 

DAURIAC,  Essai  sur  L'Esprit  Musical. 

EDWARDS,  God  and  Music. 

GOODELL,  Chapters  on  Greek  Metric. 

GURNEY,  Power  of  Sound. 

HADOW,  Studies  in  Modern  Music. 

HAND,  ^Esthetics  of  Musical  Art. 

HANSLICK,  Vom  Musikalisch-Schonen. 

LEE,  The  Riddle  of  Music,  "Quarterly  Review,"  Jan.,  1906. 

LUSSY,  Musical  Expression. 

MONRO,  The  Modes  of  Ancient  Greek  Music. 

PARRY,  Evolution  of  the  Art  of  Music. 

PUFFER,  The  Psychology  of  Beauty. 


CONTENTS 
PART  I 

INTRODUCTION 
CHAPTER  I 

THE   PROBLEM   STATED 

PAGE 

SOME  CHARACTERISTIC  ATTRIBUTES  OF  Music 3 

CONFUSED  STATE  OF  MUSICAL  ESTHETICS 8 

THE  STANDPOINTS, OF  THE  MUSICIAN  AND  OF  THE  ^ESTHET- 

ICIAN  COMPARED 10 

SOME  OF  THE  PROBLEMS  OF  A  PHILOSOPHY  OF  Music     .    .  14 

CHAPTER  II 

MUSICAL  FORM 

Two  METHODS  OF  REGARDING  A  WORK  OF  ART     ....  22 

IMPORTANCE  OF  MUSICAL  FORM 24 

THE  SCALES 25 

THE  MUSICAL  PHRASE 3° 

THE  SECTION 33 

THE  MOTIVE 35 

THE  PERIOD  OR  SENTENCE 41 

THE  TWO-PART  FORM       42 

THE  THREE-PART  FORM   .    .    .    „ 46 


xii  CONTENTS 


PART   II 

PSYCHOLOGICAL  ANALYSIS   OF   THE   ELEMENTS   OF 
MUSIC 

CHAPTER   III 

RHYTHM  PAGE 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  Music 57 

THE  PRIORITY  OF  RHYTHM 58 

THE  ORGANIC  BASIS  OF  RHYTHM 60 

THE  MENTAL  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  RHYTHM 62 

1.  In  Primitive  Music 63 

2.  In  Popular  Music 67 

3.  In  Artistic  Music 70 

RHYTHM  PSYCHOLOGICALLY  CONSIDERED 78 

CHAPTER   IV 
RHYTHM    (continued) 

THE  INTELLECTUAL  ELEMENT  IN  RHYTHM 82 

MATHEMATICAL  CHARACTER  OF  RHYTHM 83 

AN  INDUCTIVE  STUDY  OF  RHYTHM 87 

EXPLANATIONS  AND  CONCLUSIONS       89 

CHAPTER  V 

MELODY 

DIFFICULTY  OF  AN  ANALYSIS  OF  MELODY 94 

MELODY  A  FORM  OF  THOUGHT 95 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  MELODY 99 

PITCH 99 

TONALITY 101 

UNITY 104 

STRENGTH 108 

GRACEFULNESS  .                            .  in 


CONTENTS  xiii 

PACT 

ORIGINALITY 113 

SIGNIFICANCE 115 


CHAPTER  VI 

HARMONY 

THEORY  OF  HARMONY  WELL  UNDERSTOOD 119 

DEVELOPMENT  OF  HARMONY 120 

MUSICAL  USES  OF  HARMONY 125 

1.  Increased  Sound  Beauty „     .  125 

2.  Enrichment  of  Melody 127 

3.  A  New  Medium  of  Musical  Thought 130 

THE  MAJOR  AND  THE  MINOR  MODES 133 

CHAPTER   VII 
MUSICAL  EXPRESSION 

THE  IMPORTANCE  OF  MUSICAL  EXPRESSION 149 

EXPRESSION  IN  Music  AND  IN  LANGUAGE  COMPARED.     .     .  150 

THE  TWO-FOLD  FUNCTION  OF  EXPRESSION 152 

THE  INTELLECTUAL  ELEMENT  IN  EXPRESSION 154 

THE  EMOTIONAL  ELEMENT  IN  EXPRESSION 158 


PART   III 

THE   PHILOSOPHY   OF   MUSIC 

CHAPTER  VIII 

THE   UNIVERSALITY,   VERSATILITY  AND   POWER  OF  MUSIC 

THE  UNIVERSALITY  OF  Music 167 

THE  VERSATILITY  OF  Music i?° 

THE  POWER  OF  Music  •    •     I75 


xiv  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  IX 

THE  CONTENT  OF  MUSIC 

PAGE 

THE  NATURE  OF  THE  PROBLEM 185 

THE  PROBLEM  RE-STATED 188 

THE  DRAMATIC  OR  IMPRESSIVE  AND  THE  ESTHETIC  ATTRI 
BUTES  OF  Music 189 

THE  EMOTIONAL  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  THE  DRAMATIC  ELEMENTS  191 

THE  EMOTIONAL  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  THE  ESTHETIC  ELEMENTS  197 

THE  VALUE  OF  THE  INTELLECTUAL  ELEMENT  IN  Music  .     .  199 

CONCLUSIONS 204 

CHAPTER  X 
MUSICAL  CRITICISM 

PURPOSE  AND  NEED  OF  AN  INVESTIGATION  INTO  THE  GROUNDS 

OF  MUSICAL  CRITICISM 207 

MUSICAL  VALUE  OF  RHYTHM 209 

A  CLASSIFICATION  OF  Music  BASED  UPON  RHYTHM     .     .     .  211 

COMPARATIVE  VALUE  OF  MELODY 213 

THE  CRITERIA  OF  MELODIC  VALUES 216 

COMPARATIVE  VALUE  OF  HARMONY 218 

CONCLUSIONS 223 

CHAPTER  XI 
THE  EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC 

IMPORTANCE  OF  THE  PROBLEM 228 

VALUE  OF  Music  IN  GREEK  EDUCATION 230 

Music  AS  A  FORM  OF  RECREATION 233 

Music  AS  INTELLECTUAL  DISCIPLINE 236 

THE  MORAL  VALUE  OF  Music 240 

SUGGESTIONS 248 


PART   I 
INTRODUCTION 


CHAPTER  I 

THE    PROBLEM    STATED 

I.  In  comparing  music  with  the  other  arts  three 
general  traits  are  readily  noted,  traits  which  serve 
to  attract  the  attention  of  the  mind  philosophically 
disposed,  and  to  provoke  an  inquiry  as  to  their 
nature,  causes  and  significance.  In  the  first  place, 
music  as  a  form  of  art  is  remarkable  for  its  wide 
appeal  to  mankind.  Now  and  then  in  the  past  some 
art  has  so  enlisted  the  sympathies  and  energies  of  a 
people  that  it  is  not  inappropriate  to  speak  of  the 
interest  evoked  as  national.  Such,  for  example,  was 
the  interest  in  sculpture  in  Greece  during  the  Peri- 
clean  age,  or  in  painting  in  Italy  during  the  hundred 
years  ending  with  the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  cen 
tury,  or  in  architecture  under  the  enthusiasm  of 
Gothic  ideals. 

And  yet,  even  in  the  halcyon  days  of  these 
arts,  there  was  never,  I  venture  to  say,  such  a 
wide-spread  interest  and  enthusiasm  as  the  people 
of  the  Western  world  are  to-day  according  to  music 
in  its  various  forms.  This  is  due  not  to  a  wave  of 
popular  fancy,  a  mere  society  or  social  fad,  but 
it  will  find  its  explanation  only  in  a  theory  that 
shows  music  to  be  eminently  adapted  to  be  as  it  is 
to-day,  the  art  of  the  age  and  the  art  of  the  people. 
Even  a  casual  survey  of  the  place  music  holds  in  the 
social  life  of  our  nation  will  be  sufficient  to  convince 


4  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

one  of  its  vitality  and  of  its  popularity.  In  our 
larger  cities  are  orchestras  and  choral  societies  and 
opera,  which,  to  exist  under  present  conditions,  must 
be  generously  supported;  mention  may  be  made 
also  of  countless  lesser  organizations  and  soloists, 
these,  too,  dependent  for  their  support  upon  popu 
lar  favor.  Besides  this  list  of  professional  musicians, 
attention  should  be  called  to  the  universal  use  of 
music  in  religious  worship,  in  social  gatherings  of 
various  kinds,  in  the  theatre,  in  the  army,  in  our 
schools,  and  in  our  homes,  where  in  a  large  majority 
of  cases  music  of  some  form  is  now  cultivated. 
Such  a  survey  forces  the  conclusion  upon  us  that 
music  is  preeminently  the  art  of  the  people  and 
the  art  of  the  age. 

\i  Its  universal  character  finds  further  confirmation 
in  the  fact,  now  being  established  through  ethnic 
and  anthropological  investigations,  that  among  all 
tribes  and  nations,  in  every  stage  of  racial  progress, 
with  men  of  every  color,  temper  and  natural  dispo 
sition,  music  of  some  form  is  found  without  excep 
tion.  From  the  lowest  stages  of  barbarism  to  the 
highest  stratum  of  modern  culture  music  has  been 
found  to  play  an  important  part  in  the  mystical, 
religious,  social  or  aesthetic  life  of  every  people. 
It  is  true  that  in  crudity  and  demonstrativeness  the 
music'  is  closely  commensurate  with  the  develop 
ment  of  the  people  in  question,  but  this  only  goes 
to  prove  that  the  roots  of  music  lie  deep  in  hu 
man  nature,  and  that  music,  like  all  other  forms  of 
mental  activity,  is  subject  to  the  law  of  development,  j 

But  even  more  startling  and  more  suggestive  than 
this  universality  of  musical  appreciation  is  the  ver 
satility  of  the  art  we  are  considering.  Its  remark- 


THE  PROBLEM  STATED  5 

able  adaptability  to  man's  many  and  varied  emo 
tional  experiences  not  only  serves  to  differentiate  it 
from  the  other  arts,  but  points  to  some  much-needed 
investigation  of  its  true  psychological  character. 
Henry  Van  Dyke,  in  his  recent  volume  of  poems, 
in  the  "Ode  to  Music"  thus  poetically  recognizes 
the  wide  emotional  range  of  music: 

"Where  wilt  thou  lead  me  first? 
In  what  still  region 
Of  thy  domain 
Whose  provinces  are  legion 
Wilt  thou  restore  me  to  myself 
And  quench  my  heart's  long  thirst?  " 

Then  follow  a  Play  Song  in  childlike  simplicity;  a 
Sleep  Song  of  rare  beauty,  though  studied  the  critics 
say;  a  Hunting  Song  breathing  of  the  freshness  of 
the  morning ;  a  Dance  Song  of  lightness  and  rhythm 
well  molded;  and  the  Symphony  expressive  of  the 
deeper  aesthetical  truths  of  the  art.  However,  even 
in  this  varied  enumeration  he  by  no  means  exhausted 
the  series,  or  bounded  the  province  of  this  art.  The 
inspiriting  effect  of  martial  music  is  too  well  known 
to  need  more  than  casual  mention;  its  power  to 
relieve  even  the  most  materialistic  fatigue  and  to 
strengthen  a  lagging  will  is  a  fact  which  armies  have 
long  known  and  utilized.  Of  similar  nature  is  the 
use  of  music  to  arouse  enthusiasm  upon  the  football 
field  and  in  the  old-fashioned  political  meeting. 
Antipodal  to  these  uses  in  character  but  no  less 
powerful  in  its  effect,  is  the  place  music  holds  in 
modern  enlightened  religious  worship.  Here  it  allies 
itself  not  with  the  boisterous  spirit  of  college  rivalry 


6  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

nor  with  the  pugnacious  instinct  in  man,  but  with 
the  calm,  emotional  phenomena  of  religious  medita 
tion  and  worship.  The  effect  desired  and  produced 
in  the  two  cases  is  in  striking  contrast;  in  the 
former  case  music  excites,  animates  the  mind,  and 
energizes  the  will;  in  the  latter,  it  calms  the  soul, 
and  brings  repose  and  rest,  turning  our  thoughts 
by  the  forceful  beauty  of  its  deep  harmonies  and 
sober  rhythm  to  a  more  serious  contemplation  of 
the  experiences  of  life.  In  social  meetings,  to  pro 
mote  good  cheer  and  unity  of  feeling,  music  is  a 
means  never  failing,  never  trite.  In  the  dance, 
music  brings  gayety  and  exhilaration ;  but  the  dirge, 
or  the  funeral  march  can  turn  our  thoughts  at  once 
from  sunlight  to  deepest  shadow.  But  in  the 
strength  of  all  these  dramatic  effects  which  music 
has  such  power  to  produce,  it  must  not  be  forgotten 
that  as  an  art  music  has  power  to  rise  to  the  sublim- 
est  heights  of  aesthetic  form  and  so  charms  the  mind 
by  the  pure  beauty  of  its  artistic  qualities.  This 
versatility,  this  adaptability  to  man's  various  emo 
tional  experiences  without  artificiality  or  loss  of 
power,  is  another  of  the  potent  qualities  of  music 
awaiting  explanation. 

Again,  music  is  remarkable  not  only  for  its  uni 
versality  and  its  versatility,  but  also  for  its  power. 
No  other  art,  with  the  possible  exception  of  certain 
forms  of  literature,  can  make  the  emotions  so  poig 
nantly  real,  or  can  so  effectively  oppose  the  domi 
nance  of  some  mood  which  may  for  the  time  have 
cast  its  spell  over  the  mind.  Upon  this  attribute 
of  music  the  world  has  remarked  and  perchance 
reflected  since  the  days  when  David  took  his  harp 
to  solace  the  heart  of  Saul,  and  the  Greeks  repeated 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  7 

and  believed  the  myth  of  Orpheus  and  how  by  the 
magical  sweetness  of  his  music  he  charmed  the 
hearts  of  man  and  beast.  The  fact  which  the 
ancient  Hebrews  thus  noticed  and  the  Greeks  in 
their  fanciful  way  represented  in  their  myth,  has 
not  paled  beneath  the  clearer  light  of  modern 
scientific  examination,  but  remains  unchallenged 
though  still  largely  unexplained. 

Such  are  some  of  the  more  obvious  facts  which 
meet  us  when  we  pause  for  a  moment  to  consider 
music  as  a  form  of  art.  That  they  are  so  patent 
does  not  lessen  their  significance,  nor  make  a  critical 
examination  of  their  nature  and  force  any  the  less 
imperative.  Rather,  the  fact  that  they  are  so  evi 
dent  as  to  be  almost  commonplace  serves  to  increase 
the  obligation  philosophy  is  under  to  investigate 
their  nature  and  to  find  the  secret  of  their  psycho 
logical  value.  Philosophy  like  philanthropy  begins 
best  by  beginning  at  home.  This  much  may  be 
given  as  a  tentative  conclusion :  An  art  that  begins 
far  back  in  the  obscurity  of  the  earliest  forms  of 
racial  progress,  and  is  present  as  a  factor  of  increas 
ing  importance  through  the  long  ages  of  develop 
ment  to  the  best  outcome  of  ethnic  progress;  an  art 
that  finds  an  immediate  and  a  forceful  response 
from  men  in  every  land  and  in  every  stage  of  mental 
growth  and  education;  an  art  so  versatile  that  it 
can  arouse  and  stimulate  almost  every  emotion  of 
the  human  heart,  and  with  such  dramatic  power; 
an  art  that  in  its  highest  artistic  form  is  worthy  to 
be  classed  with  the  best  expression  of  man's  aesthetic 
consciousness:  such  an  art  is  certainly  not  ephem 
eral  or  insignificant,  but  must  send  its  roots  deep 
into  the  heart  of  man's  mental  constitution  and 


8  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

stand  intimately  related  to  the  basic  forms  of  con 
sciousness  itself. 

2.  As  might  be  inferred  from  the  last  remark, 
musical  aesthetics  is  a  subject  upon  which  there  is 
a  wide  divergence  of  opinion  and  a  very  general 
lack  of  exact  and  lucid  thought.  There  are  several 
reasons  why  this  is  true.  In  the  first  place,  music 
is  by  nature  both  intangible  and  evanescent,  and 
for  this  reason  hard  to  apprehend  clearly  without 
some  natural  aptitude  or  careful  training.  With  a 
few  paintings  before  him  even  a  novice  might  soon 
learn  to  recognize  the  outward  marks  of  a  Turner 
or  a  Corot  or  a  Monet,  while  only  a  long  training 
would  enable  him  to  decide  with  equal  facility 
whether  a  composition  were  by  Schubert  or  Men 
delssohn  or  Beethoven. 

Then  again,  the  symbolism  in  which  music  is 
expressed  is  incapable  of  being  translated  into  our 
conceptual  terminology.  Music  is  the  only  art  of 
which  this  is  literally  true.  Word  pictures  will  go 
far  toward  giving  a  fairly  accurate  description  of 
the  conception  of  any  other  form  of  art,  but  a 
melody  or  a  musical  thought  is  essentially  untrans 
latable  and  indescribable. 

Besides,  music  through  the  emotional  suggestive- 
ness  of  its  dramatic  factors  lends  itself  readily  to 
mystical  interpretation  and  obscure  generalities.  The 
following  quotation  will  illustrate  what  I  mean :  "I 
for  one  know  well,  that,  so  long  as  my  life-happenings 
can  be  conveyed  fitly  through  words,  I  will  not  use 
them  as  a  musical  theme.  The  longing  to  express 
myself  musically  comes  over  me  only  in  the  realm 
of  obscure  feelings,  at  the  threshold  of  the  World 
Beyond,  the  world  in  which  the  categories  of  Time 


and  Space  rule  no  more."  One  cannot  read  very 
far  in  musical  literature  without  meeting  many 
times  with  just  such  expressions.  They  may  be 
true  in  a  general  sense,  but  they  depart  woefully 
from  the  exactitude  which  a  world  influenced  more 
by  scientific  than  by  poetic  ideals  naturally  craves. 
We  labor,  therefore,  against  difficulties  inherent  in 
the  problem,  and  hence  inevitable. 

Another  reason  why  the  philosophy  of  music  is 
to-day  still  immature,  unsettled  almost  as  to  its  first 
principles,  is  found  in  the  fact  that  music  in  its 
present  harmonic  form  is  still  in  its  early  maturity. 
Attention  has  been  engrossed  heretofore  with  the 
cultivation  of  music  for  its  own  sake,  rather  than 
with  an  attempt  to  understand  its  principles  in  their 
philosophical  relations.  There  has  been  a  philos 
ophy  of  poetry,  for  example,  since  the  time  of 
Aristotle,  but  it  is  only  in  recent  years  that  syste 
matic  attempts  have  been  made  at  a  philosophy  of 
music.  And,  indeed,  it  could  not  have  been  other 
wise:  philosophy  does  not  precede,  but  follows  the 
actual  processes  of  development.  The  data  must 
first  be  supplied,  and  then  reflected  upon  and  uni 
fied  into  a  coherent,  logical  system.  Consequently 
philosophy  has  well  restrained  the  feverish  impulse 
to  appropriate  the  field  of  music  to  her  domain 
until  the  art  itself  should  be  mature. 

But  to  such  maturity  music  has  now  attained,  and 
the  time  is  at  hand  when  music  should  be  considered 
in  its  wider  relationships.  It  is  doubtless  true  that 
there  will  continue  to  be  new  movements,  new 
schools,  new  ideas  (for  art  does  not  seek  to  perfect 
the  old,  but  to  discover  the  new),  but  no  one  ac 
quainted  with  the  music  of  the  last  century  would 


lo  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

dare  to  say  that  music  has  not  attained  to  a  vigor 
ous  and  energetic  maturity.  If  past  attempts  at  a 
philosophy  of  music,  due  to  a  lack  of  proper  data, 
have  been  sporadic  and  incomplete,  there  is  no 
longer  a  like  reason  why  similar  attempts  are 
doomed  to  failure.  The  present  status  of  musical 
theory  and  of  psychological  analysis  is  such  that 
the  material  is  at  hand  for  such  a  systematic  study, 
if  we  care  to  avail  ourselves  of  it.  What  is  needed 
now  is  not  greater  facility  in  musical  analysis,  and 
a  more  complete  understanding  of  the  architectonic 
of  musical  compositions,  but  a  more  reflective  study 
of  such  data  as  we  already  possess  and  a  synthesis 
of  such  material  with  the  fundamental  principles  of 
mental  activity.  It  will  help,  perhaps,  to  define  our 
problem  and  to  show  more  clearly  the  direction  in 
which  our  goal  lies  if  we  contrast  for  a  moment  the 
study  of  music  from  the  standpoint  of. the  musician 
and  from  the  point  of  view  of  a  student  of  philosophy. 
3.  The  musician  studies  music  for  its  own  sake. 
If  music  is  worthy  of  the  place  it  claims  for  itself 
in  the  category  of  the  fine  arts,  it  must  have  a  con 
tent  worthy  to  be  compared  with  the  best  ideas  and 
ideals  of  these  arts,  with  the  content  of  our  best 
painting  or  of  our  best  literature  for  example.  It 
must  be  an  expression  of  some  truth  of  Life  itself, 
a  truth  capable  of  being  crystallized  under  the  form 
of  sense  beauty,  and  of  producing  an  aesthetic  reac 
tion  in  consciousness.  Music,  we  believe,  has  such  a 
content;  to  find  such  truth  and  to  express  it,  or  to 
interpret  it  for  others  is  the  true  function  of  the 
musician.  Music  is  no  blot  nor  blank,  it  means 
intensely  and  it  means  good;  to  find  its  meaning 
is,  for  the  musician,  if  not  meat  and  drink,  at  least 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  n 

his  proper  task.  The  musician,  therefore,  making 
music  the  constant  object  of  his  study,  gets  deep 
est  into  its  meaning,  understands  best  its  message, 
and  appreciates  best  the  character  of  its  truth.  At 
least  these  are  the  possibilities  that  lie  open  before 
him. 

All  this,  however,  is  not  so  easy  as  the  statement 
might  imply.  While  such  power  of  direct  vision  may 
now  and  then  be  granted  to  some  musical  genius 
that  the  nature  and  reality  of  the  goal  be  not 
lost  to  man,  the  usual  road  is  one  of  arduous  wind 
ings  and  many  a  day  of  rough  and  barren  climbing. 
That  is  to  say,  the  usual  method  by  which  musi 
cians  come  to  an  appreciative  understanding  of 
musical  composition  is  through  the  study  of  the 
technique  of  musical  form  and  musical  principles. 

As  a  musician,  therefore,  the  student  of  music  is 
interested  in  understanding  the  structural  elements 
of  music  in  general  and  of  different  compositions  in 
particular.  He  must  be  able  to  analyze  a  musical 
composition  and  to  see  how  from  certain  elements 
the  composer  has  builded  the  logical  structure  of  a 
work  of  art.  To  do  this  he  must  have  a  critical 
knowledge  of  the  various  elements  and  forms  of 
music,  the  uses  of  rhythm,  the  relation  of  keys,  and 
of  the  major  and  the  minor  modes,  the  theory  of 
harmony,  and  the  principles  of  musical  expression; 
he  must  be  able  to  pick  out  the  subjects  of  the 
various  movements,  and  to  recognize  them  in  their 
various  forms  in  the  exposition,  development  and 
recapitulation;  he  must  have  an  ear  trained  to  ap 
preciate  delicacy  of  modulation  and  of  harmony, 
and  to  recognize  the  more  logical  unity  and  balance 
of  rhythmic  structure.  Besides  all  this  Jbe .  must 


12  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

have  musical  ieeling,  the  ability  to  appreciate  and 
to  express  shades  of  feeling  which  are  beyond  the 
possibility  of  graphical  representation.  As  a  musi 
cian  merely  the  problem  of  the  content  of  his  art, 
except  as  this  term  is  used  to  denote  bare  sequence 
of  tones  in  succession,  is  extraneous  to  his  purpose. 
His  end  is  attained  when  he  so  thoroughly  under 
stands  the  musical  structure  of  the  composition 
that  he  can  intelligently  criticise  its  interpretation 
and  feel  the  emotion  that  inspired,  or  accompanied, 
its  creation.  True,  as  a  man  of  culture  or  even  as  a 
well-informed  student  of  his  art,  the  musician  must 
know  something  of  the  history  of  music,  and  of  its 
general  significance,  and  yet  strictly  from  the  musi 
cian's  point  of  view  this  is  not  essential,  except  so  far 
as  such  knowledge  helps  him  to  understand  and 
interpret  the  compositions  in  the  way  we  have  out 
lined  above.  Let  not  our  statement  be  misunder 
stood  ;  we  are  not  advocating  in  any  sense  a  restric 
tion  of  the  field  of  study  of  the  musician,  but  merely 
trying  to  set  the  limits  where  pure  musical  purposes 
end  and  other  interests  begin. 

The  study  of  music  from  the  point  of  view  of  the 
student  of  philosophy  is  essentially  different  from 
that  which  we  have  just  sketched.  The  interests  of 
the  musician  are  centripetal,  while  the  interests  of 
the  philosopher  are  centrifugal.  The  interest  of  the 
former,  as  we  have  shown,  centres  in  the  art  itself, 
while  the  interest  of  the  latter  is  directed  outward, 
seeking  for  points  of  relation  between  music  and  the 
other  arts  and  other  forms  of  human  experience. 

The  philosopher  must  recognize  the  right  of  the 
musician  to  priority  in  his  own  field.  In  matters  of 
musical  theory  he  can  only  defer  to  the  judgment 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  13 

of  the  musician  and  confess  that  much  of  the  infor 
mation  he  uses  is  second-hand.  And  yet  this  is 
no  more  the  case  with  music  than  it  is  in  any  other 
branch  of  aesthetics  or  of  philosophy  in  general. 

The  true  function  of  philosophy  lies  beyond  the 
immediate  facts  or  principles  which  science  gives. 
The  data  of  philosophy  are  all  borrowed,  so  no 
more  in  this  instance  than  elsewhere.  The  philoso 
pher  in  any  branch  of  sesthetics  is  but  a  traveller 
passing  through  the  land,  not  like  the  spies  of 
Joshua,  that  he  may  spy  it  out,  and  return  and 
possess  it,  but  that  he  may  make  of  it  a  compre 
hensive  survey  in  order  that  his  map  of  the  whole 
realm  of  art  may  be  complete.  He  will  do  well, 
therefore,  to  learn  from  musicians,  the  rightful 
owners  of  the  soil,  those  facts  wilich  a  life-long 
experience  may  have  given  them.  Since  he  is  but 
a  surveyor,  as  it  were,  seeking  for  the  defiles,  the 
passes,  the  natural  avenues  of  approach  which  con 
nect  this  enchanted  land  of  music  with  the  outlying 
provinces  of  the  other  arts  and  of  other  fields  of 
human  experience,  he  must  choose  as  his  guide,  if 
he  show  the  wisdom  his  name  implies,  one  whose 
experience  has  made  him  familiar  with  all  the  wind 
ing  streams  and  hidden  passes  and  fertile  plains  of 
his  home  land.  True  it  may  be  that  he  has  never 
lifted  his  eyes  to  the  hills  to  find  the  sources  of  those 
enchanted  streams  which  make  his  country  so  fair, 
nor  followed  them  down  to  where  at  last  they  flow 
out  into  the  boundless  ocean  of  Truth ;  but  this  does 
not  lessen  his  efficiency  as  a  guide  in  the  land  in 
which  he  lives  and  which  he  knows  better  than  any 
transient  incomer  from  other  scenes. 

There  is,  therefore,  no  cause  for  enmity  or  jeal- 


14  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

ousy  between  the  musician  and  the  philosopher,  but 
every  cause  for  hearty  cooperation  and  mutual 
assistance.  The  philosopher  must  gain  from  the 
musician  those  data  which  alone  make  his  work 
possible.  Had  he  first  to  master  completely  the 
technical  study  of  music,  his  prime  purpose  would 
be  lost  in  the  multitude  of  preliminary  details.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  musician,  if  he  is  to  be  successful 
in  his  chosen  work,  must  confine  himself  to  his  spe 
cific  tasks  and  not  be  drawn  away  by  the  allurements 
of  philosophical  theories.  But  when  the  philosopher 
has  completed  his  work  and  has  formulated  his  argu 
ment  in  a  systematic  way,  the  results  of  his  labor 
should  be  of  the  greatest  interest  and  help  to  the 
musician  in  enlarging  the  scope  of  his  vision  and  in 
giving  him  clearer  ideas  as  to  the  relation  of  music 
to  other  forms  of  human  experience. 

4.  What,  then,  to  discard  our  figure  of  speech, 
are  some  of  the  more  specific  problems  which  a 
philosophy  of  music  must  undertake  to  solve? 
Clearly,  one  of  the  chief  inquiries  to  be  raised,  chief 
both  in  its  inherent  importance  and  because  so 
much  depends  upon  it,  is  to  determine  as  clearly 
and  as  accurately  as  possible  the  nature  of  the 
psychological  processes  involved  in  the  musical 
experience.  The  psychological  method  of  investi 
gating  all  phenomena  connected  with  human  thought 
and  action  has  so  abundantly  justified  itself  that  it 
here  needs  no  defense.  It  is  not  without  good  and 
sufficient  reasons  that  this  method  has  become 
almost  synonymous  with  scientific  accuracy,  and 
with  axiomatic  grounds  of  certainty.  In  the  case 
of  music  the  demand  for  the  most  thorough-going, 
critical  psychological  analysis  is  peculiarly  impera- 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  15 

tive,  (i)  because  so  little  systematic  work  of  this 
kind  has  as  yet  been  undertaken,  and  (2)  because 
the  mental  reactions  constituting  the  musical  expe 
rience  are  in  many  respects  so  intangible  and  subtle 
that  they  lead  readily  to  exaggeration  and  vague 
generalities  which  in  the  light  of  a  scientific  psy 
chology  are  either  meaningless  altogether  or  mere 
platitudes.  To  understand  in  the  simplest  possible 
terms  the  character  of  the  mental  reactions  which 
music  engenders  is  therefore  one  of  the  most  im 
perative  problems  of  musical  aesthetics.  This  can 
be  attained  only  by  a  critical  analysis  of  music  into 
its  elements  and  an  examination  of  the  effect  of 
these  elements  taken  separately  upon  the  mind. 
In  this  way  alone  can  we  hope  to  come  to  a  clear 
and  full  understanding  of  the  real  nature  of  music 
subjectively  considered. 

Another  reason  why  the  psychological  examina 
tion  of  music  is  so  important  is  the  fact  that  upon 
the  data  thus  determined  rests  the  possibility  of 
relating  music  to  other  manifestations  of  human 
thought  and  action.  In  order  that  philosophy  may 
relate  one  subject  to  another,  one  art  to  another, 
or  to  some  subject  apparently  independent  of  the 
one  in  question,  it  is  necessary  that  some  bond 
of  connection  be  discovered.  Now  psychological 
analysis  is  the  alembic  modern  philosophy  is  using 
to-day  and  in  it  hopes  to  be  able  to  resolve  the  most 
refractory  forms  of  consciousness,  the  most  subtle 
and  abstract  ideas  and  ideals.  Whether  or  not  these 
hopes  will  ever  be  adequately  fulfilled,  it  is  unques 
tionably  true  that  this  is  the  best  method  yet  dis 
covered  of  attacking  these  more  subtle  problems 
with  which  philosophy  is  compelled  to  deal.  Thus 


1 6  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

it  is  imperative  that  attention  be  directed  first  to 
the  psychological  analysis  of  music  not  only  for  the 
interest  inherent  in  this  problem,  but  also  because 
this  is  the  necessary  prolegomenon  for  the  solution 
of  the  further  inquiries  philosophy  is  ready  to  pro 
pound.  For  example,  there  is  urgent  need  to-day 
for  the  formulation  of  the  principles  upon  which 
musical  criticism  rests  and  by  virtue  of  which  it 
has  authority.  As  critics  themselves  are  ready  to 
admit,  musical  criticism  is  not  yet  fully  conscious 
of  the  principles  which  underlie  the  musical  art,  and 
as  a  consequence  there  is  a  notorious  lack  of  unity 
and  authority  in  the  multitudinous  judgments  passed 
upon  music.  So  much  so  that  one  of  the  papers  in 
our  metropolis  amused  itself  not  long  since  by  com 
piling  a  long  list  of  contradictory  quotations  taken 
from  the  musical  criticism  of  its  leading  newspapers. 
Nothing  can  remedy  this  weakness  so  long  as  there 
is  lack  of  unanimity  of  opinion  as  to  the  true  char 
acter,  purpose,  and  principles  of  music.  Such  an 
analysis  as  we  propose  ought  certainly  to  do  some 
thing  toward  laying  the  principles  for  authoritative 
criticism. 

Passing  outside  of  the  realm  of  music  itself  to  con 
sider  its  relation  to  some  other  fields  of  human 
thought,  one  of  the  first  problems  to  propose  itself  is 
naturally  the  relation  of  music  to  the  other  arts.  As 
an  art  with  a  definite  character  and  individuality  of 
its  own,  music  must  have  certain  differentia  by  which 
it  is  distinguished  from  the  other  artsT~But,  on  the 
other  hand,  it  is  no  less  evident  that  it  must  have  in 
common  with  the  other  arts  certain  essential  attri 
butes,  by  virtue  of  which  it  is  placed  in  the  category 
of  art.  The  differentia,  the  points  of  difference,  are  in 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  17 

common  thought  more  emphasized  than  the  points 
of  agreement.  These  are  the  technical  attributes, 
the  proper  subject  of  study  for  the  musician,  and  for 
professional  schools.  But  for  a  philosophy  of  music 
it  is  upon  the  common  point  of  agreement  that  at 
tention  must  be  centred ;  these  latter,  not  the  former, 
are  the  basis  for  a  real,  comprehensive  understand-  ' 
ing  of  music  as  a  form  of  art.  To  point  out,  there 
fore,  these  common  attributes  and  to  estimate  their 
value  will  prove  to  be  not  only  an  interesting  task 
intellectually,  but  it  is  indispensable  for  a  philosophi 
cal  appreciation  of  the  true  character,  import,  and 
purpose  of  music.  However,  a  philosophy  of  music 
will  lead  us  farther  afield  than  into  these  outlying 
provinces  of  the  other  arts. 

Music  is  not  morality;  but  from  the  days  of  Plato 
and  Aristotle  music  and  morality  have  been  inti 
mately  associated  both  in  popular  and  in  philosophic 
thought.  The  philosopher,  actuated  by  a  dominant 
desire  for  unity,  is  prone  to  believe  that  the  asstheti- 
cal  and  the  ethical  ideals  are  not  only  compatible,  but 
essential  each  to  the  other.  The  man  more  prag 
matically  minded  finds  numerous  inconsistencies  be 
tween  certain  apparent  results  of  music  and  the 
ordinary  conceptions  of  moral  practices.  But  the 
problem — surely  the  problem  remains  for  him  who 
would  attack  it. 

Again,  art  is  not  religion,  but  the  fact  that  no  one 
of  the  arts  in  any  land  has  risen  to  world  renown 
apart  from  the  guiding  influence  and  inspiration  of 
religious  ideals  certainly  suggests  that  this  is  not 
merely  coincidence  several  times  repeated.  And 
while  it  may  be  true  that  the  great  musical  period 
of  the  last  century  received  less  inspiration  from  re- 


1 8  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

ligious  conceptions  than  have  some  of  the  other  arts, 
the  intimate  relation  always  existing  between  music 
and  religious  worship  forbids  that  the  question  of  the 
relation  between  music  and  religion  be  not  raised, 
though  it  receive  but  scanty  treatment  in  the  follow 
ing  chapters.  If  philosophy  during  the  scholastic 
period  was  the  ''handmaid  of  religion,"  music  must 
now  and  always  be  assigned  a  more  sisterly  relation 
to  religion  than  philosophy  ever  was  justified  in 
claiming.  Take  away  from  religious  worship  music  in 
all  its  forms  and  an  irreparable,  incalculable  injury 
has  been  done. 

Again,  there  has  been  during  the  last  decade  or 
two  a  strong  tendency  to  give  music  a  larger  and 
larger  place  in  our  educational  practices,  and  it  is 
doubtful  if  the  tide  is  yet  at  its  flood.  Can  it  justify 
itself  there,  when  our  courses  of  study  are  growing  so 
fast  and  are  even  now  so  overcrowded  that  school 
work  seems  verging  on  dilettanteism?  And  if  so, 
how?  This  it  may  be  urged  is  more  a  practical  than 
a  philosophical  problem,  and  yet  it  should  be  remem 
bered  that  its  solution  demands  just  that  thorough 
going  psychological  analysis  at  which  this  discussion 
aims.  It  might  also  be  urged  that  to-day  even  prac 
tical  educational  questions  are  becoming  more  and 
more  problems  demanding  the  broadest  philosophi 
cal  treatment.  The  question,  therefore,  is  pertinent 
as  well  as  practical,  philosophical  as  well  as  pedagogi 
cal,  and  may  well  claim  our  interest  and  attention. 

Among  the  problems  of  a  philosophy  of  music  one 
other  must  engage  our  attention.  A  philosophical 
discussion  of  any  subject,  whether  it  be  science  or 
art,  soon  leads  to  a  consideration  of  its  content  as 
the  most  comprehensive,  the  most  searching  inquiry 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  19 

connected  with  the  investigation.  To  any  one  ac 
quainted  with  philosophical  procedure,  the  reason 
for  this  is  obvious ;  the  central  problem  of  philosophy 
is  Ontology,  or  the  theory  of  the  ultimate  constitution 
of  reality.  This  is  essentially  the  problem  of  the 
content  of  Nature.  Now  philosophy,  whichever  way 
it  turns  or  whatever  the  subject  with  which  ic  is  en 
gaged,  has  always  this  question  to  propound,  What 
is  the  essential,  irreducible  content  when  analysis 
has  reduced  the  subject  to  its  lowest  terms? 

Upon  the  problem  of  the  content  of  music  musi 
cal  theorists  have  long  been  divided  into  two  oppos 
ing  schools,  the  ''Formalists"  and  the  "Expression 
ists."  The  Formalists,  of  whom  Eduard  Hanslick  of 
Vienna  is  perhaps  the  best  spokesman,  maintain  that 
the  beauty  of  music  is  in  the  mere  formal  play  of 
musical  tones  in  rhythmic  and  melodic  or  harmonic 
progression.  The  favorite  figure  of  speech  of  this 
school  is  that  music  is  an  "arabesque  of  sound;"  that 
is,  sound  patterns  intricately  but  logically  interwoven 
and  interrelated.  According  to  the  contention  of 
those  who  subscribe  to  this  theory,  music  is  simply 
what  is  heard  or,  more  accurately,  what  the  ear  re 
ceives  ;  and  the  whole  content  of  music  is  the  techni 
cal  data  which  the  musician  discovers  in  his  analysis 
of  various  compositions.  As  Hanslick  says:  "Die 
Darstellung  eines  bestimmten  Gefuhls  oder  Affektes 
liegt  gar  nicht  in  dem  eigenen  Vermogen  der  Ton- 
kunst."  .  .  .  "Die  Ideen,  welche  der  Komponist 
darstellt,  sind  vor  allem  und  zuerst  rein  musikalische. 
Seiner  Phantasie  erscheint  eine  bestimmte  schone 
Melodie.  Sie  soil  nichts  anderes  sein  als  sie  selbst." 

The  Expressionists,  on  the  other  hand,  contend 

1  Vom  Musikalisch-Schonen,  pp.  26  and  30. 


20  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

that  music  is  something  more — far  more  than  an 
arabesque  of  sound,  artistic  and  sensuously  pleasing 
though  it  be.  To  regard  music  in  this  empirical  fash 
ion  is  to  defame  it  and  rob  it  of  all  its  significance  and 
glory.  This  school,  therefore,  regards  music  as  pri 
marily  a  symbolic  expression  of  inner  states  of  feeling, 
the  richest  and  deepest  the  mind  can  know.  Its 
power,  its  significance,  its  glory  are  due  to  the  direct 
ness  and  accuracy  with  which  it  can  express  the 
yearning  and  longing  and  exultation  of  conscious 
ness  in  its  various  moods. 

The  classical  proof  of  this  is  found  in  such  com 
positions  as  Beethoven's  Pastoral  Symphony,  with 
its  "Scene  at  the  Brook,"  the  "Peasants'  Merry 
making,"  the  "Storm,"  the  "Shepherd's  Song,"  etc. 
Or  reference  might  be  made  to  the  "Program 
Music"  of  some  of  our  best  composers  who  now 
and  then  essay  to  picture  for  us  some  definite  scene 
or  mood  through  the  medium  of  musical  sym 
bolism.  Wagner's  innovation  also,  in  which  he 
attempted  with  world-renowned  success  to  make 
sound  and  scene  and  sense  harmonious,  might  be  ad 
duced  as  evidence  for  this  theory  of  music.  Then 
there  is  music  like  that  of  Chopin  and  the  Roman 
ticists  in  general,  the  effect  of  which  is  so  palpably 
emotional  that  it  seems  artificial  to  interpret  it  in 
any  other  way.  In  the  face  of  such  examples  the 
formalistic  hypothesis  seems  barren  if  not  positively 
false.  The  favorite  figure  of  speech  of  those  of  this 
persuasion  is  that  music  is  the  ' '  language  of  the  emo 
tions."  Thus  supported  by  much  cogent  argument 
on  either  side,  the  breach  has  widened  until  the  ex 
treme  views  just  outlined  have  been  vigorously  sus 
tained.  And  even  though  it  be  asserted  that  this  is 


THE  PROBLEM   STATED  21 

no  longer  the  vital  problem  in  musical  aesthetics, 
which  is  probably  the  truth,  there  is  a  problem  here 
which,  though  it  needs  a  new  alignment,  is  still  of 
great  moment  in  a  philosophy  of  music. 

Before  we  take  up  the  psychological  analysis  of 
music,  it  seems  expedient  to  borrow  from  the  musi 
cians  such  data  concerning  the  technique  of  music 
as  will  assist  us  most  in  getting  a  clearer  conception 
of  the  psychological  character  of  this  art,  and  help 
us  to  solve  the  various  philosophical  problems  we 
have  just  proposed.  Such  is  the  purpose  of  the  fol 
lowing  chapter. 


CHAPTER  II 

MUSICAL  FORM 

I.  Every  work  of  art,  if  its  true  character  and 
its  full  significance  are  to  be  apprehended  adequately, 
must  be  considered  from  two  distinct  points  of  view, 
viz.,  the  objective  and  the  subjective.  From  the 
objective  point  of  view  a  work  of  art  is  a  concrete, 
sensuous  form  and  must  as  such  exemplify  certain 
sensuous  but  aesthetic  attributes. f  When  regarded 
in  this  way,  attention  is  centred  most  naturally  upon 
its  objective  or  structural,  and  upon  its  obvious, 
sensuous  attributes.  Beauty,  to  one  who  looks  out  - 
from  such  a  standpoint,  will  seem  to  lie  entirely  in 
these  sense  qualities  and  to  be  explained  by  attri 
butes  of  sense  entirely.  Thus  a  painting,  for  exam 
ple,  shows  colors  harmoniously  blended,  light  and 
shadow,  forms  suggested  or  accurately  drawn,  com 
position,  balance,  etc.,  all  objective  attributes  and, 
to  a  certain  extent,  to  be  appreciated  and  judged 
upon  their  sensational  value. 

But  a  work  of  art  is  also,  at  the  same  time,  a  sym 
bolic  form  to  be  interpreted  and  enriched  from  the 
inner  life  and  experience  of  the  beholder.  From  this 
point  of  view  the  objective  form  is  but  a  skeleton,  a 
symbol,  a  sign  to  be  interpreted  not  in  terms  of  ob 
jective  reality,  but  in  terms  of  the  inner  life  of  con 
sciousness.  "From  the  heart  it  sprang  and  to  the 
heart  it  must  appeal,"  said  one  of  the  masters  of  one  of 

22 


MUSICAL  FORM  23 

his  compositions.  Under  this  mode  of  envisagement 
the  subjective  experience,  not  the  objective  form,  as 
sumes  the  place  of  prime  importance.  Neither  of 
these  two  ways  of  regarding  art  is  superfluous,  nor  is 
the  whole  truth  to  be  gained  from  either  standpoint 
alone,  try  as  we  may.  Much  confusion  in  aesthetics 
has  resulted  from  a  failure  to  observe  this  truth.  In 
justice  to  the  subject,  and  certainly  in  the  interests 
of  the  fullest  conception  of  art  and  the  truth  it  por 
trays,  the  fact  must  be  recognized  that  both  points  of 
view  are  valid  and  complementary.  The  Hegelian 
method  has  not  been  rendered  obsolete  by  the  modern 
experimental  method  of  investigating  the  problems 
of  art.  This  chapter,  it  is  evident,  will  have  to  do 
primarily  with  the  objective  characteristics  of  music. 
Regarded  objectively,  each  art  has  its  own  specific 
elements  determined  both  by  the  nature  of  the  par 
ticular  ideas  to  be  represented  and  by  the  character  of 
the  medium  in  which  it  finds  expression.  In  gen 
eral,  it  is  true  that  thus  envisaged  a  study  of  art 
shows  certain  characteristic  forms  and  relationships 
between  them.  Thus  architecture  has  its  columns, 
its  arches  of  various  styles,  its  windows  and  walls, 
the  dome,  the  porch,  the  cornice,  etc.,  structural 
forms  to  be  variously  disposed  and  arranged ;  sculpt 
ure  has  the  different  parts  of  the  human  body  or  of 
other  forms  to  be  designed  truly,  and  to  be  disposed 
both  accurately  and  gracefully  or  significantly.  And 
even  literature,  that  art  in  which  content  counts  for 
so  much,  is  by  no  means  barren  of  formal  elements. 
Mention  may  be  made  of  such  elements  as  metre, 
rhythm,  rhyme,  balance,  euphony  and  the  like. 
Now  music,  as  well  as  the  other  arts,  has  its  own  char 
acteristic  formal  and  architectonic  attributes.  Not 


24  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

only  so,  but  in  their  extreme  importance  they  rank 
music  with  architecture,  the  art  of  pure  form,  rather 
than  with  literature,  the  art  of  deepest  thought. 
This  being  true,  they  are  evidently  worthy  of  the 
most  careful  examination. 

It  is  worthy  of  notice,  also,  that  in  a  study  of  an 
art  for  its  own  sake,  attention  centres  chiefly  upon 
the  objective  rather  than  the  subjective  attribute 
of  that  art.  Thus,  so  far  as  the  musician  studies  his 
art  technically, he  is  engrossed  with  the  formal  or  struc 
tural  attributes  of  the  composition  examined,  rather 
than  with  the  analysis  of  the  mental  reactions  it 
awakens.  That  this  formal  side  is  both  rich1  in  its 
aesthetic  possibilities  and  interesting  from  an  intel 
lectual  standpoint,  the  zeal  and  enthusiasm  of  musi 
cians  abundantly  proves.  An  analysis  of  a  composi 
tion,  like  any  other  analysis,  consists  of  the  separation 
of  a  composition  into  its  elements  so  that  their  in 
herent  nature  can  be  intelligently  understood,  and 
the  beauty  and  significance  of  their  synthesis  appre 
ciated.  That  these  musical  elements  of  form  must 
be  some  series  of  single  tones  or  chords,  possessing  in 
themselves  more  or  less  unity  and  character,  follows 
from  the  character  of  music  itself. 

2.  Two  main  reasons  may  be  given  why  the  sub 
ject  of  Musical  Form  is  vital  for  a  philosophy  of  this 
art.  In  the  first  place,  form  is  a  constituent  element 
in  music,  and  as  such  plays  its  own  part  in  the  musi 
cal  experience.  Since  a  work  of  art  must  be  a  con 
crete,  sensuous  form,  these  elements  of  form  are 
a  part  of  the  real  artistic  reality  of  the  art  in  question, 
and  as  such  cannot  be  disregarded. 

In  the  second  place,  form  in  art  is  important  be 
cause  the  thought  content  is_yitaUy  influenced,  not  to 


MUSICAL  FORM  25 

say  conditioned  by  these  formal  elements.  The  form 
of  an  art  is,  as  it  were,  the  mold  into  which  the  art 
conception  is  cast,  and  therefore  limits  even  the 
thought  itself.  Form  and  content  are  inseparable 
and  for  art  both  indispensable.  '  And  the  form  is  not 
only  influenced  by  the  content,  but  the  content  by 
the  form  as  well.  As  Lessing  long  ago  but  once  for 
all  made  plain,  only  a  limited  class  of  ideas  is 
suitable  for  pictorial  representation;  while  another 
limited  class  is  the  proper  subject  for  expression 
under  the  form  of  literature. 

The  argument  is  so  terse  and  so  convincing  that 
though  well  known  it  is  given  in  the  note  below.1  The 
same  principle  is  involved  in  the  case  of  music.  Its 
content  is  determined  partly  by  the  medium  in  which 
it  is  expressed,  but  partly  by  the  forms  in  which  con 
vention  has  decided  musical  ideas  should  be  cast. 
Thus,  not  only  to  appreciate  music  critically  as  the 
musician  appreciates  it,  but  to  understand  it  phil 
osophically  the  formal  elements  must  be  given  their 
due  consideration. 

3.  The  scale  is  of  such  fundamental  importance  in 
music,  both  from  the  objective  and  from  the  sub- 

1  "I  infer  thus:  If  it  is  true  that  painting  employs  in  its  imita 
tions  quite  different  media  or  signs  from  poetry,  the  former  employ 
ing  shapes  and  colors  in  space,  the  latter  articulate  tones  in  time; 
if  it  is  unquestionable  that  the  signs  must  have  a  convenient  relation 
to  the  thing  signified,  then  coexisting  signs  can  only  express  objects 
which  coexist  or  whose  parts  coexist,  and  successive  signs  can  only 
express  objects  which  are  successive  or  whose  parts  are  successive. 

"Objects  which  coexist  or  whose  parts  coexist  are  called  bodies. 
Consequently  bodies  with  their  visible  qualities  are  the  proper 
objects  for  painting. 

"Objects  which  are  in  succession,  or  whose  parts  are  in  succession, 
are  called  actions.  Consequently  actions  are  the  proper  objects  of 
poetry." 

Quoted  from  Bosanquet,  History  of  ^Esthetic,  p.  224. 


26  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

jective  points  of  view,  that  the  principal  facts  con 
cerning  it,  even  though  they  are  well  known,  must 
be  brought  to  mind  anew.  Especially  is  this  urgent 
for  an  adequate  understanding  of  the  principles  of 
musical  form,  the  subject  which  is  to  engage  our 
immediate  attention. 

Under  the  equal-tempered  system  of  tuning,  the 
piano  keyboard,  both  in  pitch  and  in  compass, 
represents  substantially  our  Western  musical  sys 
tem.  For  the  sake  of  simplicity  and  because  it 
is  the  instrument  most  readily  available,  our  dis 
cussion  will  be  in  terms  of  the  keyboard  of  this 
instrument.  On  the  seven-octave  keyboard  there 
are  eighty-five  distinct  sounds  forming  a  series  and 
differing  from  one  another  primarily  in  pitch.  The 
interval  between  any  two  successive  sounds  in  this 
series  is  approximately  uniform,  the  interval  being 
known  as  a  semitone  or,  in  the  language  of  the  musi 
cian,  a  "minor  second."  If  we  strike  all  the  keys  of 
the  piano  in  order,  beginning  with  the  lowest  or  the 
highest,  we  have  the  complete  "chromatic  scale," 
and  have  heard  essentially  all  the  sounds  (at  least 
as  regards  pitch)  used  in  Western  music. 

But  this  series  of  sounds  readily  breaks  up  into 
definitely  related  groups  which  are  of  fundamental 
importance  in  the  musical  art.  These  are  the  octaves 
and  the  scales.  For  example,  if  after  striking  any 
given  key,  the  thirteenth  key  above  it  be  struck 
also,  the  two  sounds  will  be  found  to  combine  har 
moniously  ;  the  one  is  an  octave  above  the  other 
and  represents  the  same  note.  The  significance  of 
the  octave  will  appear  in  our  discussion  of  the 
scales.  We  need  not,  therefore,  delay  to  treat  it 
further  at  this  point. 


MUSICAL  FORM 


27 


If  we  start  at  any  point  in  the  complete  chro 
matic  scale  represented  by  the  keyboard,  and 
ascending  omit  the  2d,  4th,  7th,  Qth  and  nth  keys, 
we  would  play  the  1st,  3d,  5th,  6th,  8th,  loth,  and 
I2th;  the  I3th  will  be  a  replica  of  the  1st,  only  an 
octave  higher.  A  continuation  of  this  order  through 
out  the  length  of  the  keyboard,  regarding  the  I3th 
always  as  the  beginning  of  the  order  to  be  repeated, 
gives  us  the  complete  diatonic  scale.  But  as  the 
order  of  intervals  in  the  successive  octaves  is  iden 
tical,  and  each  sound  an  exact  octave  from  the  same 
step  in  the  adjoining  octave,  it  is  sufficient  to  con 
fine  our  remarks  to  the  scale  as  it  is  found  within 
the  limits  of  an  octave.  An  examination  of  the 
order  of  sounds  as  thus  limited  will  show  at  once 
that  the  major  diatonic  scale  consists  of  seven  dis 
tinct  musical  sounds  leading  on  the  eighth  step  to 
a  sound  just  an  octave  above  the  first,  the  scale 
being  given,  of  course,  in  the  ascending  order.  Of 
these  seven  intervals  of  the  scale  within  the  octave 
two  consist  of  one  step,  that  is,  a  semitone,  and  five 
consist  of  two  steps,  or  whole  tones.  The  minor 
seconds  or  semitones  in  this  scale  always  occur  be 
tween  the  third  and  fourth  and  between  the  seventh 
and  eighth,  both  in  ascending  and  descending.  Thus 
the  major  diatonic  scale  may  be  regarded  as  eight 
sounds  selected  out  of  the  thirteen  in  an  octave  of 
the  chromatic  scale,  the  essential  point  being  the 
position  of  the  two  semitone  intervals.  Now  this 
scale  serves  as  the  standard  of  the  tonal  relation 
ships  in  melody,  although  it  is  always  possible  for 
the  musician  to  introduce  any  of  the  sounds  omitted 
in  the  diatonic  scale  as  occasion  demands.  But  it 
is  true,  nevertheless,  that  the  major  diatonic  scale 


28  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

is  the  scale  on  which  Western  music  is  based  pri 
marily.  This  is  true  not  alone  as  music  is  considered 
structurally,  but  subjectively,  the  scale  being  the 
very  pole-star  of  mental  reference. 

From  the  above  explanation  the  subject  of  various 
scales,  or  in  common  parlance,  the  "keys,"  is  readily 
understood.  A  major  diatonic  scale,  it  is  evident, 
can  be  begun  on  any  of  the  twelve  distinct  notes  of 
the  octave,  upon  the  C,  or  C#,  D,  or  D$,  E,  or  F, 
etc.  Each  such  scale  takes  its  name  from  the  initial 
note,  in  flats  or  sharps,  as  the  case  may  be.  The 
essential  thing  is  that  the  relationship  of  full  tones 
and  semitones  as  given  above  should  be  maintained. 
The  difference  between  the  keys  therefore  is  funda 
mentally  a  difference  in  pitch,  the  sameness  or  iden 
tity  a  matter  of  interval  relationships.  Thus  the 
relationship  of  sounds  to  one  another  in  the  scale 
is  the  unchanging  datum,  the  standard,  as  has  been 
said,  according  to  which  the  mind  recognizes  and 
appreciates  differences  in  pitch.  This  relationship, 
as  referring  especially  to  the  key  note,  is  the  prin 
ciple  of  tonality  to  which  we  shall  have  occasion  to 
refer  later  on.  It  may  be  said  also  that  just  as 
within  the  scale  some  intervals  are  more  natural 
than  others,  so  any  given  key  has  its  related  keys 
into  which  it  modulates  most  readily. 

Thus  far  the  fixity  of  the  relationship  of  the  tones 
of  the  scale  has  been  the  point  kept  constantly  in 
view  and  emphasized  as  of  most  importance  psycho 
logically  considered.  But  with  the  chromatic  scale, 
consisting  of  a  series  of  sounds  all  separated  in  pitch 
by  a  semitone,  it  is  evident  that  there  is  opportunity 
for  a  somewhat  wide  variation  upon  this  point,  the 
same  number  of  steps  in  the  octave  being  retained. 


MUSICAL  FORM 


29 


The  fact  that  the  semitone  in  the  major  diatonic 
scale  comes  between  the  third  and  fourth  and  the 
seventh  and  eighth  is  not  a  musical  necessity,  but 
a  convention.  There  is  evidently  room  for  consider 
able  variation  from  this  rule  before  all  the 'possible 
permutations  are  used.  The  Greeks,  as  a  matter  of 
fact,  in  their  various  "modes"  did  recognize  varia 
tions  in  this  respect  that  modern  music  no  longer 
uses.  Of  these  possible  variations  from  the  standard 
major  scale  modern  usage  sanctions  but  one,  the  so- 
called  minor  scale,  in  which  the  semitone  comes  be 
tween  the  second  and  third  and,  under  varying 
conditions,  between  the  seventh  and  eighth,  as 
in  the  major  scale,  or  between  the  fifth  and  sixth. 
The  subject  of  the  minor  mode,  an  important  one 
psychologically,  will  be  taken  up  for  discussion  in 
another  connection.  For  the  time  being,  for  the 
sake  of  simplicity  we  shall  confine  ourselves  to  the 
major  scale. 

In  the  scale  itself  some  sounds  are  closer  related 
to  the  key-note  than  others,  the  relationship  being 
capable  of  expression  in  mathematical  ratios,  the 
basis  being  the  number  of  vibrations  per  second 
made  by  the  individual  sounds.  Just  as  among  the 
Twelve  Apostles  three  were  found  whose  hearts  were 
in  closer  accord  than  the  others  to  the  heart  of  the 
Master,  so  in  the  twelve  tones  of  the  chromatic  scale 
there  are  three  which  harmonize  best  with  the  key 
note.  These  are  the  fifth  or  dominant,  with  a  vibra- 
tional  ratio  of  2:3;  the  fourth  or  sub-dominant,  its 
ratio  being  3:4;  and  the  third  or  mediant,  whose 
ratio  is  4:5.  The  octave  with  a  relation  of  1:2  is 
not  considered  as  a  separate  sound,  but  as  the  key 
note  repeated  and  strengthened.  In  music  objec- 


30  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

lively  considered,  these  relationships  are  of  the 
utmost  importance;  no  small  part  of  harmony  is 
based  upon  the  truth  thus  simply  expressed.  But 
great  as  is  the  importance  of  these  relationships 
from  the  objective  point  of  view,  from  the  subjec 
tive  standpoint  they  are  no  less  fundamental;  here 
their  closer  relationship  to  the  key-note  makes  them 
subjective  points  of  reference,  points  of  rest  and 
recognition  in  the  successive  tones  of  melody  or 
chords  of  harmony. 

The  last  phrase  leads  us  to  another  definition, 
necessary  even  in  this  fragmentary  outline  of  musi 
cal  principles.  I  refer  to  the  fundamental  chord  or 
triad,  which  can  be  built  up  on  any  one  of  the  twelve 
tones  of  the  chromatic  scale.  For  example,  if  any 
one  of  these  tones  is  selected  and  regarded  as  a  key 
note  and  with  it  is  combined  its  third  and  its  fifth, 
we  have  a  chord  or  harmony  which  may  stand  for 
mental  reference  in  the  place  of  the  key-note  itself. 
If,  in  the  same  way,  a  chord  is  built  up  upon  the  fifth, 
taking  its  third  and  fifth  we  have  the  dominant  triad 
or  harmony  for  the  given  key.  Chords  formed  in 
the  same  way  upon  sub-dominant  or  upon  the  me 
diant,  form  the  sub-dominant  and  mediant  triads 
respectively.  In  modern  harmonic  music  these 
triads  or  chords  serve  the  purpose  of  their  basic 
notes  in  simple  melody ;  that  is  to  say,  they  serve  as 
points  of  reference  and  of  rest  in  music  of  the  ordi 
nary  harmonic  type.  Such  are  some  of  the  more 
fundamental  facts  of  musical  theory  preliminary  to 
a  discussion  of  form  proper. 

4.  It  has  already  been  suggested  that  the  elements 
of  musical  form,  in  the  nature  of  the  case,  must  be 
certain  combinations  of  musical  tones  having  a  cer- 


MUSICAL  FORM  31 

tain  individuality  and  unity  of  their  own.  In  view 
of  this  fact  the  natural  point  at  which  to  begin  a 
discussion  of  the  structural  or  formal  elements  of 
music  is  with  the  phrase.  By  a  musical  phrase  we 
mean  a  structural  element  of  melody  (which  may  or 
may  not  be  harmonized)  of  two  or  more  measures, 
and  terminated  at  the  completion  of  a  certain  number 
of  rhythmic  units  by  some  form  of  cadence.  The  num 
ber  of  measures  in  a  phrase  is  variable,  two  being 
the  minimum,  four  the  most  typical  number,  five, 
six,  or  seven  not  uncommon,  eight  comparatively 
frequent,  and  more  not  exceptional.  Mendelssohn 
is  said  to  have  written  a  phrase  consisting  of  twenty- 
two  measures.  This,  however,  is  exceptional.  Mani 
festly  the  number  of  measures  the  phrase  contains  is 
not  its  determining  attribute;  neither  is  the  rhythm, 
for  this  also  is  variable.  But  if  not  its  length  or  its 
rhythm,  then  evidently  the  cadential  termination 
is  the  secret  of  its  individuality. 

By  a  cadence  in  music  is  meant  the  falling  (or 
rising)  of  the  melody  at  the  end  of  a  rhythmic  unit 
to  one  of  the  fundamental  notes  of  the  scale,  to  the 
tonic  or  to  the  dominant  in  most  cases. 1  If  the  phrase 
ends  with  the  tonic,  the  cadence  is  said  to  be  perfect; 
if  with  the  dominant,  it  is  said  to  be  an  imperfect 
cadence  or  a  half  cadence.  Interpreted  in  terms 
of  harmony,  which  in  modern  music  is  all  but  the 
universal  form,  the  tonic  triad  would  take  the  place 
of  the  key-note,  giving  a  perfect  cadence;  the  domi 
nant  triad  the  place  of  the  dominant,  giving  the 
half  cadence.  The  musician  has  other  distinctions 

1  Rhythmic  unit  is  here  used  to  denote  nothing  more  definite  than 
that  the  cadence  must  come  at  the  completion  of  a  certain  number 
of  measures. 


32  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

for  various  other  forms  of  endings,  but  for  our  pur 
poses  it  will  be  best  to  let  a  few  of  the  more  funda 
mental  examples  suffice.  As  examples  of  phrases 
we  may  give  the  following: 

ARNE:  "  Artaxerxes." 


CHORAL:  "O  gesegnetes  Regieren." 


a 

\ 

*•> 

<5*               iy 

*j      A 

a 

-' 


— F 


H 


In  the  second  example  there  are  two  phrases  each 
of  four  measures,  the  first,  ending  at  the  fourth 
measure  on  a  half  cadence,  the  second,  as  in  the 
eighth  measure,  on  a  perfect  or  full  cadence.  But 
for  simplicity  there  are  no  better  examples  of  phrases 
than  the  music  corresponding  to  the  various  lines  in 
our  familiar  songs  and  hymns. 

As  calling  attention  to  the  importance  of  the 
phrase  in  music  and  to  certain  of  its  characteristics, 
the  following  words  are  pertinent:  "It  is  necessary 
to  emphasize  the  importance  of  the  phrase,  for  from 
it  all  musical  forms  are  built,  and  in  all  productions 
of  music,  whether  instrumental  or  vocal,  the  proper 
accenting  and  phrasing  is  as  vital  as  in  the  speak 
ing  and  reading  of  a  language.  That  the  phrase  may 

NOTE. — The  shorter  quotations  in  this  chapter  are  taken  from 
Prout's  Musical  Form,  unless  otherwise  indicated. 


MUSICAL  FORM  33 

be  distinguished  by  the  listener  it  is  necessary  that 
an  apparent  change  be  made  in  the  rhythm ;  this  is 
brought  about  by  the  usual  introduction  of  the 
cadence,  which  is  the  end  of  the  phrase  or  the  point 
of  temporary  repose  between  two  phrases.  The 
cadence  generally  occurs  upon  an  accented  beat, 
and  its  presence  is  commonly  made  known  by  the 
lengthening  of  the  chord  which  is  sounded  at  that 
point ;  when  this  chord  is  built  up  from  the  key-note 
of  the  phrase,  the  pause  is  said  to  be  a  full  cadence; 
when  the  chord  is  that  of  the  fifth,  it  indicates  a  half 
or  imperfect  cadence.  The  significance  of  the  full 
and  the  half -cadence  will  be  apparent  later  in  this 
same  chapter.  The  cadence  is  commonly  very  ap 
parent,  and  rightfully  so,  as  next  to  the  knowledge 
of  melody,  the  finding  of  the  true  location  of  the 
cadence  is  the  most  important  task  in  properly 
analyzing  and  interpreting  music;  yet  in  many 
cases  the  cadence  is  partially  concealed  by  various 
technical  devices  which  it  is  unnecessary  to  mention 
here  as  we  are  striving  to  gain  only  a  general  under 
standing  of  our  subject." 

5.  Though  the  phrase  in  music  by  virtue  of  its  ca- 
dential  ending  is,  subjectively  considered,  the  small 
est  fundamental  unit,  it  is  not  incapable  of  analysis. 
The  phrase  is  usually  divided  into  sections,  divisions 
determined  both  by  accent  or  rhythmic,  and  by  pitch 
relations.  There  is  no  absolute  uniformity  in  the 
length  of  sections,  even  for  any  given  length  of  phrase. 
Prout's  summary  states  the  essential  facts:  "In 
many  cases,  though  not  invariably,  the  phrases  will 
themselves  be  divided  into  Sections.  Though  it  is 

1  The  American  History  and  Encyclopedia  of  Music.  Theory,  pp. 
176-177. 


34 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


possible  for  even  a  section  to  end  with  a  full  cadence, 
we  mostly  find  the  cadential  effect  less  distinct  in  a 
section  than  in  a  phrase.  Very  often  if  a  sentence 
consists  of  two  phrases,  one  of  these  will  be  subdi 
vided  into  two  sections,  while  the  other  is  indivisible. 
By  this  means  variety  of  detail  is  obtained  without 
the  sacrifice  of  symmetry."  1  For  example,  the  sen 
tence  quoted  above,  given  here  in  its  harmonized 
form  that  the  cadential  effect  may  be  more  marked, 
is  divided  into  sections  as  follows : 


n%        '          , 

|                        1 

1 

J 

^: 

/^ 

^y                     -^ 

r    r  V^ 

a           &          & 

M                        S                                                                      f?3 

i     ~r 
J      J 

-a 

^ 

1                   ^ 

[  v  v  •**  22         i                             1 

1                          i 

*^^              *  >                                L                                                ' 

„    M,                 1    I 

1      1     , 

^n  i 

/**"!'                       ! 

i 

1 

ii 

xC                 /*nJ                  ^ 

} 

l/r\                   ,^                  '^^ 

3          e 

s. 

s 

L  >Mx              "^             sp 

§»              5? 

V           g 

g      ii 

\        \ 

J      -J- 

J    J 

<s? 

-^ 

11 

\  \~J  «i|                  !                             ^-. 

f^ 

^                        f^j 

11 

^tei^                        1                             ' 

1                 ^ 

.•*'            2_ 

The  shorter  brackets  here  indicate  the  sections, 
the  larger  the  phrases.  One  other  example  may  be 
given. 

j'ca/  Form,  p.  35. 


MUSICAL  FORM 


35 


HAYDN  :  "  Symphony  in  G." 


Au         1  ./—•   ^      t      t       t  *a»      f[\       p^      ?! 

n^f  ^  "*     °v     r^1 


6.  Continuing  our  analysis  of  the  phrase,  we  come 
to  another  element  of  music,  the  motive,  which  struc 
turally  is  of  much  greater  significance  than  the  sec 
tion,  for  it  is  often  used  as  the  basis  of  what  is  known 
as  thematic  music.  As  the  usual  mensural  length 
of  the  section  consisted  of  two  strongly  accented 
notes,  that  is,  ordinarily  of  two  measures,  so  the  usual 
length  of  the  motive  is  such  as  to  include  one  and 
only  one  of  the  primary  accents  of  the  measure. 
Prout's  definition  will  help  to  make  this  clear.  "A 
motive  is  composed  of  a  strongly  accented  note,  pre 
ceded  by  one  or  more  unaccented  or  less  accented 
notes,  and  followed  by  unaccented  notes,  only  when 
the  harmony  requires  it,  or  the  context  shows  that 
the  following  motive  does  not  begin  immediately 


36  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

after  the  accent."  The  definition  calls  attention 
to  the  fact  that  exceptions  to  the  general  rule  are 
possible,  and  perhaps  not  uncommon.  Into  an  analy 
sis  of  such  variations  from  the  rule,  the  purpose  of 
our  discussion  does  not  compel  us  to  enter.  It  will 
be  for  our  purposes  sufficient  to  find  the  general 
truth,  the  common  principles  which  express  not  alone 
the  ruling  form,  but  which  determine  the  exceptions 
as  well.  No  rule  without  its  exceptions,  we  are  told, 
but  certainly,  no  exceptions  without  a  rule. 

The  first  period  of  the  Choral  quoted  above  is  thus 
divided  into  motives: 


Each  phrase,  it  will  be  noticed,  begins  with  an  incom 
plete  motive,  the  others  being  reducible  to  the  regu 
lar  or  inverted  form  of  the  very  simple  motive  of 


two  notes  in  the  relation  E— 


£=1.     But  one  of 


the  best  classic  examples  of  the  motive,  both  because 
of  its  inherent  individuality  and  because  of  the  won 
derful  use  made  of  it,  is  the  motive  upon  which  Bee 
thoven  has  built  the  first  movement  of  the  Symphony 
in  C  minor. 


Such,"  he  said,  "  is  the  knock  of  Fate."     In  order 
1  Ibid.,  p.  31. 


MUSICAL  FORM 


37 


that  the  reader  may  not  neglect  to  hear  it  anew  I 
quote  a  few  measures. 


BEETHOVEN:  "Symphony  in  C  Minor.' 


.233. 


3 


THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 


There  are  several  devices  open  to  the  musician  by 
which  he  is  able  to  develop  from  a  simple  motive  an 
orderly  and  logical  artistic  whole.  Some  of  these 
have  been  exemplified  in  the  music  already  quoted, 
and  are  worthy  of  a  brief  notice  even  in  a  sketch 
which  purports  to  be  only  the  briefest  possible  out 
line  of  the  element  of  musical  form.  In  the  first  place, 
the  motive  may  be  repeated  either  literally  or  with 
certain  variations.  If  repeated  literally,  that  is,  with 
out  change  in  pitch  or  rhythm,  its  use  is  obvious.  But 
since  the  motive  consists  of  two  distinct  elements,  viz., 
pitch  relationships  and  rhythmic  figure,  so  to  speak, 
it  is  possible  to  modify  either  the  order  of  the  inter 
vals  or  the  rhythmic  value  of  the  notes  without  de 
stroying  the  identity  of  the  basic  motive.  For  ex 
ample,  the  motive  is  frequently  repeated  at  different 
points  in  the  scale,  the  intervals  and  rhythm  being 
retained,  as  in  the  first  instance  cited ;  or  the  rhythm 
being  retained,  the  intervals  may  be  modified  as  is 
done  in  the  Symphony  quoted ;  or  subordinate  varia 
tions  may  be  made  in  both  the  intervals  and  in  the 
time  elements  without  entirely  obscuring  the  identity 
of  the  subject.  A  note  or  notes  may  be  amplified  by 
substituting  two-eighths  for  a  quarter  or  two  quar 
ters  for  a  half,  etc. 


MUSICAL  FORM 


39 


Inversion  is  another  variation  by  means  of  which 
substantial  modifications  are  introduced.  This  pro 
cess  consists  of  using  the  notes  in  an  inverse  order,  so 
that  the  interval  is  changed  from  an  ascending  order 
to  a  descending  or  vice  versa,  the  interval  or  intervals 
being  retained.  Examples  of  this  process  are  found 
in  the  Choral  cited  above.  The  device  being  com 
mon,  however,  the  following  examples  may  well  be 
noticed : 1 


F.  SCHUBERT. 


or  the  modification  of  this  process  in  Beethoven's 
Sonata,  Op.  26, 


which  is  repeated  as  follows : 


By  such  structural  devices  and  others  not  men 
tioned,  the  musician  can  develop  from  even  the 
simplest  motive  a  very  complex  and  yet  a  perfectly 
logical,  artistic  whole.  For  a  fuller  discussion  of  this 
technical  subject  the  reader  is  referred  to  musical 
literature. 

Thus  far  the  discussion  has  been  limited  to  an  ana 
lytic  study  of  the  phrase.  But  this  same  structural 

1  Quoted  from  Cornell's  Musical  Form,  pp.  9i~92- 


40  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

unit  by  synthetic  processes  enters  into  the  highest 
and  most  complex  musical  forms,  such  as  the  sonata 
and  the  symphony.  It  is  in  this  rather  than  in  its 
own  well-marked  individuality  that  its  true  musical 
significance  is  found. 

The  musical  phrase,  notwithstanding  the  elements 
of  unity  it  possesses,  as  the  name  itself  would  indi 
cate,  is  not  able  to  stand  alone  and  unrelated  to  other 
phrases.  Just  as  in  language  the  phrase  is  incom 
plete  apart  from  its  use  in  the  sentence,  so  the  musi 
cal  phrase  apart  from  the  balanced  after-phrase  fails 
to  produce  in  the  mind  that  sense  of  finality  and  rest 
which  characterizes  the  expression  of  a  complete 
thought.  The  principle  of  dual  balance  is  so  essen 
tial  to  music  that  in  the  larger  structural  forms  it  is  a 
rule  almost  without  exception  that  every  phrase  or 
combination  of  phrases  must  be  balanced  by  a  phrase 
or  combination  of  phrases  of  equal  temporal  value. 
The  phrase  is  a  unit,  but  music  is  a  composition  of 
phrases,  and  in  placing  them  together  order  must  be 
observed.  Compare  for  example,  the  feeling  of  unity 
and  completeness  produced  by  the  single  phrase  and 
the  period  of  two  balanced  phrases  following  it. 


ARNE  :  "Artaxerxes.1 


MUSICAL  FORM  41 

7.  The  simplest  combination  of  phrases  would  be 
manifestly  two  phrases  of  equal  length  balanced  the 
one  against  the  other  as  in  the  example  just  quoted 
from  Haydn.  This  simple  form  of  two  phrases  thus 
balanced  is  known  among  musical  theorists  as  the 
sentence  or  period,  the  latter,  perhaps,  the  more  com 
mon  designation.  When  two  periods  in  turn  are  bal 
anced  the  one  against  the  other,  the  necessity  for 
having  the  fore-phrase  and  the  after-phrase  (as  the 
two  phrases  of  the  period  are  called)  of  equal  length 
is  obviated;  the  demand  for  symmetry  and  balance 
is  met  in  such  a  case  by  the  more  comprehensive 
balance  of  period  against  period.  The  case  here  is 
altogether  analogous  to  balance  and  symmetry  in 
architecture.  For  example,  if  there  are  in  the  facade 
of  a  building  but  two  windows,  one  on  each  side  of 
the  central  doorway,  symmetry  demands  that  they 
should  be  of  equal  size;  but  if  there  are  two  on  each 
side  of  the  door,  symmetry  is  maintained  if  one  be 
large,  one  small,  provided  those  on  the  opposite  side, 
and  in  the  same  order,  are  of  like  form.  This  is  the 
secret  not  only  of  the  principle  of  dual  balance  but 
of  the  whole  formal  architectonic  of  music.  Thus,  in 
the  period  the  cadential  feeling  at  the  end  of  the 
phrases  is  supplemented  by  the  feeling  of  balance  or 
symmetry. 

In  the  period  the  first  phrase  is  usually  terminated 
by  some  form  of  a  half  cadence,  thus  pointing  on 
to  the  second  phrase  as  the  true  conclusion  of  the 
musical  thought.  This  psychological  effect  may 
be  noticed  in  the  following  example,  or  by  running 
through,  line  by  line,  any  of  our  standard  simple 
songs. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


FORE  PHRASE.  Beethoven.1 


ntt                                                         II 

J/  "it 

, 

i 

XL    If 

1          N       1 

EH  .ft  _. 

_        ->     - 

.«       a 

AFTER-PHRASE. 


II 


But  even  such  a  symmetrical  form  as  the  period 
does  not  furnish  sufficient  body  to  serve  as  a  genuine 
art  form,  except  in  very  unusual  cases.  Just  as  a  sin 
gle  sentence  or  a  paragraph  however  well  turned  or 
decoratively  printed  will  hardly  rank  as  a  work  of 
literary  art,  so  the  period  in  music,  whether  composed 
of  four  or  eight-measure  phrases,  will  not  suffice  as 
the  standard  for  musical  form.  It  is  too  fragmental, 
however  perfect  in  itself,  to  merit  the  noble  name  of 
art.  Schumann,  it  is  true,  has  written  a  composition 
of  only  eight  measures,  Op.  79,  No.  I,  but  this  is  only 
an  exception  that  proves  the  rule. 

8.  The  simplest  combination  of  phrases  usually  re 
garded  as  a  standard  art  form  is  the  simple  Two-Part, 
or  Binary  Form;  or,  as  it  is  often  called,  the  Song- 
Form.  This  form  structurally  is  simplicity  itself, 
being  composed  merely  of  two  related  periods.  Al 
though  it  is  composed  frequently  of  one  period 
simply  repeated,  the  more  usual  form  is  to  find 
some  variation  introduced  in  the  fore-phrase  of  the 

1  Quoted  from  Cornell's  Musical  Form,  p.  28. 


MUSICAL  FORM 


43 


second  period,  the  after-phrase  of  this  period  being 
the  same  as  the  after-phrase  of  the  first  period.  The 
following  is  a  typical  illustration : 


FIRST  PERIOD. 


Beethoven.1 


m 


Jf-w 

i 

_. 

tfh-fr 

1  1  —  • 

1        f^ 

—  *— 

Xk   w 

i        i            i    ,       ,       i 

v 

rt\  "      e 

—  J- 

!            ^                                 J 

N 

*       «     '          J      0 

'           J 

V 

oL 

SECOND  PERIOD. 

r    •      0        ^ 

L^n  — 

--n  1=  —,  —  ±=r= 

H             1               !                          , 

i  T\     *^ 

j              '              i               i 

J 

\Mv                     J 

0            *              '        J    0 

0^      •       0 

0 

V  »•  u 

—  -^ 

—  ^J 

1                                                                      1 

fk:'&^ 

|||                       :                                { 

M               9 

When  it  is  remembered  that  in  this  form  the  length 
of  the  phrases,  the  melody,  the  harmony,  and  the 
rhythm  are  all  variable  quantities,  it  is  evident  that 
even  in  such  a  simple  form  as  this  there  is  the  possi 
bility  for  much  originality  and  for  various  styles  of 
music.  The  list  of  musical  forms  which,  when  ana- 

1  Quoted  from  Cornell's  Musical  Form,  p.  40. 


44 


THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 


lyzed  show  this  simple  binary  structure,  is  not  small, 
and  the  compositions  are  all  but  innumerable.  First, 
may  be  mentioned  the  great  body  of  hymns,  in  which 
there  is  usually  but  little  variation  from  the  normal 
form.  We  give  but  one  familiar  one  to  show  the 
structure. 


As  the  name  "Song-Form"  suggests,  this  is  also 
the  typical  form  of  most  of  our  common  and  well- 
loved  songs;  indeed,  it  was  given  this  name  from  the 
fact  that  the  Volkslieder  of  Germany  were  written  in 
this  form.  In  the  list  of  binary  forms,  therefore,  must 
be  included  most  of  the  simple,  well-loved  songs  of 
the  people,  such  as  Annie  Laurie,  Blue-bells  of  Scot 
land,  Old  Folks  at  Homeland  their  ilk.  In  structure 
they  are  so  simple  and  their  unity  is  so  evident  that 
they  are  the  standard  of  true  music  for  those  who  are 
unable  to  appreciate  the  unity  of  forms  of  a  more 
complex  structure. 

Still  another  important  use  of  this  form  in  music 
is  found  in  waltzes  and  other  forms  of  dances,  not 
merely  of  the  popular  type,  but  of  the  best  compos 
ers.  Schubert,  for  example,  has  more  than  two  hun- 


MUSICAL  FORM 


45 


dred  of  his  shorter  compositions  written  in  this  form. 
One  of  them  is  here  given. 

SCHUBERT,  "Trauer  Waltzer,"  Op.  9,  No.  2. 


f Pi"^"~i  • '       1 i 1 r~l — — I — I 1 1 — M 

f4-"— I— • — \-m — I- 


-w-       <r       * 


$  * 


g^= 


N  :  ^-=i-^: 


** 


^^ 


-- 

: 


THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 


These  few  examples  will  suffice  to  give  the  reader 
a  general  idea  of  this  simplest  musical  form,  to  show 
its  extended  use,  and  to  illustrate  its  possibilities  as 
a  simple,  logical  form.  What  has  been  said  or  shown, 
however,  will  hardly  suggest,  except  to  the  musician, 
all  the  possibilities  for  variation,  embellishment,  and 
personal  idiosyncrasies  which  composers  have  found 
opportunity  to  introduce,  even  in  this  extremely 
simple  form.  To  do  this,  however,  is  beside  our 
present  purpose,  and  impossible  within  the  limita 
tion  of  the  chapter  to  be  devoted  to  this  subject. 
All  that  can  be  done  is  again  to  refer  the  reader  to 
treatises  on  this  subject. 

9.  The  other  typical  musical  form  is  the  Three- 
Part  or  Ternary  Form.  Though  a  little  more  com 
plex,  it,  too,  in  its  plan  is  so  simple  that  its  logical 
structure  can  be  understood  by  any  one.  Instead  of 
the  two  related  periods  or  sentences  of  the  binary 
form  simply,  there  is  first  a  complete  binary  form 
ended  by  a  full  cadence  in  the  tonic  key ;  the  second 
part,  often  in  another  key,  and  contrasted  with  the 
first  also  by  the  use  of  new  subject  matter,  may  be 
a  complete  binary  form,  though  often  it  will  modu 
late  back  to  the  original  key  instead  of  closing  with 
a  cadence  in  the  key  in  which  it  is  written;  the 


MUSICAL  FORM 


47 


third  part  is  a  repetition  of  the  first  part  simply, 
that  is,  without  variations;  or  changes  of  minor 
importance  may  be  introduced.  Frequently  a  coda 
or  tail-piece  is  added.  A  single  example  is  given 
with  the  parts  marked  respectively  I,  II,  and  III. 


BEETHOVEN:  "Sonatina,"  Op.  79. 


48 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


-IT—  i  0  0    j 


Sfc 


1 


MUSICAL  FORM 


49 


tr. 


=rfrp 


• *-\ — i- 

-f-i-- 


-\=i 


dim. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


~*~" 


^^^^™^^^^^^^^^~  —  ^^^^•••^"•^^^^^•^  —  i 
i    ^  —  i    ^ 

==  ==*=  =s==EE=iE 


-N 4- 


! 


— 


MUSICAL  FORM 


(TIT) 


espress. 


=HLJ— I |__l 

t^3^ 


s 


• — * 1 — • — • -0-9-1 — I  -0—0 1 — • — • 1 — * 


i 


1 —   tHT        ^     -^— bl *-t     -t^ 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


dt=f= 


4= — t 


-:.->-- 


r — b- 


— y- 


=r-r^3       =S 


MUSICAL  FORM  53 


The  following  is  Front's  analysis  of  this  move 
ment:  "The  first  part  of  the  movement  (to  the  end 
of  bar  8)  is  a  complete  binary  form  containing  two 
sentences,  the  first  closing  in  the  relative  major  and 
the  second  returning  to  the  tonic  key.  The  second 
part  of  the  movement  begins  with  a  modulation  to 
E  flat,  in  which  key  we  find  the  episode.  This  is 
also  made  of  two  sentences;  the  first  is  four  bars  in 
length,  ending  with  a  full  close  (bar  4),  with  femi 
nine  ending;  the  second  sentence  is  extended  to 
five  bars  by  the  repetition  of  its  first  bar  an  octave 
higher.  Its  fore-phrase  finishes  with  an  interrupted 
cadence  (bar  6),  and  its  after-phrase  with  a  full 
cadence  in  bar  8.  The  second  part  is  completed  by 
a  third  sentence,  modulating  back  to  G  minor  and 
ending  with  a  half  cadence  in  that  key.  The  third 
part  is  an  exact  repetition  of  the  first,  followed  by 
a  coda  of  one  sentence  in  which  four  bars  are  ex 
tended  to  five  by  the  sequential  repetition  of  the 
second  bar.  The  final  cadence  has  a  feminine 
ending."1 

The  ternary  form  is  found  both  in  the  larger 
compositions  of  the  leading  composers,  in  sonatas, 
symphonies,  and  quartets,  in  the  slow  movements, 
the  minuets,  and  scherzos,  and  in  many  composi- 

1  Musical  Form,  p.  188. 


54  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

tions  written  for  the  piano  such  as  nocturnes,  im 
promptus,  etc.  This  form,  like  the  binary,  is  subject 
to  the  widest  possible  variation  in  its  rhythmic, 
melodic,  and  harmonic  structure,  so  that  only  the 
trained  musician  is  able  to  appreciate  intellectually 
many  of  the  finer  structural  points  which  make 
music,  not  only  a  subject  worthy  of  the  most  careful 
study,  but  the  medium  of  expression  for  true  genius, 
and  the  most  varied  forms  of  individuality.  All  of 
this,  however,  in  the  present  discussion  has  been 
left  untouched  that  attention  may  be  concentrated 
upon  the  basic  principles  of  musical  form  and  of 
structural  unity  in  the  various  forms  of  musical 
compositions.  To  go  into  a  detailed  examination 
of  all  the  modifications  of  these  principles  and  forms 
is  the  proper  work  of  the  musician,  not  of  the  student 
of  philosophy.  It  must  suffice  in  the  present  connec 
tion  if  we  have  gained  some  knowledge  of  musical 
terminology,  have  learned  the  language  of  the  coun 
try,  as  it  were,  and  have  shown  that  music  as  well 
as  the  other  arts  has  its  proper  basis  of  unity  in 
certain  definite  structural  forms. 


PART   II 

THE    PSYCHOLOGICAL   ANALYSIS 
OF    MUSIC 


CHAPTER   III 

RHYTHM 

I.  An  analysis  of  a  musical  composition  shows 
three  distinct  elements  in  modern  music — Rhythm, 
Melody,  and  Harmony.1  Whatever  the  type  of  the 
composition,  however  strong  the  personal  equation 
of  the  composer,  every  composition  worthy  of  seri 
ous  consideration  will  show  these  factors  coalesced  to 
form  a  complete  and  unitary  work  of  art.  These 
three  elements,  therefore,  serve  as  the  natural  basis 
for  our  psychological  analysis  of  music.  What  is 
the  essential  nature  of  each,  and,  more  important, 
what  is  the  nature  of  the  psychological  reaction  to 
which  each  gives  rise?  The  answer  to  these  two 
questions  will  give  us  the  data  upon  which  to  base 
conclusions  as  to  the  true  philosophical  character  of 
music  and  of  its  relations  to  other  forms  of  human 
experience. 

So  many  scientific  investigations  of  rhythm  have 
been  made  that  it  may  seem  both  useless  and  pre 
sumptuous  to  attempt  to  add  anything  to  what  is 
already  known  and  has  been  frequently  repeated. 
Herbert  Spencer,  for  example,  has  treated  the  sub 
ject  in  its  cosmic  relations  and  shown  its  presence 

1  In  the  light  of  the  stress  now  being  laid  upon  orchestration,  it  is 
an  open  question  whether  color  should  not  be  added  to  this  trinity 
of  elements.  But  as  what  is  known  as  color  introduces  no  new 
psychological  element  in  the  musical  experience,  we  shall  confine 
our  discussion  in  the  main  to  the  three  elements  mentioned. 

57 


58  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

and  significance  as  a  law  of  motion  in  the  evolution 
of  the  material  world.  Its  adaptability  to  the 
method  of  physiological  and  psycho-physical  re 
search  has  made  it  a  favorite  subject  for  experimen 
tal  investigation  in  our  laboratories,  and  its  impor 
tance  as  an  element  in  music  has  led  the  musical 
fraternity  to  analyze  it  as  a  factor  in  music.  But 
notwithstanding  all  that  has  been  done  along  these 
various  lines  the  inquiry  we  propose  has  not  been 
explicitly  answered.  The  principal  facts  concerning 
rhythm,  it  may  be,  have  been  ascertained,  but  the 
argument  to  prove  our  point  has  not  been  formu 
lated.  Thus  there  is  abundant  reason  why  we  must 
take  up  the  subject  anew,  treat  it  in  our  own  way, 
and  justify  our  conclusions  by  our  own  arguments. 
That  so  much  matter  is  available  makes  the  task 
easier,  but  it  does  not  obviate  the  need  for  under 
taking  it. 

2.  Genetically  considered,  rhythm  is  the  primary 
factor  from  which  music  as  well  as  dancing  and 
poetry  have  developed;  it  is  the  dynamic  that  first 
aroused  the  mind  to  an  instinct  or  desire  for  artistic 
expression.  Parry,  it  is  true,  makes  the  rhythmic 
and  the  melodic  factors  coordinate,  but  he  does  this 
in  a  general  way  without  raising  the  question  of  the 
real  temporal  primacy  of  either  of  the  two.1  Upon 
the  basis  of  physiological  and  biological  investiga 
tions  rhythm  must  be  accorded  the  honor  of  an 
tiquity  and  regarded  as  the  root  from  which  have 
developed  the  various  attempts  of  primitive  men 
for  artistic  expression.  It  is,  of  the  three  elements  of 
music,  unquestionably  the  one  deepest  seated  in  the 
human  organism,  and  biologically  can  be  traced 

1  Vid.  Evolution  of  the  Art  of  Music,  Ch.  I. 


RHYTHM  59 

lower  down  in  the  scale  of  life  than  our  suscepti 
bility  for  either  melodic  or  harmonic  factors.  As  it 
is  found  in  man  susceptibility  to  rhythm  is  an 
instinct,  and  he  responds  to  it  reflexly  and  almost 
inevitably;  it  seems,  therefore,  to  be  fixed  in  the 
very  heart  of  that  most  vital  of  all  vital  substances, 
the  nervous  system.  In  modern  anthropological 
and  genetically  psychological  investigations  rhythm 
looms  large.  G.  Stanley  Hall  says:  "In  the  dark 
background  of  history  there  is  now  much  evidence 
that  at  some  point  play,  art,  and  work  were  not 
divorced;  they  may  all  have  sprung  from  rhythmic 
movement,  which  is  so  deep-rooted  in  biology  be 
cause  it  secures  most  joy  of  life  with  least  expense." 
But  stronger,  more  positive  still,  are  the  words  of 
Karl  Biicher,  who  says:  "In  that  centre  of  conver 
gence  we  see  work  still  undistinguished  from  art  and 
from  play.  There  is  a  single  human  activity,  a 
solution  of  work,  play  and  art.  In  this  unity  of 
physical  and  mental  activity  we  perceive  the  germs 
of  development  all  along  these  lines.  .  .  .  The  arts 
of  motion,  music,  dance,  and  poetry  came  into  being 
in  the  performance  of  work ;  the  arts  of  rest  of  form 
are  embodied,  if  only  in  the  forms  of  movement,  in 
the  results  of  work.  This  is  all  simply  the  instinc 
tive  action  of  life  in  common  average  humanity— 
in  savages,  in  peasants,  in  working  people.  The 
bond  that  holds  together  these  elements  which  we 
have  come  to  think  so  unlike  is  rhythm,  whose 
source  is  in  the  very  essence  of  the  human  organ 
ism."2 

Further   probability   of   the   correctness   of    this 

1  Adolescence,  Vol.  I,  p.  211. 

2  Arbeit  und  Rhythmus,  p.  357  (quoted  from  Goodeil). 


60  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

view  of  the  primacy  of  rhythm  is  furnished  by  the 
wide,  almost  universal  field  in  which  rhythm  is 
found.  Not  only  is  rhythm  an  instinct  which  func 
tions  in  the  arts,  as  in  music  and  dancing  and  poetry, 
but  it  is  a  principle  which  seems  to  extend  over  the 
whole  realm  of  human  activities,  both  voluntary  and 
involuntary.  Mention  may  be  made  of  the  regular 
systole  and  diastole  of  the  heart,  the  periodic  recur 
rence  of  inspiration  and  expiration,  the  longer  rhythm 
of  working  and  sleeping,  the  recurrence  of  hunger, 
the  activity  of  certain  glands,  the  periodic  activity 
of  the  reproductive  organs,  the  rhythm  of  walking 
and  of  talking,  and  of  thinking  as  well;  the  more 
obscure  but  no  less  certain  changes  connected  with 
the  nutrition  of  the  individual  cells  of  the  body  and 
even  with  the  growth  of  the  embryo.  Considering 
the  wide  range  of  vital  processes  in  which  rhythm 
shows  itself  as  a  characteristic  attribute,  it  seems 
safe  to  venture  the  generalization  that  rhythm  is 
a  characteristic  of  all  organic  action,  though  it 
may  be  modified  by  forces  we  do  not  as  yet  under 
stand. 

3.  To  trace  all  of  these  various  forms  of  rhythmic 
action,  with  the  exception  of  the  more  obscure  forms 
in  nutrition  and  in  the  growth  of  the  embryo  back 
to  fluctuations  in  the  nervous  discharge  controlling 
such  actions,  is  a  short  step  and  one  that  must  be 
taken. 

The  words  of  Professor  Ladd  express  a  truth  to 
which  few  psychologists  will  wish  to  dissent:  "All 
feelings,  as  such,  but  especially  as  'pleasure-pains,' 
are  subject  to  the  law  of  Rhythm  and  Repetition. 
The  ground  for  both  of  these  laws  is  found  in  the 
most  fundamental  conditions  of  the  life  and  activity 


RHYTHM  6l 

of  the  nervous  system  itself. ":  Rhythm,  therefore, 
we  conclude  is  organic,  an  inherent  property  of  the 
nervous  system,  and  manifests  itself  therefore  even 
in  the  activity  of  the  higher  centres  with  which 
mental  life  is  so  intimately  correlated. 

That  rhythm  is  a  phenomenon  connected  pri 
marily  with  the  functioning  of  the  nervous  system 
is  a  fact  that  goes  far  toward  explaining  some  of 
the  problems  connected  with  a  philosophy  of  music. 
Being  organic  and  natural,  not  a  cultivated  reaction, 
it  is  readily  seen  why  music  with  a  pronounced 

1  Ladd,  Psychology  Descriptive  and  Explanatory,  p.  203. 

NOTE. — The  physiological  explanation  of  rhythmic  discharge  of 
nerve  centres  is  so  simple,  so  illuminating,  that  it  is  given  in  the 
words  of  a  well-known  physiologist: 

"Suppose  a  tube  closed  water-tight  below  by  a  hinged  bottom, 
which  is  kept  closed  by  a  spring.  If  a  steady  stream  of  water  is 
poured  into  the  tube  from  above,  the  water  will  rise  until  its  weight 
is  able  to  overcome  the  pressure  of  the  spring,  and  the  bottom  will 
then  be  forced  down  and  some  water  flow  out.  The  spring  will  then 
press  the  bottom  up  again,  and  the  water  will  accumulate  until  its 
weight  again  forces  open  the  bottom  of  the  tube,  and  there  is  an 
other  outrush;  and  so  on.  By  opposing  a  certain  resistance  to  the 
exit  we  could  thus  turn  a  steady  inflow  into  a  rhythmic  outflow. 
Or,  take  the  case  of  a  tube  with  an  end  immersed  in  water  and  a 
steady  stream  of  air  blown  into  its  other  end.  The  air  will  emerge 
from  the  immersed  end,  not  in  a  steady  current,  but  in  a  series  of 
bubbles.  Its  pressure  in  the  tube  must  rise  until  it  is  able  to  over 
come  the  cohesive  force  of  the  water,  and  then  a  bubble  bursts  forth ; 
after  this  the  air  has  again  to  get  up  the  requisite  pressure  in  the 
tube  before  another  bubble  is  ejected;  and  so  the  continuous  supply 
is  transformed  into  an  intermittent  delivery.  Physiologists  suppose 
something  of  the  same  kind  to  occur  in  the  respiratory  centre.  Its 
nerve  cells  are  always,  under  usual  circumstances,  being  excited; 
but,  to  discharge  a  nervous  impulse  along  the  efferent  respiratory 
nerves,  they  have  to  overcome  a  certain  resistance.  The  nervous 
impulses  have  to  accumulate,  or  'gain  a  head,'  before  they  travel 
out  from  the  centre,  and,  after  their  discharge,  time  is  required  to 
attain  once  more  the  necessary  level  of  irruption  before  a  fresh 
innervation  is  sent  to  the  muscles." — Martin's  Human  Body,  p.  418. 


62  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

accent  and  strong  rhythm  finds  almost  a  universal 
appreciation  among  mankind.  Response  to  a  ryth- 
mic  stimulus  is  instinctive,  and  as  inevitable  as  any 
other  reflex  act;  it  is  mechanical,  not  intellectual  or 
appreciative. 

Again,  the  peculiar  power  which  music  with  a 
strongly  marked  rhythm  has  for  the  natural,  untu 
tored  ear,  finds  in  this  physiological  theory  of  rhythm 
a  ready  explanation.  It  is  of  the  nature  of  physio 
logical  reflexes  and  instincts  that  they  should  be 
clamant,  impellant,  gaining  their  end  by  the  mere 
force  of  direct  impulse  rather  than  by  any  conscious 
appreciation  of  the  end  to  be  realized  by  such  ac 
tion.  Consequently  such  incentives  to  action  are  so 
direct,  so  powerful  indeed  in  their  incitation,  that 
they  can  be  resisted  only  by  the  most  direct  act  of 
will  or  by  a  taste  for  something  higher  cultivated 
by  long  and  arduous  labor. 

4.  But  the  question  of  supreme  importance  for  a 
philosophy  of  music  is  to  determine  the  nature  of  the 
mental  response  these  elements  of  music  elicit.  The 
musical  experience  is  fundamentally  a  mental,  not  a 
physiological  phenomenon,  and  in  the  end  all  terms 
must  be  reduced  to  terms  of  consciousness.  Hence 
it  will  not  suffice  to  regard  rhythm  merely  as  a 
property  of  nerve  activity;  its  influence  upon  con 
sciousness  is  the  salient  point  in  the  matter. 

There  are  two  lines  of  investigation  by  which  light 
may  be  thrown  upon  the  psychological  significance 
of  musical  rhythm,  and,  because  the  subject  for  musi 
cal  esthetics  is  of  paramount  importance,  neither 
of  them  can  safely  be  neglected.  The  first  is  an  em 
pirical  inquiry  into  the  mental  effect  of  musical 
rhythm  as  it  is  found  in  various  types  of  music.  The 


RHYTHM  63 

second  method  is  to  carry  our  psychological  analysis 
of  rhythm  a  step  farther  and  inquire  how  the  rhyth 
mic  action  of  the  nervous  system  manifests  itself  in 
consciousness. 

In  brief,  the  thesis  which  we  shall  endeavor  to 
substantiate  is  that  the  natural  instinctive  effect  of 
rhythm  is  an  emotional  modification  of  conscious 
ness.  Whatever  the  possibilities  may  be  for  a  re 
fined  development  of  this  element  in  music,  and  for 
its  more  intellectual  utility  as  an  element  in  the  high 
est  forms  of  musical  composition,  the  whole  weight  of 
evidence  genetically  considered  goes  to  prove  that 
the  emotional  is  the  primary  effect  upon  conscious 
ness.  If  this  be  true,  as  we  believe  the  investigation 
will  clearly  prove,  it  is  safe  to  conclude  that,  notwith 
standing  the  later  more  artistic  development  of 
rhythm,  it  never  gets  away  from  its  primal  character 
or  ceases  to  modify  the  emotional  tone  of  the  con 
scious  state  into  which  it  enters.  Thus  there  is  found 
the  basis  for  an  emotional  element  in  music  which 
both  biologically  and  psychologically  is  fundamen-/ 
tal  and  cannot  therefore  be  either  denied  or  disre-f' 
garded. 

5.  Rhythm,  as  has  been  said,  is  an  attribute  of 
neural  activity  inbred  in  the  nervous  tissue  through 
ages  and  cycles  of  development  and  growth  before 
the  mind  was  capable  of  true  creative  work  such  as 
both  melody  and  harmony  imply.  Consequently 
the  music  of  undeveloped  tribes  and  of  uncultivated 
taste  is  preponderatingly  rhythmical..  Instruments 
jo^jDercussion  are  the  Javorite  musical  instrument!^  " 
-oL^en^n  tile_  lowest  stages^ofmental  development^ 
This  simple,  though  strongly  reiterated  rhythm  in 
monotone  is  the  music  of  primitive  tribes  even  to-day. 


64  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

Among  such  people  the  almost  universal  use  of  the 
rude  drum  in  war-dances  and  in  ceremonials  be 
speaks  the  prevalence  of  rhythm  as  the  element  of 
music  most  appreciated,  and  the  results  obtained 
abundantly  emphasize  its  power  and  indicate  in  no 
uncertain  way  its  natural  effect  upon  the  human 
mind.  In  the  war-dance,  for  example,  of  our  Ameri 
can  Indians,  we  may  note  its  intense  emotional  power 
in  this  crude  form;  the  dance  begins  with  rhythmic 
movements,  accentuated  by  the  beat  of  a  drum,  and 
often  accompanied  by  the  repetition  of  some  simple 
melodic  phrase.  The  phrase,  however,  serves  to  do 
little  more  than  to  help  mark  the  rhythm  and  to  give 
opportunity  for  a  more  general  expression  of  rhyth 
mic  action.  As  the  tempo  is  increased  the  move 
ments  of  the  dancers  are  accelerated  and  the  emo 
tions  raised  to  higher  and  higher  pitch.  This  is 
continued  until  the  minds  of  those  participating  in  the 
dance  are  worked  into  a  fine  frenzy  and  the  time  for 
rash  counsel  and  deeds  of  violence  is  ripe.  Our  fron 
tier  soldiers  of  the  last  century  well  knew  the  extent 
and  the  dangers  of  such  emotional  intoxication.  As 
Parry  says, "  Pure,  unalloyed  rhythmic  music  is  found 
in  most  parts  of  the  uncivilized  globe ;  and  the  degree 
of  excitement  to  which  it  can  give  rise,  when  the 
mere  beating  of  the  drum  or  tom-tom  is  accompanied 
by  dancing,  is  well  known  to  all  the  world."1 

In  such  rhythmic  action  it  is  evident  that  there  are 
none  of  the  finer  elements  of  purely  aesthetic  emo 
tion  :  it  is  little  more  than  an  emotional  orgy  secured 
by  taking  advantage  of  the  natural  susceptibility  of 
man  for  rhythmic  stimulation.  The  response  is 
reflex  and  sensuous,  though  it  contains  within  it  the 

1  Evolution  of  the  Art  of  Music,  p.  7. 


RHYTHM  65 

possibilities  for  refinement  and  for  true  aesthetic  re 
action. 

Mr.  Bolton,  in  his  study  of  Rhythm,  says: 

"There  is  no  more  striking  fact  in  the  whole  field  of 
rhythm  than  the  emotional  effect  which  rhythms  produce 
upon  certain  classes  of  people,  savages  and  children.  At 
tention  has  already  been  called  to  the  psychological  phe 
nomenon  of  accompanying  the  changes  of  intensity  in  a 
series  of  sounds  by  muscular  movements.  So  strong  is 
this  impulse  in  all  classes  of  people  that  no  one  is  able  to 
listen  to  music  in  which  the  rhythm  is  strong  and  clear 
without  making  some  kind  of  muscular  movements.  With 
some  people  these  movements  tend  to  increase  in  force 
until  the  whole  body  becomes  involved  and  moves  with  the 
rhythm.  The  accents  in  the  rhythm  have  the  effects  of 
summated  stimuli,  and  the  excitement  may  increase  even 
to  a  state  of  ecstasy  and  catalepsy.  Although  the  regular 
recurrence  of  the  accented  syllable  is  the  most  important 
element,  the  qualitative  changes  aid  in  bringing  about  the 
emotional  states.  Soothing  effects  result  from  certain 
rhythms,  as  is  shown  in  the  lulling  and  patting  of  a  baby 
to  sleep.  The  early  hypnotizers  resorted  to  the  gentle 
stroking  of  their  subjects.  Savages  are  well  aware  of  the 
exciting  effects  of  certain  rhythms,  and  are  accustomed  to 
use  them  to  bring  about  the  state  of  frenzy  in  which  their 
priests  give  their  prophecies  and  in  which  religious  dances 
are  danced.  Mr.  Ellis,  who  has  made  a  study  of  some 
tribes  in  Africa,  says,  'Music  among  the  Thsi-speaking 
tribes  is  limited  to  airs  possessing  an  obvious  rhythm. 
Such  airs  seem  to  appeal  to  the  primitive  sense  common 
to  all  people,  but  upon  savages,  that  is,  upon  children  with 
the  possession  and  power  of  men,  its  influence  is  immense, 
and  the  state  of  excitement  into  which  an  assemblage  of 
uncivilized  people  may  be  wrought  by  the  mere  rhythm  of 
drums  and  the  repetition  of  a  simple  melody,  would  hardly 
be  credited.  With  some  races  this  known  emo- 


66  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

tional  influence  of  music  has  been  utilized  with  three  ob 
jects,  viz.,  to  stimulate  the  religious  sentiments,  the  mar 
tial  spirit,  and  the  sexual  passions.' 

"In  the  Yatiati  dance  among  the  Indians  of  British 
Columbia,  the  tribe  assembles  outside  of  the  chief's  house 
in  which  the  dance  is  to  be  held,  and  with  fists  and  sticks 
they  beat  the  time  on  the  walls  as  they  enter,  singing  the 
dancing  song.  The  dancers  who  are  on  the  inside  are 
worked  up  into  a  frenzy.  The  gentle  striking  at  first, 
gradually  increasing  in  violence,  and  the  slow  approach  and 
the  assemblage  of  the  tribe,  wrought  in  the  dancers  a  pitch 
of  excitement  which  forced  them  to  rush  out  after  a  time 
and  begin  the  dance,  jumping  about  in  the  wildest  fashion. 
Such  dances  cease  only  with  the  complete  exhaustion  of 
the  dancers."  1 

In  the  same  article  attention  is  called  also  to  the 
deep  effect  upon  children  of  the  jingles  of  childhood. 
The  conclusion  to  which  the  author  comes  is  that 
rhythm  among  both  savages  and  children  is  capable 
of  exciting  them  emotionally,  even  in  some  cases  to 
the  point  of  terror  or  of  intoxication.  Cases  similar 
to  the  ones  cited  might  be  multiplied  indefinitely,  for 
the  same  emotional  excitement  under  the  influence 
of  a  strongly  accented  rhythm  is  found  among  all 
primitive  and  uncultured  people. 

The  inference  to  be  drawn  from  such  examples 
is  manifest:  the  primary  and  natural  effect  of 
rhythm  upon  the  human  mind  is  directly  and  dom- 
inantly  emotional.  So  close  is  the  relation  between 
nerve  action  and  mental  states  that,  though  or 
ganic  in  its  causal  relations,  it  manifests  itself  in 
consciousness  in  the  most  demonstrative  and  power 
ful  manner.  This  reaction,  in  these  more  primitive 

1  The  American  Journal  of  Psychology,  Jan.,  1894,  p.  163. 


RHYTHM  67 

cases,  is  unmistakably  and  intensely  emotional. 
Such  is  the  conclusion  which  reference  to  primitive 
conditions  forces  upon  us.  The  further  question 
now  arises,  whether  rhythm  throughout  the  long 
process  of  musical  development  and  in  the  various 
classes  of  music  recognized  to-day  retains  this 
emotional  power  and  significance.  Reference  to 
certain  well-distinguished  classes  of  modern  music 
will  readily  furnish  an  answer  to  this  inquiry. 

6.  In  that  great  body  of  modern  music — waltzes, 
marches,  quicksteps,  ballads,  rag- time — known  col 
lectively  as  "popular  music,"  rhythm  is  construc 
tively  and  psychologically  a  dominant  factor.  While 
such  compositions  may  not  be  altogether  barren  of 
certain  minor  melodic  and  harmonic  virtues,  the  real 
source  of  their  popularity  is  found  in  their  regular 
and  strongly  accented  rhythm.  Melody  and  harmony, 
as  will  appear  later,  are  the  real  intellectual  elements 
in  music  and  so,  wherever  found,  require  some  degree 
of  mental  activity  for  their  appreciation;  but  rhythm, 
as  we  have  already  shown,  has  an  instinctive  basis, 
and  reaction  to  this  form  of  musical  stimulus  is 
reflex,  as  it  were,  and  hence  independent  of  any 
appreciation  of  its  nature  or  significance.  We  shall 
return  to  this  point,  however,  in  later  chapters. 
The  question  now  at  issue  is,  does  this  strong  rhyth 
mic  element  in  popular  music  retain  recognizable 
marks  of  its  ancestral  character  and  still  exert  an 
unmistakable  influence  over  the  emotions? 

In  answer  to  this  question  we  notice  in  the  first 
place  the  uniformity  of  the-  rhythm  in  such  music. 
As  was  stated  in  the  last  chapter,  the  rhythm  of  the 
phrases  is  almost  without  variation,  these  simpler 
forms  being  almost  all  perfectly  normal  in  their 


68  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

structure.  Then,  also,  the  tempo  in  simple  dance 
music  and  songs  of  such  form  is  generally  uniformly 
sustained.  In  this  there  is  kinship,  to  say  the  least, 
with  the  more  primitive  forms  of  music  of  unde 
veloped  races.  And  the  psychological  effect,  though 
modified  by  the  introduction  of  other  factors,  is  too 
evident  to  be  misunderstood. 

In  martial  music,  while  some  of  the  inspiriting  effect 
must  doubtless  be  attributed  to  the  character  of  the 
instruments  used,  to  the  tone  color,  it  is  the  strong, 
stirring  rhythm  that  forms  the  principal  and  un 
varying  characteristic  of  such  music.  When  the 
music  is  accompanied  by  words,  they  also  must  be 
recognized  as  having  a  part  in  the  total  effect  pro 
duced.  But  they  are  not  essential,  as  all  instrumental 
music  shows.  Though  the  melody  in  music  of  this 
character  may  differ,  and  the  harmony  be  good  or 
poor,  the  rhythm,  if  strongly  accented,  and  of  the 
proper  sort,  will  almost  suffice  alone  to  produce  the 
characteristic  reaction.  Certain  it  is  that  after  all 
proper  allowances  are  made  for  the  effect  of  words, 
melody,  and  harmonization,  there  remains  enough 
left  over  to  justify  us  in  attributing  to  rhythm  the 
characteristic  quality  which  belongs  to  music  of 
this  sort.  Rhythm  not  only  retains,  but  it  exerts  its 
pristine  qualities, "moving  the  spirit  in  a  direct  and 
powerful  way  to  a  reaction  that  is  inherently  emo 
tional.  Witness  such  stirring  hymns  as  La  Marseil 
laise  or  Die  Wacht  am  Rhein;  or  the  effect  of  the  less 
majestic  but  no  less  powerful  song  of  the  South, 
Dixie.  Often  has  the  writer  heard  it  played  in  its 
own  sunny  land,  and  seen  the  remarkable  effect 
upon  the  audience.  As  the  tempo  is  increased,  so 
grows  the  excitement  of  the  listeners,  until  at  the 


RHYTHM  69 

climax,  shouts  may  be  heard  and  hats  seen  in  mid 
air.  This  effect  is  due  primarily  to  the  strong 
rhythm  and  to  the  exhilarating  tempo  for  which 
this  air  is  justly  notorious. 

Of  the  same  general  character  are  the  simple 
waltzes  and  "two-steps"  which  form  the  major 
share  of  the  repertoire  of  amateur  bands  and  of 
musical  neophytes.  Their  popularity  is  due  in  part 
to  their  structural  simplicity,  but  also  largely  to  the 
rhythm  to  which  response  is  made  instinctively. 
That  the  mental  response  is  emotional,  not  intellec 
tual  is  evident  from  the  ease  with  which  response 
is  made  and  from  the  nature  of  the  physical  expres 
sion  of  the  mental  state  to  which  such  music  gives 
rise. 

When  mentioning  examples  of  strong  rhythm  in 
popular  music,  reference  must  be  made  also  to  that 
peculiar  syncopated  rhythm  known  as  "rag-time." 
The  rhythm  of  this  music  is  so  characteristic  and  the 
effect  so  evident  that  it  serves  as  one  of  the  most 
striking  examples  of  rhythm  in  popular  music.  Let 
the  melody  be  as  "catchy"  as  you  please  and  the 
harmonization  as  rich  as  possible,  the  force  of  the 
rhythmic  element  will  still  overshadow  them  both. 
Rag-time — the  name  itself  indicates  its  principal 
characteristic  and  the  source  of  its  power. 

That  the  psychological  effect  of  the  rhythm  in 
these  examples  of  popular  music  and  even  in  martial 
music  of  the  best  sort  is  essentially  of  the  same  na 
ture  as  in  the  cruder  cases  mentioned  above,  there  is 
no  reason  to  doubt.  If  the  rhythm  is  strongly  ac 
cented  and  the  tempo  is  quick  there  is  the  same 
heightening  of  the  emotional  state  of  consciousness, 
the  same  increased  excitement  and  stimulation  that 


70  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

the  more  purely  rhythmic  music  had  upon  the  sav 
age.  The  stimulus  is  the  same  though  veiled  beneath 
some  melodic  and  harmonic  factors,  and  the  nervous 
system  still  is  sensitive  to  such  stimulus;  the  effect, 
therefore,  must  be  like  in  kind  though  somewhat  re 
strained  by  the  conventionalities  of  an  older  civiliza 
tion.  It  will  probably  be  objected  by  some  whose 
idols  are  thus  dethroned  that  there  is  the  greatest  dif 
ference  between  the  music  of  savages  and  popular  mu 
sic  to-day.  That  we  would  not  deny :  all  that  we  are 
here  contending  for  is  that  the  so-called  popular  music 
makes  great  use  of  rhythm,  depends  greatly  upon  it, 
and  that  the  psychological  effect  of  rhythm  upon  the 
mind  is  still  as  it  has  always  been.  This  constant 
and  invariable  effect,  constant  and  invariable  because 
natural  and  instinctive,  is  an  emotional  modification 
of  consciousness.  And  the  more  marked  the  rhythm 
the  more  pronounced  the  result  until  such  a  time  as 
man,  through  training  and  education,  has  supplanted 
this  instinctive  reaction  by  a  desire  for,  and  appreci 
ation  of,  more  intellectual  elements.  If  the  race  has 
developed  from  crude  and  unrefined  reactions  to 
rhythm,  to  possibilities  for  appreciating  the  rhythm 
of  Milton's  poetry  or  of  Beethoven's  music,  so  each 
individual  must  begin  low  in  the  scale  of  natural  re 
actions  to  instinctive  elements ;  but  he,  too,  may  rise 
to  an  appreciation  of  the  greatest  masterpieces  of 
poetical  or  of  musical  thought. 

7.  All  music,  however,  is  not  of  this  lower  order, 
in  which  rhythm  is  psychologically  of  paramount 
importance.  Nor  are  the  purposes  of  a  philosophy 
of  music  centred  in  a  discussion  of  these  lower  forms 
of  music,  but  in  the  highest.  The  real  problem,  there 
fore,  the  true  end  of  all  our  seeking,  is  to  determine 


RHYTHM  71 

the  function  and  value  of  rhythm  in  the  highest, 
most  artistic  forms  of  music.  The  modifications  of 
rhythm  in  music  to-day,  however,  are  manifold: 
reference  to  some  typical  uses,  therefore,  will  have  to 
serve  our  present  purpose. 

It  is  a  matter  of  common  knowledge  that  in  our 
highest  musical  forms,  the  sonata  and  the  symphony, 
the  division  into  parts  is  based  upon  the  tempo. 
Thus  in  these  forms  there  are  such  movements  (notice 
the  term)  as  the  Allegro,  the  Andante,  the  Largo,  the 
Scherzo,  the  Minuetto,  etc.  Is  the  characteristic  effect 
of  these  different  movements  due  to  the  rhythm, 
and  if  so,  just  what  is  the  nature  of  that  effect 
upon  consciousness?  Or,  in  the  light  of  what  has 
been  determined  already,  is  the  psychological  effect  of 
the  different  rhythms  in  such  compositions  still  emo 
tional,  though  now  more  refined  and  made  less  ob 
trusive  by  the  greater  importance  of  melodic  and 
harmonic  elements?  This  question  goes  deep  into  the 
problem,  for  upon  the  answer  given  rests  to  a  large 
extent  the  problem  of  the  presence  and  value  of  the 
emotional  element  in  music. 

What  has  been  stated  concerning  the  effect  of 
rhythm  in  the  lower  forms  of  music  gives  the  correct 
answer  to  the  question;  it  only  remains  to  justify  it 
by  showing  a  little  more  explicitly  that  the  natural, 
impressive  effect  of  these  movements  is  emotional, 
that  rhythm,  even  to  the  limits  of  its  development,  is 
still  true  to  its  genesis.  In  such  forms  it  may  lie 
hidden,  as  it  were,  under  a  wealth  of  melodic  and 
harmonic  elements  which  charm  the  sense  and  claim 
the  active,  analytic  attention  of  the  mind,  and  which 
are  the  real  sources  of  the  artistic  value  of  the  com 
position;  but  the  rhythmic  factor  is  still  present, 


72  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

though  not  obtrusive,  and  it  determines  the  mood  or 
emotional  tone  of  consciousness  that  serves  as  a 
background  upon  which  the  more  intellectual  ele 
ments  of  melody  and  harmony  stand  out  in  bolder 
relief.  The  natural,  impressive  psychological  effect 
of  one  of  these  movements,  due  chiefly  to  the  rhythm, 
is  a  certain  emotional  state  of  consciousness,  a  mood 
which  colors  in  sombre  hues  or  bright  the  whole 
field  of  consciousness,  both  focus  and  fringe.  How 
subtle,  but  how  certain  and  how  powerful  is  the 
change  when  one  movement  ends  and  another  be 
gins  !  How  few  notes  it  takes  to  bring  the  responsive 
mind  from  the  firm  confident  mood  of  an  Allegro  to 
the  more  serious,  more  intense  mood  of  the  Largo! 
Or  how  the  shadows  lift  from  their  brooding  and  the 
sunlight  sparkles  on  leaf  and  water  when  the  orches 
tra  passes  to  the  Scherzo!  It  is  the  mood  that 
changes,  the  emotions  that  are  vaguely  but  certainly 
aroused,  the  facile,  affective  qualities  of  mind  that 
respond  to  the  changing  stimulus.  The  suddenness 
of  the  change,  the  directness  with  which  effect  fol 
lows  cause,  the  quick  response  the  mind  gives  to  the 
changed  music,  all  reveal  the  instinctive,  the  reflex 
character  of  the  response.  This  irresistible  effect  is 
due  not  to  melodic  elements,  for  it  is  common  to 
movements  notwithstanding  the  greatest  differences 
in  melody,  and  may  come  before  a  single  melodic 
phrase  is  completed;  nor  is  it  due  primarily  to  har 
monic  features,  though  it  may  be  emphasized  by  this 
means,  for  again  the  general  effect  of  a  movement  is 
the  same  under  the  widest  possible  differences  in  har 
monic  character.  There  remains,  therefore,  only  the 
rhythmic  element  to  which  we  must  attribute  this 
striking  impressive  effect  of  the  different  movements. 


RHYTHM 


73 


To  make  clear  by  illustration  what  has  been  stated 
abstractly,  the  reader  is  asked  to  listen  to  such  con 
trasted  movements  as  are  represented  in  the  follow 
ing  brief  selections  taken  from  Beethoven's  Sonatas. 


Allegro  vivace. 

» 


Op.   2,     No.  2. 


-4- — ^ 


r  r 


74 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


_z) — J — J — 


r 


ADAGIO,  from  Op.  2.    No.  i. 


RHYTHM 


75 


V-j 


m  m 

=  *  ^i 


Allegro  molto. 


SCHERZO,  from  Op.  26. 


Avfto^rv  mn/iHa/m        ^*~         -  i         •  ,.         ^ < 

u  A  1      .     I  J   -^™ "^^       I  I  I     *         ll 

~ 


«/ 


- 


?  t  T 


JL       '•        -       4- 


r 


r 


m 


THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


A     u  L 

LtJ  nM- 

-« 

_ 

j 

J 

11 

fe% 

*            i 

__  ^  ^_ 

• 

.   ~ 

p 

1 

1 

r 

i     , 

f    s 

\         /                                  | 

i 

p 

t 

V 
»f 

1      fi     l-i  1 

i 

1        i  .     i 

f        f 

y  i  f  b 

| 

>L  ft  hi 

-_ 

.  1 

V* 

f/T\>  Z 

5_    * 

v 

u   . 

^ 

ANDANTE,  from  Op.  26. 


x — -      T  - — ^      ^-  ~-^ 

~  — ===^~*~V"— ^-^      * 


RHYTHM 


77 


-r     r     y 


These  are  but  a  few  examples  to  illustrate  what  all 
music  shows.  Each  composition,  if  lyrical,  engenders 
some  mood  which  rises,  is  lived,  and  gives  place 
to  some  other  emotional  state  as  attention  passes 
to  some  other  of  the  thousand  forms  of  stimuli  to 
which  the  mind  is  sensitive;  each  composition  of  the 
more  complex  sort,  like  the  sonata  or  the  symphony, 
by  the  changed  rhythm  of  the  various  movements, 
and  by  the  corresponding  play  of  melody  and  force 
of  harmony,  leads  us  on  from  one  emotional  state  to 
another,  the  total  experience  being  bound  together 
by  the  artistic  unity  of  the  composition  considered  as 
a  whole.  Not  that  this  is  the  whole  of  the  musical 
experience  by  any  means,  but  for  him  who  enters  ap 
preciatively  into  the  spirit  of  the  music  this  part  is 
certainly  essential. 


78  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

In  literature  the  affective  state  is  determined  by 
the  imagery  the  words  call  forth  and  by  the  working 
out  of  the  plot,  whether  in  comedy  or  tragedy,  to 
living  joy  and  light,  or  to  sorrow  and  death.  Mil 
ton's  Lycidas,  for  example,  is  filled  with  the  solemnity 
of  life,  gained  by  the  imagery  called  forth  by  his  won 
derfully  chosen  words.  Music  gains  the  same  end, 
produces  the  same  effect,  but  in  an  entirely  different 
way.  Instead  of  appealing  to  the  mind  by  pictures  of 
sorrow  or  by  definite  thoughts  concerning  the  solemni 
ties  of  life,  music  casts  its  spell  in  a  more  direct  way 
by  appealing  to  an  old  and  instinctive  mode  of  re 
action. 

Thus,  rhythm  is  the  natural  basis  for  an  emotional 
interpretation  of  music  which,  though  not  the  final 
word  in  musical  theory,  is  the  first  and  as  such  must 
be  carefully  weighed  in  making  up  the  final  verdict. 
This  does  not  at  all  preclude  the  possibility  of  its  hav 
ing  an  important  function  in  other  directions,  but  it 
does  suggest  that  it  can  never  outgrow  or  escape  this 
influence  over  the  emotions.  Being  ingrained  in  the 
nervous  system  it  may  be  turned  to  intellectual  pur 
poses,  but  it  can  never  lay  aside  its  birthright,  nor  in 
one  generation  obliterate  all  traces  of  its  genetic 
origin  and  use. 

8.  The  emotional  effect  of  rhythm  is  further  sub 
stantiated  by  a  psychological  analysis  of  rhythm.  It 
must  be  confessed,  however,  that  there  is  still  so  little 
known  concerning  the  physical  basis  of  the  emo 
tional  life  that  it  is  at  present  impossible  to  go  very 
far  in  this  direction  or  to  speak  with  any  great  assur 
ance.  Consequently,  theory  and  hypothesis  must 
often  be  given  to  supply  lacunas  in  scientific  knowl 
edge.  However,  what  is  thought  or  believed  may  be 


RHYTHM  79 

given  not  as  proof,  but  as  evidence  corroborating  the 
results  of  the  empirical  method.  As  such  it  has,  if 
not  demonstrative,  at  least  some  cumulative  strength, 
^here  is  a^phyiH^n'^l  f.V|fnry  nf  fViP  emotional 
aspect  of  consciousness  which  holds  that  the  normal, 
healthful,  functional  activity  of  any  organ  is  accom 
panied  with  a  pleasurable  concomitant  in  conscious 
ness.  With  an  increased  activity  of  the  organ  up  to 
a  maximum  there  is  an  increase  in  the  pleasure  re 
sulting  therefrom.  This  point  of  greatest  pleasure  is 
the  point  where  the  destructive  or  katabolic  changes 
exceed  to  a  certain  degree  the  restorative  or  anabolic 
processes  in  the  organ  involved,  and  in  the  nerve  cen 
tres  controlling  such  organs. 

In  music  a  quick  tempo  well  marked  tends  to  in 
crease  the  activity  of  these  centres  and  so  produces  a 
feeling  of  life  and  of  exhilaration  distinctly  pleasur 
able.  The  vital  functions  under  a  rhythmic  stimulus 
are  augmented  and  the  feeling  tone  rises  as  a  conse 
quence.  If  the  rhythm  is  sufficiently  impressive,  this 
reflex  response  may  so  overshadow  all  else  that  the 
character  of  the  response  as  a  whole  is  determined 
more  by  this  than  by  the  other  musical  elements.  In 
the  same  way  the  rhythm  of  a  slow  tempo  tends  to 
retard  the  physiological  processes  in  the  nerve  cen 
tres  and  so  to  produce  in  consciousness  the  feeling 
tone  of  a  lowered  or  hindered  vitality.  Thus  we  have 
the  two  general  classes  of  emotions,  the  excitatory 
and  the  serious,  the  exhilarating  and  the  calm,  due, 
according  to  this  theory,  to  the  physiological  effect  of 
a  rhythmic  stimulus  upon  the  nerve  centres. 

The  ultimate  physiological  explanation  of  these 
changes  within  the  nerve  centres  is  not  known.  Fur 
ther  attempts  to  understand  the  matter  would  lead 


8o  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

us  into  the  realm  of  biological  and  evolutional  hy 
potheses. 

A  hypothesis  that  in  some  ways  better  meets  the 
conditions  than  this  purely  physiological  theory  is 
that  by  a  uniform  and  long-continued  connection  the 
bodily  reaction  and  the  emotion  are  so  closely  asso 
ciated  that  they  have  become  interchangeable  as 
cause  and  effect.  That  is  to  say,  the  physiological 
changes  produce  emotional  modifications  of  conscious 
ness,  but  the  emotions  also  have  power  to  produce 
characteristic  changes  in  the  bodily  organism.  Thus 
when  the  listener  hears  a  well-accented  rhythm  his 
body  attunes  itself,  it  may  be  reflexly,  to  the  given 
rate  of  nervous  discharge,  and  the  appropriate  mood 
or  feeling  state  spreads  over  consciousness;  or,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  emotion  being  present,  centrally  stim 
ulated  it  may  be,  the  sensitive  organism  at  once 
adjusts  itself  by  the  proper  motor  changes  to  the  new 
phase  of  feeling.  Sorrow  or  grief,  or  the  emotions 
aroused  by  the  contemplation  of  the  more  serious 
problems  of  life,  produce  a  lowered  vitality,  a  retard 
ation  of  the  nervous  discharges  and  a  palpable  inhi 
bition  in  the  intellectual  processes ;  on  the  other  hand, 
joy,  gladness,  humor,  or  the  excitement  of  good  news, 
raises  the  general  tone  of  the  system,  and  quickens 
and  strengthens  the  activity  of  the  various  centres, 
both  motor  and  conscious. 

While  there  would  be  the  greatest  difficulty  en 
countered  in  an  attempt  to  formulate  the  rules  for 
the  bodily  expression  of  all  emotional  nuances,  the 
general  principle  involved  comports  well  with  the 
emotional  theory  of  the  psychological  significance  of 
rhythm.  Thus  the  psychological  argument,  while 
inadequate  in  itself,  confirms  the  historical  and  we 


RHYTHM  8 1 

are  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  the  natural,  instinc 
tive  effect  of  rhythm  is  emotional;  and  further,  that 
ev«n  to  the  highest  point  of  its  artistic  development 
it  never  loses  its  fundamental  psychological  charac 
ter  or  is  false  to  its  origin. 


CHAPTER  IV 
RHYTHM  (Continued} 

i .  It  has  been  suggested  more  than  once  in  the  last 
chapter  that  there  is,  besides  the  emotional  charac 
teristics  of  rhythm  there  considered,  another  aspect 
to  the  subject,  the  consideration  of  which  was  only 
postponed,  not  disregarded.  The  time  has  come  now 
to  turn  to  this  neglected  phase  of  the  subject  and  to 
consider  rhythm  in  its  more  definitely  intellectual  re 
lationships.  Primitive  music,  it  was  said,  is  primarily 
and  predominantly  rhythmical,  and  the  mental  re 
sponse  it  elicits  from  the  hearer  is  crudely  but  in 
tensely  emotional.  This,  however,  is  but  the  starting- 
point;  before  the  end  is  reached  it  is  quite  possible 
that  new  factors  then  undreamed  of  may  enter,  and 
that  the  mental  response  may  be  so  modified  as  to 
seem  almost  to  lose  its  kinship  with  the  primitive 
form  of  reaction.  Radical  changes  have  in  truth 
taken  place  as  music  has  developed.  While  the  emo 
tional  element  is  never  lost,  new  factors  have  been  in 
troduced,  and  even  the  more  primitive  elements  have 
been  so  modified  that  the  account  of  music  as  then 
known  and  used  is  no  longer  adequate  or  com 
plete. 

This  development  of  music  has  been  in  the  direc 
tion  of  greater  refinement  in  its  emotional  elements, 
and  toward  the  introduction  and  greater  use  of  in 
tellectual  constituents.  The  first  line  of  progress  has 

82 


RHYTHM  83 

been  briefly  sketched  in  the  last  chapter.  The  other 
movement  is  not  less  characteristic  or  significant.  It 
is  seen  primarily  in  the  increased  importance  given  to 
melody  and  harmony,  a  movement  yet  to  be  dis 
cussed,  but  also  in  the  development  of  rhythm  so  as 
to  demand  no  little  intellectual  activity  for  its  ap 
prehension  and  appreciation. 

2.  As  indicative  of  an  intellectual,  rather  than  an 
emotional  character,  we  would  call  attention  first  to 
the  mathematical  foundation  and  exactitude  of 
rhythm.  In  musical  rhythm  we  have  an  element  in 
this  art  that  must  conform  to  the  strictest  require 
ments  of  mathematical  relations.  So  unusual  is  this 
in  art,  so  suggestive  of  the  intellectual  rather  than 
the  emotional,  that  on  the  face  of  things  it  would 
seem  to  have  some  significance  certainly  for  a  phi 
losophy  of  music.  There  is  also  such  a  well-defined 
tendency  in  music  of  recent  years  to  make  use  of 
these  mathematical  relationships  that  we  cannot  dis 
miss  the  subject  without  a  few  words  to  emphasize 
this  truth.  Gurney  thus  calls  attention  to  the  prin 
ciple  of  dual  balance  in  music:  "There  is,  however, 
one  fundamental  characteristic  of  rhythm,  especially 
marked  in  the  superior  musical  development  of  man, 
which  may,  I  think,  be  accounted  for  on  grounds 
which  take  us  back  to  primeval  times;  namely,  the 
characteristic  of  dual  balance.  As  soon  as  any  dif 
ferentiation  at  all  supervenes  on  a  simple  series  of 
equidistant  accents,  as  soon,  that  is,  as  such  a  series  is 
divided  off  into  parts,  felt  as  having  a  beginning  and 
an  end,  the  principle  on  which  these  parts  are  formed 
is  multiplication  by  two;  .  .  .  To  put  it  in  another 
way,  any  complete  melodic  phrase  stops  after  two,  or 
four,  or  six  component  bars,  and  so  on,  but  not  after 


84  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

one,  or  three,  or  five.  A  component  phrase  may  con 
sist  of  an  uneven  number  of  bars,  as  three  or  five ;  but 
it  will  be  answered  by  another  of  three  or  five.  Nor 
must  this  be  understood  merely  of  melodies  and  sub 
jects  which  can  be  reasonably  presented  alone ;  it  ap 
plies  to  clause  after  clause  in  the  longest  and  most 
elaborate  paragraphs,  bar  answering  bar,  and  pair  of 
bars  answering  pair  of  bars,  though  linked  into  a 
series  from  which  no  independent  bits  could  be  de 
tached."1 

This,  however,  is  only  the  beginning  of  the  com 
plex  simplicity  of  rhythm.  It  is  within  the  bar  itself 
that  we  begin  to  realize  the  real  mathematical  charac 
ter  of  rhythm,  and  to  see  the  possibilities  for  rhythmic 
variation  in  the  treatment  of  a  theme  or  subject  and 
its  development.  To  show  this  I  can  do  no  better 
than  quote  another  paragraph  from  the  work  just 
mentioned.  In  this  paragraph,  summed  up  in  a  mar 
ginal  note  as  the  "main  facts  of  musical  rhythms," 
he  says :  "  It  will  readily  be  understood  that  the  com 
plexities  of  rhythm  in  Music  are  not  only  not  incom 
patible  with  the  simple  regularity  of  the  main  rhyth 
mic  basis,  but  are  really  only  possible  through  its 
existence.  The  spaces  of  time  during  which  any  note 
in  a  musical  paragraph  lasts,  and  the  intervals  of  time 
or  rests  often  intervening  between  the  end  of  one  note 
and  the  beginning  of  another,  are  proper  fractions, 
usually  quite  simple  ratios,  of  a  constant  standard; 
and  this  standard  is  the  length  of  the  bar— that  is, 
the  length  of  time  between  two  main  accents,  in  rela 
tion  to  which  every  other  time-length  is  estimated, 
and  without  which  a  variety  of  time-lengths  would 
be  perfectly  vague  and  unintelligible.  But  though 

1  Power  of  Sound,  pp.  132-133. 


RHYTHM  85 

the  ordinary  subdivision  of  the  bar  by  multiples  of 
two  and  three  makes  the  fractions  as  a  rule  tolerably 
simple,  yet  as,  e.  g.,  one  note  may  last  for  a  whole 
bar  and  another  for  only  the  sixty-fourth  part  of  a 
bar,  we  shall  not  soon  exhaust  the  possible  arrange 
ments.  Thus,  not  to  take  an  extreme  case,  £f ,  3^,  ^f , 
are  the  ratios  which  the  three  notes  sounded  in  this 


bar  FSzz^=        —$ — -f2—  ;j  bear  to  the  whole  length 

<j~  ^ 

of  the  bar,  and  as  the  J4  and  Jf  could  each  be  divided 
up  in  any  number  of  ways  which  would  retain  32  as 
the  denominator  of  the  component  fractions,  while 
each  unit  of  the  division  may  be  represented  either 
by  a  sound  or  a  silence,  the  range  of  subdivision  is 
clearly  wide  enough  for  a  bar's  length  to  give  scope 
for  an  endless  number  of  combinations;  and  every 
bar  of  a  series  may  differ  in  its  internal  time-arrange 
ments  from  every  other.  Such  is  the  possible  variety, 
that  it  scarcely  occurs  to  one  to  call  either  the  bars 
or  any  of  the  subordinate  groups  by  the  name  of  feet, 
which  would  seem  to  imply  that  the  various  sorts 
could  be  numbered  and  catalogued:  at  the  outside, 
one  would  apply  such  a  term  to  a  few  very  simple 
and  common  examples.  Thus  complete  musical 
rhythms — complete  series  of  time-relations — are  not 
fixed  and  general  things,  like  recognized  poetical 
metres,  but  infinitely  various.  The  great  distinction 
between  one  musical  rhythm  and  another  has  no 
reference  to  these  endless  combinations,  but  to  rhyth 
mical  outlines,  which  again  differ  from  poetical 
metres  in  the  other  direction,  of  being  far  more  gen 
eral  and  less  various.  These  are  concerned  primarily 
only  with  the  first  division  of  the  length  of  the  bar, 


86  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

which  must  either  be  into  two  parts  or  into  three,  giv 
ing  respectively  two  and  three  main  beats  for  a  bar: 
this  division  into  double  and  triple  time  is  generic. 
The  next  stage  consists  in  dividing  the  halves  in  the 
one  case,  the  thirds  in  the  other,  into  two  parts  or 
into  three  parts;  and  this  creates  species  for  each 
genus,  the  original  halves  still  constituting  double 
time,  even  where  subdivided  into  thirds,  and  the  ori 
ginal  thirds  still  constituting  triple  time,  even  when 
subdivided  into  halves." 

These  words  bring  before  us  certain  essential  facts 
concerning  the  nature  of  musical  rhythm  for  which 
the  emotional  hypothesis  offers  no  adequate  explana 
tion.  It  will  be  recalled  that  the  two  qualities  of 
rhythm,  which  in  the  last  chapter  we  maintained 
were  of  special  emotional  significance,  are  the  beat  or 
accent,  and  the  tempo.  So  far  as  this  reflex  influence 
of  rhythm  upon  the  feeling  tone  of  consciousness  is 
concerned,  it  is  sufficient  if  we  merely  take  cogni 
zance  of  the  measures  marked  by  the  primary  accent 
into  which  music  is  divided,  and  of  the  time-rate  at 
which  these  succeed  one  another.  But  so  we  do  not 
comprehend  the  whole  subject  of  musical  rhythm  as 
it  is  known  and  used  to-day ;  besides  the  accent  and 
the  tempo  there  is  this  exact  mathematical  analysis 
of  time  relation  which  to-day  is  one  of  the  principal 
characteristics  of  rhythm  as  used  by  the  best  com 
posers.  The  emotional  theory  of  rhythm  alone  does 
not  take  account  of  this  internal  complexity  of  the 
measure,  nor,  if  it  did,  could  it  offer  a  satisfactory 
explanation  for  this  fundamental  fact  in  the  struct 
ure  of  modern  rhythm.  The  emotional  explana 
tion,  therefore,  must  be  either  supplemented  or 

1  Power  of  Sound,  p.  137. 


RHYTHM  87 

rejected.  Especially  is  it  incumbent  upon  a  theory 
of  music  to-day  when  it  is  remembered  that  the 
tendency  of  modern  music  in  its  more  artistic  forms 
is  away  from  the  excessive  use  of  accent  and  of  ex 
hilarating  tempo,  toward  the  more  discriminating 
and  intellectual  use  of  this  internal  complexity  of 
-jrhythm. 

3.  The  author  considers  himself  most  fortunate  in 
being  able  to  give  here  some  of  the  results  of  a  new 
method  of  investigating  musical  phenomena,  origi 
nated  and  made  use  of  by  Professor  H.  C.  Macdou- 
gall,  head  of  the  Department  of  Music  at  Wellesley 
College.  His  method  applied  to  Rhythm  is  this:  an 
examination  of  hundreds  and  even  thousands  of  meas 
ures  in  the  composition  of  various  composers  is  made 
to  determine  the  actual  nature  and  complexity  of  the 
rhythm.  By  a  comparative  study  of  the  earlier  and 
later  composers,  data  are  gained  in  a  perfectly  scien 
tific  way  for  conclusions  as  to  the  actual  course  of 
development  in  the  use  of  rhythm.  The  form  under 
which  the  results  of  such  study  are  tabulated  is  as 
follows : 

RHYTHM 

Number  of  measures  examined ....  (normal non-normal ) 

Divided  beats  examined (normal non-normal ) 

Beats  duply  divided 

Beats  duply  subdivided 

Beats  duply  sub-subdivided 

Beats  duply  sub-sub-subdivided  . . . 

Beats  triply  divided 

Beats  triply  subdivided 

Beats  triply  sub-subdivided 

Beats  triply  sub-sub-subdivided .  .  . 
Unusual  forms  of  divided  beat .... 
Division  of  units  greater  than  one  beat  (specify  them). 


88  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

Types  of  the  normal  and  non-normal  measures 
may  be  schematized  in  the  following  way: 

Normal : 

J  J  |J./J  J|J  J  J  ^|J  J  J"/j|  « 

Non-normal : 

Ji       I       V    1         I        ill1""       I       I        !    I       0>1       "•"•       i        ll 
j.  I  j  j.  j  j  i  jj  j  j  j  i  jj  n  J  j  i 

The  double  or  triple  division  of  the  beat  refers  to 
the  fundamental  division  of  time  into  multiples  of  two 
or  three :  the  subdivisions  to  the  degree  of  complex 
ity  into  which  one  of  these  primary  parts  of  the  meas 
ure  is  divided.  For  example,  when  the  beat  equals  a 
half  note  it  may  be  ' '  duply ' '  divided  into  two  quarter 
notes  J  J  ,  or  "duply"  subdivided  J  ,H  and  so 
on  to  various  degrees  of  complexity.  Or,  starting 
with  the  measure  J  J  J  ,  the  process  of  division 
may  be  likewise  carried  on  through  the  same  degree 
as,  for  example,  subdivided  J  J^  J  or  sub- 
subdivided  J  j  ^^7^  >  etc. 

The  following  is  a  brief  summary  of  some  of  the 
results  of  the  investigation : 

Comooser  Measures         Non-normal  Beats  Non-normal 

Examined.          Measures.          Examined.  Beats. 

Haydn 3,050  12.5%  9,280  9.   % 

Mozart 14,129  14.6%  6,464  10.4% 

Beethoven *  1,650  10.  %  11,600  8.  % 

Brahms 450  25.   %  3,830  16.   % 

Tschaikowski . . .  .  1,300  23.   %  13,230  9-3% 

Liszt 590  32.  %  6,400  17-5% 

Schubert 325  34.  %  1,850  46.8% 

Strauss 400  44.   %  3,900  52.5% 

Although  these  studies  of  the  composers  named  are 
doubtless  not  extended  enough  to  make  the  percen- 


RHYTHM  89 

tages  exactly  characteristic,  they  do  suggest  a  de 
cided  tendency  to  depart  from  the  simple  measure 
and  decided  accent  of  primitive  music.  Taking  the 
figures  at  their  face  value,  the  only  conclusion  possi 
ble  is  that  there  has  been  a  well-defined  progress 
toward  an  internal  complexity  of  rhythm  manifested 
both  in  the  measure  and  in  the  beat.  Such  is  the 
evident  testimony  of  these  studies. 

4.  In  seeking  for  the  explanation  of  this  develop 
ment  of  rhythm,  some  suggestions  may  be  had  by 
reference  to  subjects  longer  studied  and  better 
known.  The  principles  of  mental  development  are 
uniform,  whether  manifested  in  the  expression  of 
man's  scientific  interests  or  in  the  growth  and  devel 
opment  of  some  particular  art.  Hence  the  presump 
tion  is,  a  presumption  justified  by  all  that  is  known 
or  is  being  discovered  concerning  the  evolution  of 
mind,  that  in  this  development  of  rhythm  toward  a 
more  complex  inner  structure,  the  mind  has  followed 
its  usual  course  of  progress  from  its  early,  crude,  emo 
tional  reactions  to  a  more  refined,  reflective  sym 
bolism.  That  is,  the  mind  here  turns  from  crass 
emotionalism  to  the  recognition  and  employment  of 
elements  that  come  only  by  analysis  and  refined  dis 
criminations  and  are,  therefore,  more  truly  and  more 
profoundly  intellectual  in  character.  Stimuli,  which 
before  were  received  en  masse  and  were  significant  in 
proportion  to  their  exciting  power,  are  now  broken 
up  by  analysis  and  their  symbolic  meaning  more  and 
more  regarded.  Let  us  see  how  this  principle  of 
mental  evolution  applies  in  the  case  before  us. 

In  the  lower  stages  of  human  progress  the  primi 
tive,  undeveloped  mind  naturally  centred  its  atten 
tion  upon  those  stimuli  having  the  strongest  instinc- 


90  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

tive  basis,  which,  in  the  case  of  music,  would  be  the 
rhythmic  elements,  the  accent  and  the  tempo.  The 
appreciation  of  the  more  intellectual  elements  having 
no  direct  or  vital  bearing  upon  the  immediate  wel 
fare  of  the  individual  comes  only  with  some  unusual 
genius,  or  by  that  long  process  of  mental  discipline 
known  generically  as  education.  Just  as  among 
primitive  and  uneducated  people  bright,  saturated 
colors  outweigh  color-harmony,  and  all  finer  qualita 
tive  distinctions  are  lost  in  the  primary,  quantitative 
considerations,  so  in  music  the  instinctive  elements 
of  rhythm  outweigh  the  more  intellectual  factors  in 
volved.  The  process  of  all  mental  development  is 
from  the  natural,  instinctive,  self -regarding  activ 
ities  toward  the  acquired,  intellectual,  and  more  ab 
stract  interests  of  life.  This  is  true  in  the  case  of  music 
as  in  all  other  phases  of  mental  experience. 

In  connection  with  this  thought,  the  conclusion  of 
modern  biological  and  psychological  investigation, 
that  in  these  primitive  forms  of  mental  reaction  the 
emotional  element  is  the  dominant  one,  is  pertinent. 
This  is  the  widely  accepted  philosophical  doctrine  of 
the  primacy  of  the  will.  Before  intellectual  interests 
were  sufficiently  developed  to  bear  effective  incen 
tive  and  guide  to  action,  the  appropriate  motor  re 
sponses  were  guaranteed  by  the  mechanism  of  reflex 
movement  and  by  the  impellant  force  of  impulse  and 
emotion.  Mental  development  is  that  process  of 
supplanting  these  instinctive  and  impulsive  tenden 
cies  to  action  by  intelligent,  rational  control. 

Consequently  in  the  earliest  forms  of  music,  and 
even  far  down  in  the  development  of  this  art,  the  ac 
cent  and  the  tempo  remained  the  two  powerful  fac 
tors  in  music,  and  were  valued  chiefly  because  of 


RHYTHM  91 

thsir  influence  over  the  emotional  consciousness.  In 
this  stage  music  was  more  passive  than  active,  more 
dramatically  impressive  than  discriminatingly  ana 
lytic.  The  mind  had  not  yet  acquired  either  the 
desire  or  the  skill  to  break  up  this  experience,  but 
accepted  it  at  its  more  apparent  value ;  that  is,  as 
an  appeal  to  the  emotions.  Such  is  the  nature  of 
the  reaction  of  the  nai've  and  unanalytic  mind  in  all 
of  its  interpretation  of  stimuli. 

Later,  however,  through  the  training  and  develop 
ment  of  centuries  of  experience  accumulated  and 
transmitted,  the  mind  gains  in  analytic  power  and 
intellectual  interests  assume  more  and  more  impor 
tance.  This  new  spirit  of  mental  inquiry  is  by  no 
means  confined  to  the  class  of  so-called  ' '  scientific  in 
terests,"  but  being  a  new  attitude  of  the  mind,  ex 
tends  to  all  phases  of  the  mind's  activities.  Thus  in 
tellectual  interests  are  aroused  and  become  even 
dominant  in  the  interpretation  of  both  religious  in 
terests  and  artistic  phenomena.  The  history  of  phi 
losophy  is  a  long  and  accurate  verification  of  this 
truth.  There  comes  a  time,  therefore,  when  man 
will  no  longer  be  content  to  accept  rhythm  at  its  face 
value,  but  will  discover  that  it,  too,  is  capable  of  be 
ing  analyzed  and  of  being  considered  as  having  cer 
tain  intellectual  relationships.  This  does  not  mean 
that  all  this  is  done  consciously  and  "out  loud,"  with 
purpose  predetermined — this  is  the  stage  of  philo 
sophical  reflection — but  that  the  mind  will  be  uncon 
sciously  actuated  by  intellectual,  as  well  as  by  emo 
tional  interests  in  reacting  to  such  a  stimulus  even  as 
rhythm  itself.  To  advance  to  the  plane  where  the 
mental  attitude  is  thus  changed  from  a  reflex  emo 
tionalism  to  an  analytic  intellectualism,  to  state  the 


92  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

development  in  extreme  terms,  implies  a  correspond 
ing  change  in  the  content  of  the  art  itself,  a  content 
not  before  appreciated  or  even  expressed.  Mental 
development,  let  us  repeat  it  again,  means  develop 
ment  all  along  the  line,  in  creative  power  and  in  ex 
pression  as  well  as  in  receptivity  and  appreciation. 
The  conclusion,  therefore,  is  that  rhythm  is  no  longer 
a  purely  emotional  element,  but  as  used  to-day  con 
tains  more  intellectual  attributes  than  when  it  served 
merely  as  an  instinctive  and  reflex  excitant  for  the 
emotional  consciousness. 

That  each  individual  goes  through  approximately 
these  same  stages  of  growth  and  interpretation  is  a 
corollary  following  from  the  ontogenetic  conception 
of  evolution. 

The  method  by  which  the  musician  utilizes  rhythm 
as  an  intellectual  element  in  his  art  is  technical  knowl 
edge  relating  to  music  and  need  not  be  entered  into 
in  this  connection.  It  is  sufficient  to  note  merely  that 
by  thus  making  use  of  rhythm  the  composer  has  a 
new  asset,  a  new  method  of  expressing  delicate  rela 
tionships,  balanced  proportions,  subtle  symmetry, 
more  refined  antithesis,  more  effective  modulations, 
a  means  of  giving  new  forms  to  phrase  and  theme,  of 
introducing  greater  variety  in  the  development  of  a 
subject,  and  of  emphasizing  the  unity  of  the  whole. 

Briefly  stated,  our  discussion  of  rhythm  has  shown 
that  it  has  been  subject  to  the  normal  laws  of  mental 
development,  and  has  passed  from  the  stage  charac 
terized  by  crude  reflex  reactions  of  a  pronounced 
emotional  character  to  the  recognition  and  realiza 
tion  of  broader  sesthetic  principles  as  the  true  basis 
of  its  artistic  value.  The  progress  has  been  along  the 
lines  indicated  above,  (i)  toward  greater  refinement 


RHYTHM  93 

in  the  expression  of  the  emotions,  and  (2)  toward  a 
more  intellectual  interpretation  of  the  elements  of 
rhythm.  It  has  been  suggested  also  that  music  has 
now  become  so  truly  a  mental  construct  with  de 
mands  for  logical  development  and  order  and  well- 
proportioned  unity,  that  it  rests  no  longer  upon  mere 
tonal  and  rhythmical  factors,  but  upon  principles 
valid  for  art  in  any  form. 


PROPERTY  OF 

CHICAGO  BOARD  OF 'EDUCATION 
SA BIN  SCHOOL 


CHAPTER  V 

MELODY 

I .  A  psychological  analysis  of  melody  is  an  under 
taking  of  peculiar  difficulty;  most  of  the  obscurities 
and  subtleties  with  which  music  is  beset — and  they 
are  not  few  nor  insignificant — refer  to  the  melodic 
aspect  of  this  art.  Rhythm,  because  of  its  physi 
ological  and  biological  basis  in  the  physical  organism, 
and  because  it  manifests  itself  in  well-defined  bodily 
reactions,  seems  to  have  a  definiteness  and  concrete- 
ness  not  found  in  melody.  Eminently  adapted  also 
to  the  psycho-physical  method  of  research,  it  permits 
of  accurate  measurements  and  of  experimental  veri 
fication.  But  when  we  turn  to  the  subject  of  melody, 
no  such  direct  or  alluring  avenues  of  approach  are  to 
be  found.  The  physiological  and  biological  relations 
of  melody  are  neither  so  fundamental  nor  so  sugges 
tive.  Consequently  there  is  but  little  to  be  gained  by 
following  the  method,  which,  in  the  case  of  rhythm, 
yielded  such  rich  returns  for  the  labor  expended. 

The  reason  for  this  striking  difference  is  to  be  found 
in  the  inherent  character  of  these  two  elements  of 
music.  Rhythm,  as  has  been  shown  in  the  two  pre 
ceding  criapTeT y,  liTprimarily  physical,  having  an  in 
stinctive  basis  in  the  structure  and  normal  function 
ing  of  the  nervous  system;  but  melody,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  as  truly  and  as  purely  psychical  as  any  of  the 
most  abstract  forms  of  consciousness.  True,  it  also 

94 


MELODY  95 

makes  use  of  the  physical  organism,  but  only  as  any 
other  form  of  creative  thought  utilizes  the  body  for 
its  expression.  If  rhythm  is  inherently  physical, 
melody,  on  the  other  hand,  is  essentially  a  true  form  of 
thought.  So  important  is  this  fact  for  a  philosophy 
of  music  that  we  pause,  before  beginning  our  analysis, 
to  emphasize  this  truth  by  calling  attention  to  two 
or  three  general  attributes  of  melody. 

2.  In  the  first  place  music  is  fleeting,  transitory, 
ephemeral.  Though  a  composition  is  just  as  con 
crete,  just  as  unitary  as  any  other  work  of  art,  its 
unity  is  a  unity  in  time,  not  in  space.  Consequently 
its  attributes  are  not  spatial,  but  like  all  attributes  of 
consciousness,  temporal.  It  was  this  fleeting  charac 
ter  of  music  that  moved  Browning  in  his  Abt  Vogler 
to  look  for  a  transcendental  basis  for  its  perdurance. 
Be  the  value  of  his  solution  what  it  may,  it  does  not 
do  away  with  its  empirical  transitoriness,  nor  lessen 
the  inevitable  abstractness  of  a  discussion  of  this 
element  of  music.  As  a  phenomenon  in  time,  music 
stands  related  naturally  to  literature,  the  art  of 
conceptual  thought.  When  judged,  or  even  when 
appreciated,  melody  cannot  be  apprehended  as  a 
form  immediately  present  to  sense,  but  must  be  both 
judged  and  enjoyed  as  a  memory.  Only  constantly 
changing  sounds  are  immediately  present  to  the  ear ; 
melody  is  a  unity  never  completed  except  in  the  past. 
In  this  respect,  as  has  been  implied,  it  shows  its  es 
sential  character  as  a  form  of  thought. 

Another  point  often  noted  in  discussions  of  the 
content  of  music,  but  mentioned  here  to  justify  fur 
ther  our  conclusions,  is  the  fact  that  melody  is  not 
imitative.  In  studying  critically  a  painting  or  a 
statue  it  is  regarded  as  objective,  i.  e.,  representative 


96  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

of  some  object  or  scene  of  the  external  world.  Such 
works  of  art  are  meant  to  represent  more  or  less  ac 
curately  forms  either  actually  existent,  as  in  the  case  of 
a  portrait  or  a  statue,  or  forms  that  might  be  real  ob 
jects  in  the  world  of  existent  things.  Though  not 
actual  copies  of  external  forms,  they  are,  and  must 
be,  true  to  the  principles  of  the  external  world  they 
are  meant  to  represent.  This  is  not  crass  realism  in 
art ;  it  only  asserts  that  if  the  artist  does  not  paint  ob 
jects  as  actually  seen  he  must  nevertheless  still  be  true 
to  life  in  its  possibilities,  if  not  in  its  actuality.  Con 
sequently  the  artist  is  guided  in  all  his  creative  work 
by  well-defined,  anatomical  principles  of  the  external 
world.  He  is  surrounded  on  every  hand  by  models 
which,  if  not  copied  literally,  are  the  foundation  of 
his  idealizations. 

With  music,  however,  the  case  is  different :  the  com 
poser,  even  in  the  most  liberal  interpretation  of  language, 
does  not  look  outside  of  himself  for  the  models  of  his 
melodies,  nor  even  for  the  principles  according  to  which 
his  works  of  art  must  conform.  The  melodies  in  nature 
are,  when  musically  considered,  wholly  insignificant. 
Think  for  a  moment  how  meagre  music  would  be,  how 
vapid,  if  the  law  of  imitation  were  as  binding  in  music 
as  in  painting  and  in  sculpture.  The  bird-calls  in  the 
Pastoral  Symphony,  for  example,  are  introduced 
more  as  a  novelty  than  as  essential  parts  in  the  the 
matic  material  of  that  composition.  The  great 
themes  of  the  movement  in  which  they  occur,  as  well 
as  of  all  the  others,  are  purely  mental  products  only 
incidentally  connected  with  the  few  notes  forming  the 
call  of  the  birds  they  are  meant  to  represent.  And 
even  in  the  most  realistic  examples  of  "program 
music,"  but  little  more  can  be  said  in  favor  of  the 


MELODY  97 

theory  of  imitation  as  the  source  of  melody  in  music. 
The  use  Beethoven  makes  of  nature  elements  in  the 
case  just  mentioned  is  typical;  they  are  introduced 
now  and  then  incidentally,  but  by  no  possible  inter 
pretation  of  language  can  they  be  said  to  serve  as  the 
basis  of  music,  as  objective  forms  are  the  basis  of 
painting  and  of  sculpture. 

But  if  music  is  not  the  outgrowth  of  the  imitative 
instinct,  we  are  forced  to  the  conclusion  that  as  a  fac 
tor  in  music  melody  is  peculiarly  and  characteristic 
ally  a  product  of  the  mind's  own  inner  activity. 
Aristotle  contended  that  music  was  the  most  "imi 
tative"  of  the  arts,  but  by  "imitation"  he  meant  a 
representation,  not  of  something  external,  but  of  the 
mind's  own  inner  processes.  And  in  this  sense  of  the 
term  his  statement  is  a  very  accurate  expression  of  an 
important  truth.  It  is  probably  true  that  no  other 
art  can  express  so  directly  or  so  accurately  the  real 
dynamics  of  the  emotional  life.  "Rirh_ 


wish  to  emphasizehere  is  the  purely  mental  or  spir- 


Lusic,  ITo  tar  as  it  is  melodic,  has  no  prototype  in 
nature ;  it  is  not  an  element  of  the  external  world,  re 
fined  and  idealized  or  set  in  new  relations,  as  objective 
elements  are  treated  in  the  imitative  arts,  but  it  is  ab 
initio  ad  perfectionem  the  result  of  the  mind's  own 
creative  power.  Some  one  relates  that  the  whole 
theme  for  one  of  his  famous  scherzo  movements 
flashed  in  Beethoven's  mind  as  he  stepped  out  one 
evening  under  the  cloudless  and  starlit  sky.  Whether 
the  incident  be  true  or  not,  the  principle  is  fundamen 
tal  in  the  creation  of  musical  works  of  art.  They  are 
created  spontaneously  in  a  sense  in  which  no  other 
works  of  art  are  spontaneous.  That  is  to  say,  melody 


98  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

•    *  i 

is  more  independent  of  the  external  world,  more  de 
pendent  upon  the  activity  of  the  creative  imagina 
tion,  than  the  elements  of  any  other  art.  There  is 
philosophic  as  well  as  poetic  truth  in  the  well-known 
words  of  Browning,  which  apply  to  melody  as  well  as 
to  the  harmony  of  the  musical  triad : 

"  But  here  is  the  finger  of  God,  a  flash  of  the  will  that  can, 
Existent  behind  all  laws,  that  made  them  and  lo, 

they  are ! 
And  I  know  not  if,  save  in  this,  such  gift  be  allowed  to 

man, 

That  out  of  three  sounds  he  frame,  not  a  fourth 
sound,  but  a  star." 

Beethoven  wrote  concerning  his  Mass  in  D:  "From 
the  heart  it  has  come  and  to  the  heart  it  shall  pene 
trate."  These  expressions  are  but  various  methods  of 
stating  what  must  be  regarded  as  the  fundamental 
psychological  truth  concerning  the  inherent  charac 
ter  of  melody :  it  is  not  a  copy  of  anything  in  the  ob 
jective  world  nor  an  idealization  thereof,  but  an  in 
dependent  expression  of  inherent  qualities  of  the 
mind  itself. 

The  conclusion  that  music  in  its  melodic  elements 
is  peculiarly  psychical  necessitates  a  certain  method 
of  investigation  and  determines  the  principles  ac 
cording  to  which  it  must  be  judged  and  the  grounds 
of  its  philosophical  significance  ascertained.  Since 
music  is  not  of  the  objective  world  in  its  origin,  but 
born  of  the  mind  itself,  the  true  principles  of  its  being 
and  criteria  of  its  value  are  not  to  be  found  in  any 
principles  of  the  objective  world,  but  in  the  laws  and 
principles  of  the  inner  world  of  consciousness.  The 
thesis  thus  stated  is  profound  in  its  bearing  upon  our 
problem;  it  means  (i)  that  the  broader  philosophical 


100JIOS 


Bbuvonag  Jo  aav     oovoub 

JO 


relationship  of  music  can  be  appreciated  only  in  the 
light  of  mental  laws  and  principles;  and  (2)  that  the 
principles  of  a  systematic,  intelligent,  authoritative, 
musical  criticism  rest  upon  the  truth  to  be  discov 
ered  by  this  psychological  analysis.  However,  in  our 
enthusiasm  for  the  more  fundamental  subjective 
truth,  the  objective  characteristic  of  melody  must 
not  be  overlooked.  Though  subjective  in  its  origin 
in  a  unique  way,  melody  itself  is  an  objective  form 
and,  as  such,  exemplifies  certain  important  laws  and 
principles  due  to  its  own  inherent,  architectonic  at 
tributes.  These,  in  our  analysis,  must  be  given  their 
proper  consideration. 

3.  The  two  elements  which  an  analysis  of  melody 
objectively  regarded  show  are  (i)  the  rhythm,  and 
(2)  variations  in  pitch.    Rhythm  furnishes,  as  it  were, 
a  background  of  uniformity  upon  which  the  various 
sounds  in  the  melodic  sequence  stand  out  in  more 
effective  contrast.     It  is  not  altogether  fanciful  to 
say  that  thus  is  realized  that  ancient  but  not  anti 
quated  aesthetic  formula,  "unity  in  variety."     The 
subject  of  rhythm  in  its  principal  features  has  al 
ready  been  discussed;  we  shall  not  therefore  devote 
further  time  to  this  subject,  except  to  say  that  it  is  in 
the  melodic  aspect  of  music  that  rhythm  finds  its 
highest  opportunity  for  artistic  development. 

4.  So  far  as  variation  in  pitch  is  concerned,  melody 
depends  upon  our  modern  diatonic  scale,  or,  to  in 
clude   all   possible   modifications,    upon   the   twelve 
tones  of  the  chromatic  scale.     These  scales  having 
been  fixed  by  custom  and  use,  the  sequence  of  tones 
in  a  melody  is  limited  on  the  one  hand  by  the  inter 
val  of  a  semitone,  and  on  the  other,  theoretically,  only 
by  the  register  of  the  voice  or  instrument;  but  even 


loo  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

in  the  case  of  an  interval  greater  than  an  octave,  the 
tone  must  be  one  of  the  tones  of  the  chromatic  scale, 
though  in  a  higher  or  a  lower  octave.  Practically, 
therefore,  it  is  correct  to  say  that  each  melodic  step 
must  be  limited  to  one  of  these  twelve  tones.  In 
fact  the  variations  are  usually  not  so  wide,  for  the 
diatonic,  not  the  chromatic  scale  is  the  ordinary  basis 
for  simple  melody.  Stated  in  its  simplest  terms, 
therefore,  melody  may  be  defined  objectively  as  a 
series  of  single  tones  rising  and  falling  by  definite  in 
tervals  upon  a  rhythmic  background  marked  by  a 
certain  stress  or  accent  laid  upon  tones  at  regular 
time  intervals. 

This  simple  formula,  however,  by  no  means  ex 
presses  the  whole  truth  or  gives  us  any  insight  into 
the  general  psychological  character  of  melody. 
Though  the  successive  intervals  are  limited  to  the 
seven  tones  of  the  diatonic  scale,  to  use  the  simplest 
form,  it  is  by  no  means  a  matter  of  chance  or  indiffer 
ence  what  the  order  of  succession  of  the  various  tones 
shall  be.  Certain  series  of  tones  charm  us  and  mani 
fest  all  the  power  and  unique  beauty  of  a  true  work 
of  art;  others,  apparently  not  very  different,  are  in 
sipid,  meaningless  or  even  positively  displeasing.  In 
the  one,  shines  the  indescribable  and  undefinable  fire 
of  genius;  in  the  other,  we  feel  the  labored  pains  of 
mediocrity  trying  ineffectually  to  rise.  Can  the  dif 
ference  from  the  purely  objective  point  of  view  be 
explained? 

Continuing  our  analysis  we  are  soon  met  with  the 
fact  that  certain  intervals  seem  natural  and  easy, 
while  others  are  difficult  to  make.  This  may  have  its 
ground  in  the  relationships  which  come  most  ob 
viously  before  us  in  consonance  and  dissonance. 


MELODY  lol 

However  that  may  be,  the  fact  remains.  For  exam 
ple,  the  octave,  the  third  and  the  fifth  are  intervals 
for  the  modern  ear  readily  made.  But  it  soon  be 
comes  evident  that  the  secret  of  melody  does  not  lie 
in  such  relationships  as  these.  The  value  of  two  suc 
cessive  tones  as  used  in  a  melody  cannot  be  deter 
mined  beforehand  by  their  relationship  in  the  scale. 
The  aesthetic  value  of  two  successive  tones,  as  of  two 
successive  words  in  a  sentence,  is  determined  and 
determined  mostly  by  the  part  they  play  in  the  or 
ganic  structure  considered  in  its  entirety.  This  is  an 
aesthetic  principle  of  universal  application. 

5.  Another  principle  far  more  important  for  a  cor 
rect  understanding  of  melody  is  the  principle  of  tonal 
ity,  the  relating  consciously  or  unconsciously  of  every 
tone  in  the  melody  to  the  fundamental  tone  of  the 
scale  in  which  the  melody  is  written.  As  was  shown 
above  in  the  chapter  on  Musical  Form,  the  funda 
mental  tone  of  the  scale  is  psychologically  the  point 
of  rest  and  reference  for  all  the  various  melodic 
changes  in  that  particular  key.  In  transposing  a 
melody  from  one  key  to  another,  the  inner  relation  of 
tone  to  tone  remains  unchanged,  only  the  tonic  or 
starting-point  is  raised  or  lowered,  as  the  case  may  be. 
The  psychological  importance  of  this  key-note  is  well 
emphasized  by  the  fact  that  most  melodies  after 
gravitating  back  and  forth  to  various  distances  from 
this  point  find  their  conclusions,  their  centres  of  grav 
ity  upon  this  note  at  the  conclusion  of  the  rhythmic 
period.  As  one  writer  tersely  expresses  it,  "We  may 
then  understand  a  melody  as  ever  tending  with  vari 
ous  degrees  of  urgency  of  strain  to  its  centre  of  grav 
ity,  the  tonic."  Or  as  Gurney  with  greater  fulness 

1  Puffer,  Psychology  of  Beauty,  p.  182. 


102  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

of  words  expresses  the  same  idea,  "The  melody, 
then,  may  begin  by  pressing  its  way  through  a 
sweetly  yielding  resistance  to  a  gradually  foreseen 
climax;  whence  again  fresh  expectation  is  bred,  per 
haps  for  another  excursion,  as  it  were,  round  the 
same  centre  but  with  a  bolder  and  freer  sweep,  per 
haps  for  a  fresh  differentiation  whereof  in  turn  the 
tendency  is  surmised  and  followed,  to  a  point  where 
again  the  motive  is  suspended  on  another  temporary 
goal;  till  after  a  certain  number  of  such  involutions 
and  evolutions,  and  of  delicately  poised  leanings  and 
reluctances  and  yieldings,  the  forces  so  accurately 
measured  just  suffice  to  bring  it  home,  and  the  sense 
of  potential  and  coming  integration  which  has  under 
lain  all  our  provisional  adjustments  of  expectation  is 
triumphantly  justified." 

This  description  of  melody,  though  unfortunately 
expressed,  is,  nevertheless,  a  remarkably  accurate 
statement  of  just  what  occurs,  as  a  melody  is  carried 
on  from  measure  to  measure,  from  phrase  to  phrase, 
to  the  final  cadence.  Who  has  not,  when  listening  to 
some  melody,  run  along  a  few  notes  ahead  of  the 
music  to  anticipate  the  coming  changes,  and  has  not 
found  here  and  there  a  shorter  by-path  home  than 
the  composer  has  seen  fit  to  follow? 

The  final  word  in  a  musical  analysis  of  a  melody 
is  found  in  outline  in  the  chapter  above  on  Musical 
Form.  A  melody  is  a  two-part  or  a  three-part  musi 
cal  form  composed  of  phrases  and  sentences  with 
their  rhythmic  outlines  and  cadences.  The  musical 
analysis  of  a  given  melody  consists  of  separating  out 
these  constituent  elements  in  order  that  their  individ 
ual  character  and  mutual  relationships  may  be  more 

1  Power  of  Sound,  p.  165. 


MELODY  103 

readily  and  intelligently  understood.  But  even  so  the 
secret  of  the  value  or  the  weakness  of  a  melody  has  not 
been  fully  discovered.  Of  the  principles  of  rhythm,  of 
cadence,  of  phrase,  of  sentence,  etc.,  a  poor  melody 
may  be  as  true  an  exemplar  as  one  of  the  best. 

The  truth  is  that  such  an  analysis  of  form  as  this 
does  not  go  deep  enough  to  discover  the  real  source 
of  the  artistic  value  or  weakness  of  a  composition. 
Form  is  important  in  any  art,  but  form  is  not  all; 
nor  does  it  strike  closest  to  the  root  of  the  prob 
lem  of  a  psychology  of  art.  Our  definition  of  mel 
ody  stating  the  character  of  melody  in  terms  of 
rhythm  and  of  variation  in  pitch  was  defective  just 
at  this  point;  while  it  was  true  enough  of  melody 
considered  merely  as  a  sound  phenomenon,  mel 
ody  is  that  and  something  more.  A  better  defini 
tion,  therefore,  would  be,  that  melody  consists  of  a 
series  of  single  musical  tones  in  rhythmic  succession  ex 
pressing  a  complete  musical  thought.  This  means  that 
melody  must  be  regarded  as  a  form  of  thought  as 
well  as  a  sound  phenomenon;  and  any  theory  that 
fails  to  state  the  principles  and  attributes  of  melody 
thus  considered  will  be  one-sided  and  inadequate. 
Having  failed  then  on  the  basis  of  an  objective 
analysis  alone  to  discover  the  secret  of  the  beauty 
and  artistic  value  of  melody,  we  turn  to  the  subjec 
tive  aspect  of  our  subject  to  see  if  our  quest  there 
may  be  more  successful.  In  other  words,  the  discus 
sion  here  turns  to  an  examination  of  the  suggestion 
already  made,  that  melody,  being  peculiarly  spiritual 
in  character,  that  is,  a  product  of  the  mind's  own 
creative  activity,  must  be  evaluated  according  to 
psychological  principles. 

The  method  of  our  further  inquiry,  and  to  a  certain 


104  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

extent  the  answer  to  the  inquiry,  are  suggested  by  the 
conclusions  arrived  at  thus  far.  If  melody,  as  has  been 
said,  is,  in  a  unique  way,  the  product  of  the  creative 
imagination  and  not  of  imitative  activity,  then  the 
true  criteria  of  its  value  and  the  principles  under 
lying  its  true  character  are  mental  principles,  sub 
jective  rather  than  objective  laws.  Not  only  so,  but 
the  principles  of  the  mind's  activity  for  any  particu 
lar  type  of  mental  reaction  being  uniform,  the  same 
standards  of  value  that  we  apply  to  test  the  aesthetic 
value  of  other  ideas  will  apply  to  music  as  well.  So 
far  as  music  is  considered  as  a  form  of  mental  experi 
ence,  therefore,  we  need  not  set  about  to  discover 
some  new  norms  of  melodic  value,  but  can  proceed  at 
once  to  apply  the  standards  used  as  criteria  of  the 
value  of  other  art  conceptions. 

And  further,  it  is  also  evident  that  thus  considered 
we  should  find  the  closest  analogy  between  melody 
and  literature,  the  most  intellectual  of  the  arts.  This 
we  shall  assume  without  further  argument  to  be  the 
case,  and  shall  justify  the  assumption  only  by  show 
ing  that  the  criteria  of  literary  excellence  can  be  used 
also  as  the  criteria  of  the  value  of  musical  thought. 
We  shall  begin  with  Unity. 

6.  In  literature  there  is  the  unity  of  a  single  sen 
tence,  a  wider  unity  in  paragraphs,  and  likewise  more 
and  more  comprehensively  in  topics,  in  chapters,  in 
monographs,  in  treatises.  In  such  forms  the  unity 
is  a  logical  relation,  and  as  it  grows  more  and  more 
inclusive  it  becomes  commensurately  more  com 
plex,  more  abstract.  In  the  sentence  the  unity  of 
thought  involved  is  a  single  judgment;  in  the  para 
graph  it  is  due  to  the  dominance  of  a  single  subordi 
nate  topic  there  discussed.  In  a  monograph  or  in  a 


MELODY 


105 


treatise  there  is  room  for  the  wider  elaboration  of 
material.  This  principle  is  valid  throughout:  as  the 
breadth  of  the  subject  increases  the  unity  becomes 
more  and  more  abstractly  logical  and  harder  to  appre 
ciate.  The  unity  in  a  musical  composition  is  closely 
analogous  to  this :  there  is  the  unity  of  a  single  phrase, 
of  the  period  or  sentence,  of  a  movement  or  of  a 
whole  composition  of  the  most  elaborate  type.  This 
is,  in  truth,  but  the  subjective  aspect  of  the  struc 
tural  forms  outlined  in  Chapter  II.  Attention  may 
be  called  to  one  example  to  illustrate,  and  since  for 
illustration  the  simplest  and  best  known  examples 
are  the  best,  we  give  the  well-known  Annie  Laurie. 


q t\--\ — K — , — &-1 

«— —        — f\-  - 
— »— j— f — i — i — i — 


^p 


At  the  end  of  the  first  phrase  where  the  melody 
rises  from  C,  the  tonic,  to  D,  the  mind  is  left  unsatis 
fied,  expectant.  The  tonic  has  not  yet  been  found 


Io6  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

at  the  end  of  the  phrase.  As  the  two  factors  pitch  and 
rhythm  both  enter  as  constitutent  elements  in  mel 
ody,  it  is  only  when  the  key-note  or  tonic  comes  at  the 
end  of  a  phrase  or  period  that  the  mind  finds  its  de 
mands  for  unity  fully  met.  Thus  the  second  phrase 
balances  the  first  and  the  tonic  coinciding  with  the 
end  of  the  period,  the  simplest  form  of  unity  is 
attained.  The  sentence  is  complete.  But  there 
follows  another  idea,  technically  another  period,  re 
lated  to  the  first  by  likeness  of  rhythm  and  identity 
of  key,  which  the  mind  readily  accepts  with  the  first 
as  parts  of  a  larger  whole,  a  composition.  Hender 
son,  I  believe  it  was,  has  said  that  the  sense  of  incom 
pleteness  in  an  unfinished  musical  phrase  is  just  as 
real,  just  as  significant  as  the  incompleteness  in  an 
unfinished  sentence.  The  reason  is  not  difficult  to 
see ;  when  we  think  a  musical  thought  we  think  it  in 
terms  of  rhythm  and  in  terms  of  the  scale  in  which 
the  tonic  is  the  ruling  tone.  To  stop  before  the 
rhythmic  period  is  complete  or  without  a  cadence, 
therefore,  is  to  do  violence  to  the  fundamental  laws 
of  musical  thought  as  much  as  to  leave  in  language 
some  phrase  or  clause  unfinished. 

What  is  true  of  simple  melodies  is  no  less  true  of 
the  architectonic  of  more  complex  musical  forms; 
although,  as  might  be  inferred,  the  unity  of  the  latter 
is  not  so  simple  nor  so  readily  seen.  The  unity  of 
phrase  and  period  in  simple  melodies  is  given  almost 
as  a  direct  impression  of  sense,  but  the  unity  of  these 
elements  in  the  movement  of  a  symphony,  for  ex 
ample,  is  so  obscured  by  variations  and  exceptions 
that  a  more  analytic  mental  attitude  is  required  to 
apprehend  it ;  in  such  forms  the  unity  becomes  as 
in  a  drama  or  m  a  novel,  a  mere  logical  bond,  not  visi- 


MELODY  107 

ble  except  in  the  comprehensive  envisagement  of  the 
work  as  a  whole.  As  the  scope  of  the  work  increases 
the  unity  necessarily  becomes  less  concrete,  more  de 
pendent  upon  abstract  logical  relations.  Instead  of 
a  mere  objective  unity  sensuously  perceived,  it  is  now 
a  unity  of  organization.  Thus  the  unity  which  the 
writer  produces  by  the  analysis  and  amplification 
and  illustration  of  his  principal  thought  and  of  sub 
ordinate  topics,  the  composer  gains  by  the  develop 
ment  of  his  theme  or  subject.  To  apprehend  such 
unity  in  either  case  is  work  demanding  a  thorough 
mastery  of  both  the  principal  and  subordinate  ele 
ments,  and  of  their  logical  relationship  to  each  other. 

But  there  is  another  form  of  unity  in  literature 
that  also  finds  its  analogue  in  music,  a  unity  not 
produced  by  the  development  of  plot  or  theme,  but 
by  what  may  be  called  emotional  congruity.  While 
this  emotional  unity  is  a  factor  in  all  poetry,  in 
tragedy  and  in  comedy,  it  is  best  exemplified  in  the 
lyric.  How  utterly  incongruous,  how  impossible  to 
judge  the  unity  of  Milton's  Lycidas  by  the  same 
standards  applied  to  Burke' s  Speech  on  Conciliation! 
There  is  no  logical  development  in  the  one  case  as  in 
the  other.  The  latter  is  meant  to  convince  the  rea 
son,  the  former  to  control  for  a  time  the  mood  of  the 
reader.  But  how  congruous,  how  consistent,  how 
perfectly  in  keeping  with  this  spirit  of  the  poem  are 
the  figures,  the  allusions,  the  imagery  suggested! 

Emotional  unity  in  music  is  closely  akin  to  what  we 
have  called  the  emotional  unity  of  the  lyric.  There 
is  the  same  dominance  of  one  feeling  state  and  the 
subordination  of  the  content  of  the  composition  to 
this  controlling  mood.  Not  only  are  all  shorter  mu 
sical  compositions  like  the  song,  the' nocturne,  etc., 


io8  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

lyrical  in  spirit,  but  even  many  of  the  movements  in 
sonatas  and  symphonies  show  plainly  the  presence  of 
a  ruling  mood.  Indeed,  so  far  as  the  various  move 
ments  are  designed  to  express  some  particular  phase 
of  the  emotional  life — as  they  are  all  intended  to  do — 
they  are  lyrical  in  character.  The  influence  of  an 
Andante  or  a  Largo  in  inducing  a  dominant  mood  is 
certainly  not  less  than  any  lyric  that  might  be  named. 
In  such  cases,  however,  it  is  obtained,  not  by  specific 
imagery  pictured  through  language,  but  by  purely 
musical  factors.  But  to  whatever  causes  due,  it  en 
ters  vitally  into  the  feeling  of  unity  which  every  work 
of  art  must  in  some  way  produce. 

Unity,  however,  notwithstanding  its  supreme  im 
portance,  by  no  means  explains  the  whole  aesthetic 
effect  of  a  work  of  art  and  cannot,  therefore,  be  used 
as  the  sole  criterion  of  the  value  of  any  work  of  art. 
There  is,  or  may  be,  unity  in  insignificant  melodies 
as  well  as  in  melodies  that  are  immortally  great. 
There  is  unity  in  things  low  as  well  as  in  things  high 
in  the  scale  of  life.  Other  criteria  of  value  must  be 
applied  therefore,  before  we  get  an  adequate  basis 
for  judgments  as  to  the  true  nature  and  artistic  value 
of  the  melodic  factor  in  music. 

7.  Literary  criticism  is  usually  divided  into  the 
two  heads,  Style  and  Content.  The  principal  elements 
of  style  are  Strength  and  Gracefulness;  of  content, 
Originality  and  Significance.  These  four  qualities, 
we  wish  to  show,  apply  as  well  to  music  as  to  litera 
ture,  and  may  therefore  be  used  as  the  criteria  of 
artistic  value  of  melody  as  well  as  of  poetry. 

Strength  in  literary  expression  means  that  the 
style  is  concise,  direct;  the  thought  is  set  forth  in 
plain  terms  without  circumlocution  or  excess  of  figure. 


MELODY  109 

In  models  of  strength  every  word  is  an  arch-stone ;  to 
take  one  away  not  only  leaves  a  gap,  but  it  weakens 
the  whole  superstructure.  In  such  a  style  there  is  no 
surplus  of  verbiage,  but  the  thought  stands  out  clear 
and  distinct,  strong  in  its  simplicity  and  untram- 
meled  with  ornament  or  needless  detail. 

The  same  principles  apply  in  musical  composi 
tions:  the  facts  just  given  are  principles  of  style,  true 
not  merely  in  literature,  but  for  any  thought  ex 
pressed  in  symbolic  form.  In  music  as  in  literature 
there  is  a  thought  to  be  expressed:  that  the  idea  in 
one  case  is  conceptual,  in  the  other  musical,  does  not 
alter  this  primary  fact.  Notes,  it  is  needless  to  say, 
can  be  multiplied  as  well  as  words.  And  ornamenta 
tion  is  common  to  the  two  arts.  A  musical  thought, 
therefore,  can  be  expressed  concisely  or  otherwise  as 
well  as  a  conceptual  thought.  Strength  of  expression, 
therefore,  is  a  virtue  of  musical  expression  as  well  as 
of  literature. 

It  may  help  to  justify  this  conclusion  and  give  a 
clearer  conception  of  the  nature  of  strength  of  style,  to 
see  what  are  the  mental  traits  from  which  this  qual 
ity  of  style  arises.  First,  there  must  be  clearness  of 
thought,  vividness  of  imagination.  The  strong  writer 
must  be  fully  master  of  his  subject,  able  to  see  the 
goal  from  a  distance  and  to  know  the  most  direct 
route  to  reach  it.  Strength  of  style,  therefore,  indi 
cates  a  clear,  logical,  intellectual  grasp  of  the  subject 
in  all  its  details.  These  details,  however,  will  be 
neglected  that  the  ruling  thought  may  be  clearly 
seen.  Strength,  therefore,  is  the  attribute  of  the  in 
tellectual  writer,  whether  he  be  poet  or  musician. 
Another  mental  requisite  of  the  strong  writer  is  rich 
ness  of  thought,  profusion  of  ideas.  Without  this  he 


I lo  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

will  tend  necessarily  to  over-elaboration  and  exces 
sive  ornamentation.  On  the  other  hand  the  strong 
writer,  because  he  has  such  a  profusion  of  ideas,  will 
be  interested  to  express  the  truth  he  sees  rather  than 
to  spend  his  time  polishing  his  style  and  ornamenting 
his  diction.  Browning  and  Tennyson  with  their 
strongly  contrasted  styles  are  an  interesting  illustra 
tion  of  the  truth  of  this.  Because  of  the  very  richness 
of  his  material  the  strong  writer  will  not  spend  his 
time  upon  a  worthless  theme  nor  upon  the  inconse 
quential  development  of  a  good  one. 

The  style  of  the  Classicists,  because  of  these  men 
tal  attrbutes,  is  stronger  than  the  style  of  the  Ro 
manticists.  There  is  with  the  former  a  directness  in 
the  exposition  of  their  themes,  a  richness  of  pure 
musical  thought,  a  logical  arrangement  of  their  sub 
ject  matter  not  found  in  the  latter.  There  is  less 
ornateness,  less  feeling,  but  clearer  thought,  more 
virility.  Think,  for  example,  of  the  simple  motive 
upon  which  Beethoven's  C  Minor  Symphony  is 
founded!  How  direct,  how  simple,  how  powerful. 
"Such,"  he  said,  "is  the  knock  of  fate."  And  if  the 
subject  is  laid  down  unmistakably,  so  also  is  the  de 
velopment  not  less  logical  and  clear.  It  does  not  re 
quire  the  technical  knowledge  of  a  musician  to  feel 
the  profusion  of  his  ideas  and  the  power  of  his 
thought.  Though  I  do  not  remember  the  numbers  of 
the  program,  this  impression  of  force  and  confidence 
and  wealth  I  recall  very  well,  when  the  Kneisel  Quar 
tet  years  ago  struck  the  first  phrase  of  one  of  Bee 
thoven's  Quartets.  So  with  Bach :  there  is  this  same 
thorough  mastery  of  his  thought  and  such  a  clear  ap 
preciation  of  logical  development,  that  every  note  is 
justified  by  the  rules  of  counterpoint.  Brahms  also 


MELODY  1 1 1 

shows  that  intelligent  mastery  of  his  ideas  which  al 
most  inevitably  results  in  this  direct  and  forcible 
quality  of  style. 

How  different  when  we  turn  to  the  compositions 
of  the  Romanticists,  of  whom  Chopin  may  serve  as 
an  example.  In  his  music  we  feel  not  the  strong  as- 
sertiveness  of  a  mind  thoroughly  master  of  the  situ 
ation,  but 'more  the  musings  of  a  strongly  emotional 
nature.  Beethoven  wrote  because  he  knew,  and 
found  joy  in  the  expression  of  ideas  so  vividly  real; 
Chopin  because  he  felt,  and  in  his  music  found  ex 
pression  for  the  fire  which  burned  deep  within.  In  the 
one  case  the  man  controlled  his  feeling,  in  the  other 
the  feeling  controlled  the  man.  Beethoven  made  his 
music  obey  the  law  of  logical  thought ;  his  strong  mind 
would  tolerate  nothing  else.  Chopin  gave  himself  up 
to  his  musings,  and  his  musical  genius  enabled  him  to 
crystallize  his  mood  in  musical  form.  It  is  enough 
to  appreciate  Chopin's  music  if  one  is  susceptible  to 
the  dramatic  elements  of  the  musical  art.  But  much 
of  the  beauty  of  Beethoven's  music  lies  in  its  struc 
tural  elements,  in  that  elusive  beauty  of  form  which 
demands  for  its  recognition  the  keenest  analysis  and 
the  most  attentive  study. 

8.  Gracefulness,  the  second  attribute  of  style,  is 
not  so  easy  to  define  or  to  explain.  Certain  asser 
tions,  however,  may  be  made  with  confidence,  not 
withstanding  the  inherent  vagueness  of  the  quality 
itself.  Strength  demands  that  a  thought  should  be 
expressed  simply,  concisely,  logically;  gracefulness 
demands  that  it  should  be  expressed  in  a  pleasing 
manner.  In  the  first  case,  the  thought  is  expressed  for 
its  own  sake;  in  the  latter,  elements  of  beauty  must  be 
found  even  in  the  expression.  The  graceful  writer 


112  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

may  be  or  he  may  not  be  as  logical  as  the  strong 
writer,  but  he  must  be  sensitive  to  fine  shades  of  feel 
ing  and  appreciation  of  elements  of  sense  beauty. 
His  mind  is  alive  to  subtle  distinctions,  delicate 
shades  of  differences,  so  that  anything  incongru 
ous  or  unharmonious  is  avoided  instinctively.  The 
thought  of  the  graceful  writer,  therefore,  is  illumined 
with  flashes  of  subtle  wit,  and  his  works  are  enriched 
with  telling  metaphor  and  simile.  Suggestions  are 
numerous,  but  his  good  taste  leads  him  to  select  only 
those  most  proper  and  containing  some  element  of 
beauty. 

The  same  mental  attitude  applies  to  the  composer 
as  well  as  to  the  writer,  and  it  will  just  as  inevita 
bly  reflect  itself  in  his  style.  The  fundamental  thing 
is  that  there  be  a  mind  responsive  to  such  factors. 

This  virtue  of  style  is,  on  the  whole,  not  so  rare  as 
strength.  The  exact,  logical  mind  is  harder  to  find 
than  the  mind  responsive  to  elements  of  grace  and 
ease  in  expression.  Strength  is  characteristic  of  a 
master  mind;  grace,  a  condition  merely  of  sensitive 
ness.  The  examples  of  graceful  composers,  therefore, 
are  numerous.  Mendelssohn  shows  grace  of  a  dainty, 
sprightly  kind;  not  a  little  of  the  charm  of  Chopin's 
music  is  due  to  this  virtue  of  expression.  Grieg,  not 
withstanding  peculiarities  of  rhythm,  is  graceful; 
Schubert,  in  a  warmer  vein,  shows  the  same  quality 
of  style.  But  on  the  whole,  Mozart,  perhaps,  is  the 
best  examplar  of  this  style. 

Of  the  two  elements  of  style,  gracefulness  is  the 
easier  apprehended  and  consequently  more  generally 
appreciated.  Grace  in  expression  has  to  do  more 
with  the  concrete,  with  the  sensuous  elements  of 
music,  than  with  abstract  logical  relations.  The 


MELODY  113 

beauty  of  a  graceful  phrase  may  flash  upon  us,  but 
the  value  of  logical  order,  clearness  of  vision,  can  be 
found  only  by  giving  the  closest  attention,  and  con 
sciously  regarding  the  work  as  a  whole.  Thus,  grace 
ful  music  is  more  popular  than  music  exemplifying 
strength.  Though  the  thought  be  not  so  noble, 
though  the  content  be  not  so  profound  nor  so  logi 
cally  expressed,  there  is  a  sweetness,  a  finish,  a  sim 
plicity  in  a  graceful  composition  which  all — the  novice 
and  the  trained  musician  alike — appreciate  and  ap 
prove.  And  rightly  so,  for  gracefulness  is  a  truly 
aesthetic  principle  and  merits  our  admiration.  But  I 
doubt  if  it  can  justly  be  given  so  high  a  place  in  the 
scale  of  aesthetic  values  as  should  be  accorded  the 
more  intellectual  element,  strength. 

When  all  is  said,  however,  the  real  secret  of  a  mel 
ody  or  of  music  in  its  broader  harmonic  aspect  is  not 
in  its  style,  but  in  its  content.  If  there  is  no  really 
vital,  significant  truth  to  be  expressed,  even  the  most 
faultless  style  will  hardly  redeem  the  work  from 
mediocrity.  But  on  the  other  hand,  we  are  ready  to 
palliate  a  poor  style,  provided  the  content  be  of  suf 
ficient  value. 

9.  The  two  principal  virtues  of  a  work  of  literary 
art  considered  content-wise,  it  has  been  stated,  are 
Originality  and  Significance.  Hadow,  in  his  Studies 
in  Modern  Music,  seeking  for  the  criteria  of  good 
music,  names  vitality  as  the  important  factor.  The 
composer,  he  says,  must  be  the  parent  of  his  musical 
ideas,  not  their  fabricator.  The  theme  may  come 
to  his  mind  like  a  meteor  flash,  or  grow  more  slowly 
into  shape,  but  it  must  be  given  as  it  was  actually 
seen,  not  as  it  has  been  described  by  another.  There 
is  no  question  but  that  he  has  here  hit  upon  one  of  the 


114  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

most  fundamental  requirements  of  a  work  of  art.  We 
would  insist  most  urgently  upon  the  legitimate  birth 
of  the  musical  thought  in  the  composer's  own  imagi 
nation.  There  is  no  surer  sign  of  mediocrity  than  to 
be  servile  to  the  models,  even  of  the  masters.  The 
world  little  prizes  copies  of  its  masterpieces — they 
are  sure  to  be  inferior — but  it  is  always  ready  to  re 
ceive  the  interpretation  of  life  of  an  independent 
mind.  True,  the  recognition  often  seems  slow  in 
coming,  but  it  is  safe  to  say  that  little  valuable  truth 
lies  buried  in  the  past.  The  first  thing  for  the  creator 
of  a  true  work  of  art  is  something  worthy  to  express, 
some  significant  truth  of  life,  some  pictorial  concep 
tion  for  the  artist,  some  story  representing  a  facette 
of  life  for  the  author,  some  theme  or  melody  for  the 
composer.  There  must  be  the  splendor  of  a  great 
thought  else  it  will  not  be  worth  while ;  there  must  be 
the  reflection  of  the  man's  own  individuality  else  the 
subject  will  be  trite;  there  must  be  the  keen,  true 
insight  of  the  artist's  vision  else  it  will  pall.  When  a 
man  has  such  an  inspiration  as  this,  when  his  creative 
imagination  pictures  it  in  the  medium  of  his  art  and 
his  hand  has  expressed  it  in  the  symbols  of  his  craft, 
lo,  a  new  work  of  art  is  born.  Does  it  satisfy  the 
public  taste  or  even  the  critical  opinions  of  his  time? 
It  may,  but  it  probably  will  not.  Neither  the  public 
taste  nor  the  critic's  judgment  is  so  profound  that  it 
must  be  taken  for  granted  that  they  have  fathomed 
the  depths  of  art  and  understand  all  its  possibilities. 
The  true  artist,  the  man  of  independent  thought  and 
keen  vision,  may  be  living  before  his  time.  His  work 
may  be  prophetic  and  the  world,  including  critics 
and  savants,  still  blind  to  its  truth.  So  it  has  always 
been,  and  so  it  will  continue  to  be. 


MELODY  115 

10.  Significance  as  an  aesthetic  virtue  is  a  protest 
against  trivialities,  a  demand  for  things  worth  while. 
This  attribute  excludes  the  cheap  and  commonplace 
from  art,  and  stands  for  dignity  and  nobility  of 
thought.  Things  that  are  trivial  soon  pall,  and  the 
commonplace  at  best  can  please  but  for  the  moment. 
Art  is  serious  and  must  be  founded  on  truth  that  will 
perdure.  Therefore  only  the  deep  things  of  life,  the 
truth  that  changes  not  with  fads  and  fancies,  or  even 
with  systems  of  philosophy,  the  beauty  that  is  beauty 
while  mind  is  mind  and  man  is  man — only  such 
themes  can  be  the  subject  of  great  masterpieces  in 
art. 

An  analysis  of  this  attribute  shows  that  it  may  be 
gained  in  two  distinct  ways.  There  is  first  what  may 
be  called  intellectual  significance;  the  subject  may 
be  treated  in  a  critical,  analytic,  or  constructive  way, 
so  that  its  logical  import  is  better  seen  or  its  implica 
tions  better  substantiated.  It  is  necessary  also  that 
subjects  of  this  class  should  be  intimately  connected 
with  the  vital  problems  of  life. 

But  a  subject  may  be  significant  also  emotionally; 
though  possessing  but  little  material  for  reflection,  it 
has  the  power  to  stimulate  to  active  consciousness 
some  of  the  finer,  but  basic  emotions  of  human  nature. 
Such  a  work  of  art  as  well  as  that  rich  in  thought  must 
also  be  termed  significant.  To  say  that  music  and 
the  other  arts  as  well  gain  their  significance  chiefly 
through  their  emotional  characteristics,  is  but  to  say 
that  art  is  not  didactic.  Not  only  are  the  symbols  of 
most  of  the  arts  too  vague  to  give  exactness  in  ex 
pression,  a  fundamental  consideration  in  matters 
pertaining  to  the  intellectual  realm,  but  such  an  end 
is  wholly  beside  the  true  purpose  and  function  of  art. 


116  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

There  is  music,  however,  significant  in  both  01 
these  ways,  intellectually  and  emotionally.  The  de 
velopment  of  thematic  material,  the  mathematical 
relations  involved  in  rhythm  and  in  harmony  and 
counterpoint,  the  qualities  of  style  productive  of 
strength,  are  all  intellectual  rather  than  emotional 
in  the  mental  reaction  they  produce.  Bach's  Fugues 
are  the  classical  example  of  music  of  this  kind.  Not 
until  their  logical  character  is  understood  and  their 
contrapuntal  exactitude  intelligently  perceived  can 
they  be  at  all  adequately  appreciated.  But  not  alone 
in  Bach,  but  in  all  the  classical  composers,  these  in 
tellectual  elements  are  found  as  distinctive  attributes 
of  their  thought  and  style,  giving  purity,  nobility  and 
depth  to  their  music. 

At  the  other  extreme  are  the  Romanticists  and 
the  modern  school  of  musical  "Impressionists,"  whose 
music  is  impressive  through  an  appeal  not  to  the  in 
tellect,  but  through  its  power  to  stimulate  and  to 
carry  to  a  climax  the  human  emotions.  Since  the 
emotional  consciousness  as  well  as  the  intellectual  is 
a  constitutent  part  of  the  mental  life,  its  normal 
activity  and  its  ideals  are  the  basis  of  one  of  the 
mind's  standards  of  value  Music  may  be  significant, 
therefore,  because  of  its  emotional  characteristics  and 
power.  The  method  by  which  music  thus  stimulates 
the  mind  to  emotional  reactions  will  be  taken  up  for 
discussion  in  a  later  chapter. 

In  connection  with  this  subject  of  the  emotional 
significance  of  music,  there  is  a  distinction  too  impor 
tant  to  be  passed  by  without  notice.  It,  too,  is  best 
seen  in  literature,  but  is  valid  also  in  music.  In  lit 
erature  there  is  a  scale  of  values  of  which  Farce  and 
Melodrama  mark  the  lowest  register,  Comedy  the 


MELODY  117 

middle,  and  Tragedy  the  highest.  Tragedy  marks 
the  highest  point  of  attainment  in  dramatic  literature, 
because  it  leads  us  vicariously  through  the  struggles 
of  a  human  soul  face  to  face  with  the  eternal  prob 
lems  of  fate,  or  destiny,  or  character,  and  arouses  in 
us  emotions  recognized  to  be  commensurate  in  impor 
tance  with  the  problems  involved. 

An  analogous  distinction  obtains  also  in  music; 
there  is  a  characteristic  feeling-tone  in  the  various 
movements,  for  example,  as  essentially  a  part  of  the 
psychology  of  the  movement  as  is  the  dominant 
emotional  element  to  these  various  forms  of  dra 
matic  literature.  On  the  one  hand  there  is  the  light 
and  graceful  and  sparkling  Scherzo,  joyful  in  its  mood 
and  care  free  in  the  mental  imagery  it  evokes ;  but  at 
the  other  extreme  the  Andante,  the  Adagio,  and  the 
Largo  induce  a  mood  closely  akin  to  the  deep  emo 
tions  aroused  by  tragedy  or  by  the  sorrows  of  real 
life.  Consequently  the  slow  movements  are  felt  in 
tuitively  to  have  more  depth,  greater  significance 
than  the  more  graceful,  more  animated  movements 
with  which  they  are  contrasted.  Life  when  faced 
squarely  is  serious — not  therefore  sombre — and  only 
those  things  which  get  down  to  the  roots  of  human 
nature  and  of  human  conduct  are  significant  in  the 
deepest  and  fullest  meaning  of  that  term.  Thus 
there  is  abundant  philosophical  justification  for  the 
higher  evaluation  put  upon  that  class  of  music  to 
which  Handel's  Largo  from  "Xerxes,"  Tschaikowski's 
Andante  for  Strings,  and  Beethoven's  Marche  Fundbre 
of  Opus  26  belong. 

If  what  has  been  said  in  this  chapter  be  true  or  even 
a  fair  approximation  of  the  truth,  it  serves  to  call  at 
tention  to  a  fundamental  distinction  between  the  in- 


Il8  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

herein;  nature  of  rhythm  and  of  melody.  When  we 
turn  from  rhythm  to  melody  we  turn  from  an  element 
fundamentally  organic  and  instinctive,  to  an  element 
that  is  peculiarly  psychical,  a  result  of  the  free  activ 
ity  of  the  creative  imagination  acting  spontaneously 
in  accordance  with  well-known  principles  of  con 
sciousness.  Instead  of  being  like  rhythm,  connected 
with  the  activity  of  the  whole  nervous  system  in  its 
functional  activity,  melody  is,  to  say  the  most,  con 
nected  only  with  the  higher  conscious  centres.  That 
is  to  say  it  is  inherently  psychical  and  its  character 
and  qualities  must  be  stated  in  terms  of  the  elements 
of  consciousness.  Thus  we  have  in  this  chapter  disr- 
covered  what  melody  is  essentially,  and  have  stated 
what  some  of  its  subjective  attributes  are. 


CHAPTER  VI 

HARMONY 

I.  For  the  purposes  of  the  present  discussion  the 
subject  to  which  we  now  turn  offers  some  interesting 
features.  In  the  first  place  the  theory  of  harmony 
from  the  musician's  point  of  view  has  been  worked 
out  in  great  detail  and  reduced  to  definite  principles 
and  rules.  Discussions  of  this  nature  are  therefore 
abundant.  The  fact  that  there  can  be  rules  for  har 
mony  suggests  also  that  harmony,  like  rhythm,  is  a 
matter  of  exact  and  readily  ascertained  relationships. 

Again,  the  subject  has  been  studied  thoroughly  from 
the  physical  point  of  view  by  Helmholtz  and  others 
so  that  conclusions  concerning  the  physical  stimulus 
of  musical  tones  have  been  scientifically  ascertained 
and  established.  This  does  not  mean  that  there  are 
not  many  points  still  unsettled,  but  the  fundamental 
facts  concerning  such  subjects  as  the  nature  of  sound 
waves,  overtones,  of  wave  combination  and  interfer 
ence,  the  physical  basis  of  consonance,  dissonance 
and  discord,  have  been  established  with  all  the  cer 
tainty  of  scientific  conclusions.  No  element  of  music 
upon  the  physical  side  certainly  is  better  under 
stood  than  the  subject  of  harmony. 

Historically  considered,  also,  the  subject  of  har 
mony  is  at  a  distinct  advantage  as  compared  with  the 
two  elements  already  discussed.  In  the  case  of  both 
rhythm  and  melody  historical  data  had  to  be  supple- 

119 


120  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

mented  by  biological  and  anthropological  inferences 
in  order  to  fill  out  the  account  of  their  genesis  and 
early  development.  So  far  back  do  they  extend  in 
the  evolution  of  man  that  neither  recorded  facts  nor 
tradition  tells  of  their  origin  or  of  the  time  when  they 
did  not  exist.  Even  in  the  case  of  the  Greeks,  to 
whom  we  turn  instinctively  almost  for  the  begin 
nings  of  articulate  philosophy  and  of  art  worthy  the 
name,  we  find  but  little  exact  knowledge,  and  only 
the  most  meagre  examples  of  music.  The  philoso 
phers  of  Greece  all  agree  in  according  it  a  high  place 
in  their  civilization,  but  it  is  with  music  as  with  paint 
ing — we  must  depend  more  upon  description  than 
upon  examples.  But  in  the  case  of  harmony  all  these 
deficiencies  are  fully  met,  so  that  all  the  value  that 
comes  from  a  genetic  envisagement  can  be  readily 
obtained.  Harmony  is  an  outgrowth  from  melody 
and  in  such  recent  years  that  we  have  recorded  a  very 
full,  a  very  accurate  account  of  how  it  arose,  devel 
oped  step  by  step,  changed  gradually  the  whole  char 
acter  of  music  and  became  finally  the  great  oppor 
tunity  and  glory  of  this  art,  the  one  undisputed  title 
of  the  modern  world  to  independent  art  creation. 
The  opportunities  for  a  genetic  examination  are  thus 
too  great  to  be  entirely  overlooked.  We  shall,  how 
ever,  only  sketch  the  development  in  the  briefest  out 
line,  limiting  ourselves  always  to  those  facts  which 
seem  to  have  the  most  direct  bearing  upon  the  psy 
chology  of  music. 

2 .  In  his  chapter  on  Incipient  Harmony,  from  which 
several  quotations  will  be  given,  Parry  says:  " It  is  as 
if  harmony — the  higher  intellectual  factor  in  music 
—began  with  the  first  glimmerings  of  modern  mental 
development,  and  grew  more  and  more  elaborate 


HARMONY  121 

and  comprehensive,  and  more  adapted  to  high  degrees 
of  expression  and  design,  simultaneously  with  the 
growth  of  men's  intellectual  powers."1  The  intellect 
ual  awakening  of  which  he  speaks  is  the  Renaissance, 
for  the  development  of  harmony  as  a  vital  factor  in 
music  in  its  essentials  is  comprehended  between  the 
eleventh  and  the  seventeenth  centuries. 

Probably,  as  Parry  says,  it  was  due  to  the  different 
register  of  men's  voices  that  the  need  was  first  felt 
for  having  melody  modified.  When  singing  together 
it  would  obviously  be  inconvenient,  if  not  at  times 
impossible,  for  both  bass  and  tenor  voices  to  sing 
always  the  same  note.  In  such  cases  the  first  de 
parture  would  be  to  sing  an  octave  apart,  though  such 
a  distance  would  often  be  inconveniently  wide.  The 
problem  then  would  be  to  find  some  other  interval  in 
the  scale  which  could  be  used  with  a  pleasing,  har 
monious  effect.  The  two  intervals  after  the  octave 
which  best  fulfilled  these  conditions  were  the  fifth  and 
the  fourth.  Parry's  account  of  this  stage  of  the  de 
velopment  is  so  well  stated  that  I  quote:  "It  also 
happens  that  the  human  mind  is  so  slow  to  develop 
any  understanding  of  the  effect  of  harmony,  that  men 
only  learned  to  endure  even  infinitesimally  dissonant 
chords  by  slow  degrees.  The  combination  in  which 
there  is  the  least  element  of  discordance  after  the  oc 


tave  is   the   fifth,    SsEEjEE :   and    after   that    the 


fourth,    3£—  And   these   two  were  the  first 

U~ 

which  men  learned  to  endure  with  equanimity.     It 
took  them  centuries  to  settle  down  to  the  comfort- 

1  Parry,  Evolution  of  the  Art  of  Music,  p.  84. 


122  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

able  acceptance  of  such  familiar  combinations  as 
thirds  and  sixths,  and  it  took  fully  a  thousand  years 
after  their  sense  of  harmony  had  begun  to  dawn  before 
they  could  accept  the  simplest  discords  without  some 
preliminary  devices  to  save  the  ear  from  being  too 
roughly  assailed  by  the  sudden  jar.  It  is  a  pregnant 
fact  that  the  process  has  gone  on  till  the  present  day, 
and  that  the  combinations  which  human  ears  accept 
without  preliminary  and  without  protest  have  been 
largely  added  to  in  the  present  century.  In  later 
times  the  progress  has  been  more  and  more  rapid, 
but  in  early  times  it  was  most  astonishingly  slow. 
Men  allowed  some  of  our  most  familiar  combinations 
as  notes  of  passage — purely  subordinate  details — and 
by  their  use  in  that  manner  they  became  accustomed 
to  the  sound  of  them;  but  they  were  very  long  in 
coming  to  the  state  of  musical  intelligence  which 
recognizes  even  a  third  as  a  stable  and  final  combina 
tion.  The  test  of  complete  satisfactoriness  for  any  in 
terval  is  the  possibility  of  leaving  off  upon  it  without 
giving  a  sense  of  artistic  incompleteness  and  a  desire 
in  the  mind  for  something  further.  In  modern  times 
no  chord  is  complete  at  the  end  of  a  composition 
which  does  not  contain  a  third;  but  the  mediaeval 
musicians  could  not  even  put  up  with  it  in  the  final 
chord  till  the  art  had  undergone  some  five  centuries 
of  development.  Its  relative  roughness  had  much 
the  same  effect  that  a  discord  has  to  modern  ears; 
and  so  whereas  in  modern  times  a  man  feels  that  he 
wants  something  more  when  he  is  without  it,  in  medi 
aeval  times  he  would  have  wanted  something  more 
because  he  had  got  it."1 

The  first  step  toward  harmony,  then,  was  taken  in 

1  Parry,  Evolution  of  the  A  rt  of  Music,  p.  87. 


HARMONY  123 

order  to  meet  the  exigencies  of  fundamental  vocal 
differences  among  individuals.  At  first  this  was  in 
troduced  by  having  the  same  melody  sung  a  fourth  or 
a  fifth  above  or  below  the  "  canto  fermo  "  as  the  basic 
melody  was  called.  This  was  merely  doubling  the 
melody  at  a  harmonious  interval,  not  harmony  in  the 
strict  sense  of  the  term. 

The  next  step  was  taken  when  instead  of  singing 
the  melody  at  a  fixed  interval  they  began  to  mix 
these  three  standard  intervals,  the  octave,  the  fourth 
and  fifth,  as  for  example  in  the  following:1 


II 


-TO-  —V ^ Z?- 

In  the  next  few  centuries  musicians  found  out  how 
to  introduce  ornamental  notes,  and  so  learned  to  like 
the  interval  of  the  third.  Thus  the  process  up  to 
this  point  was  essentially  a  long  course  in  ear  train 
ing,  a  process  which  we  are  told  has  continued  even 
to  the  present  time. 

This,  however,  was  not  all  of  it.     Another  step 

1  Parry,  Evolution  of  the  Art  of  Music,  p.  89. 


124  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

forward  was  taken  when,  instead  of  having  the  inter 
vals  determined  altogether  by  the  one  fundamental 
melody,  it  was  discovered  that  two  simple  melodies 
might  be  so  combined  that  the  result  was  not  only 
positively  pleasing,  but  something  of  an  intellectual 
feat  besides.  This  was  the  discovery  that  formed  the 
starting-point  which  led  primarily  to  the  rich  contra 
puntal  music  of  early  modern  times  and  later  to  the 
development  of  harmony  itself.  In  the  early  years  of 
its  employment  it  is  not  strange  to  find  that  it  ran  to 
an  illegitimate  use,  the  intellectual  interests  and  possi 
ble  complexities  proving  a  greater  attraction  than 
the  simple  pleasing  beauty  of  harmonious  chords. 
Metastasio,  an  Italian  poet  contemporary  with  Bach, 
and  one  of  the  most  intelligent  students  of  music  of 
his  times,  says  the  previous  generation  was  too  full 
of  figures  and  parts  and  contrivances  to  be  un 
derstood  or  appreciated  by  any  one  except  artists. 
They  had  followed  out  the  new  departure  of  com 
bining  separate  melodies  so  far  that  its  radicalism  had 
destroyed  its  artistic  value.  However,  it  served  a  use 
ful  purpose,  if  indirectly,  by  increasing  further  the 
number  of  combinations  musically  allowable  and 
cultivating  an  appreciation  for  the  contrasted  effect 
of  such  combinations. 

To  trace  out  in  detail  the  various  steps  by  which 
these  departures  from  simple  melody  developed  into 
the  fugal  architectonic  of  Bach  and  appreciation  of 
chords  for  their  own  sake,  would  be  to  cover  several 
centuries  of  diligent  application,  experimentation,  and 
gradually  growing  appreciation  of  musical  devices 
hitherto  condemned.  For  centuries  this  was  done  in 
the  interests  of  counterpoint,  not  of  harmony,  for  the 
polyphonous  effect  produced  by  combining  and  blend- 


HARMONY  125 

ing  two  or  more  melodies.  After  a  sufficient  train 
ing  of  this  kind  the  step  to  harmony  was  an  easy  and 
a  natural  one.  When  these  combinations  of  tones 
were  sought  for  their  own  sake  and  the  old  contra 
puntal  ideal  was  given  up,  then  modern  music  was 
born  and  only  awaited  the  coming  of  the  masters  of 
tone  building  to  rise  to  its  highest  glory. 

The  psychological  truth  that  evolves  from  this 
survey,  brief  as  it  is,  is  (i)  that  dissonance  is  to  the 
natural  unsophisticated  ear  displeasing,  and  (2)  that 
custom  and  training  have  a  very  large  part  in  deter 
mining  what  combination  of  tones  will  be  considered 
as  musically  valid  and  right.  Think,  for  example,  of 
the  centuries  it  took  for  man  to  learn  to  endure  the 
third,  and  the  part  it  plays  in  harmony  to-day !  But 
of  this  more  in  another  connection. 

3.  The  various  uses  the  composer  to-day  makes  of 
harmony  can  be  classified  as  follows:  first,  harmony 
for  its  simple  tone  or  sound  beauty;  second,  enrich 
ment  of  melody  in  various  ways;  third,  sound  pat 
terns  expressed  not  by  single  tones  in  melodic  succes 
sion,  but  by  a  series  of  chords;  fourth,  the  contrasted 
use  of  the  major  and  the  minor  modes.1 

4.  The   first   use   of   harmony  according    to    our 
classification,  the  beauty  of  simple  chords  considered 
as  mere  sound,  is  no  small  element  in  modern  music. 
This  is  the  element  which  together  with  the  struc 
tural  elements  of  melody  seem  so  all-important  to  the 
Formalists.  That  there  is  some  truth  in  their  conten 
tion  we  would  not  deny.     The  sensuous  element  in 
art  is  legitimate  and  important.     Hence,  instead  of 

1  This  last  applies  to  melody  as  well  as  to  harmony ;  but  as  this 
seemed  the  better  place  to  take  it  up  for  discussion,  it  was  omitted 
in  the  chapter  on  melody. 


126  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

trying  to  belittle  it,  it  is  better  to  attempt  to  under 
stand  it.  By  striking  on  the  piano  a  simple  triad,  as 
for  example  C  E  G,  a  new  musical  sound  is  produced 
different  in  quality  and  in  character  from  any  single 
tone  or  from  any  other  combination  of  tones.  It  is 
readily  explained  from  the  physical  standpoint  why 
it  is  different;  but  just  why  it  should  be  considered 
richer  in  character,  is  perhaps  not  so  patent.  The 
three  component  tones  are  such  that  the  air  waves 
producing  them  fall  into  simple  commensurate 
ratios  and  the  resulting  wave  has  the  regularity 
necessary  for  producing  the  smoothness  and  uniform 
ity  of  a  single  tone.  The  principle  can  be  graphically 
illustrated  and  is  readily  understood.  In  the  illustra 
tion,  let  A  B  represent  the  wave  of  a  given  tone,  and 
A  C  the  wave  representing  the  tone  an  octave  below ; 
when  they  are  played  together  the  waves  combine 
thus  losing  their  identity,  the  two  giving  instead  a 
wave  represented  by  the  dotted  line  AD.  In  this 


case  we  have  a  perfectly  regular  wave,  but  in  more 
complex  cases,  as  even  in  the  simple  triad  mentioned, 
the  regularity  will  be  apparent  only  in  periods  of  sev 
eral  wave  lengths  of  the  component  parts.  But  why 
the  resulting  sound  should  be  considered  richer  in 
quality  and  more  pleasing  to  the  ear,  does  not  appear 
in  such  an  explanation.  The  physical  explanation 
alone,  therefore,  is  inadequate. 

The  complementary  explanation  is  a  psychological 


HARMONY  127 

one,  resting  upon  the  principle  that  there  is  an  aesthe 
tic  pleasure  to  be  derived  from  a  harmonious  unity  of 
disparate  elements.  This  principle  is  as  wide  as  ex 
perience  itself  and  can  be  illustrated  readily :  if  I  am  in 
a  power-house  and  see  an  engine  running  smoothly, 
silently,  I  know  the  parts  are  all  well  adjusted  to  one 
another  and  are  all  working  together  well  for  the 
purpose  for  which  they  were  designed.  There  is  a 
pleasure  in  this  apparent  unity,  even  though  I  am 
ignorant  of  the  purpose  of  it  all.  But  if ,  on  the  other 
hand,  I  hear  a  throbbing  or  a  jarring  or  the  sound  of 
parts  in  friction,  I  am  conscious  of  a  vague  uneasi 
ness  at  this  evidence  of  mal -adjustment  or  lack  of 
proper  care.  What  is  true  in  this  particular  case  is 
true  of  all  experience.  Discord,  consonance,  har 
mony,  are  terms  which  apply  to  other  than  to  musi 
cal  phenomena,  and  in  all  cases  they  indicate  this 
same  unity  or  lack  of  it.  While  the  feeling  element 
may  be  particularly  poignant  in  the  case  of  musical 
sounds,  it  is  nevertheless  conditioned  by  a  much 
wider  field  of  experience.  But  whatever  the  explana 
tion,  the  fact  remains  that  certain  tones  when  com 
bined  produce  a  richer,  more  pleasing  effect  than  any 
single  component  tone  of  the  chord,  and  musicians 
seeing  this,  have  found  that  the  principle  is  capable  of 
great  development  and  great  power.  Just  as  the 
painter  finds  in  color  as  compared  with  black  and 
white  a  richer  medium  of  expression  for  old  ideas  and 
the  possibilities  of  much  new  beauty,  so  the  musician 
finds  in  harmony  a  richer  symbolism  for  old  musical 
thoughts,  a  means  of  increasing  the  sensuous  beauty 
of  his  art  and  the  possibility  for  the  development  and 
elaboration  of  ideas  entirely  new. 

5.  No  small  part  of  the  epoch-making  changes 


128  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

wrought  in  music  by  the  introduction  of  harmony  are 
included  under  the  second  head  of  our  classification, 
viz.,  enrichment  of  melody.  Especially  is  this  true 
in  the  earlier  periods  of  its  use;  when  the  value  of 
harmony  as  an  element  in  music  was  recognized,  it 
was  first  employed  to  enrich  the  common  melodies 
of  the  times,  hymns  and  secular  songs  as  well.  So 
highly  was  the  innovation  esteemed,  so  completely  did 
it  conquer  the  field,  that  to-day  pure  melodic  music 
instead  of  being,  as  then,  the  rule,  is  now  the  rare  ex 
ception. 

To  appreciate  how  preponderatingly  harmonic  is 
all  modern  music  we  need  but  to  enumerate  the 
various  kinds  of  music  and  to  consider  the  rela 
tive  importance  of  the  pure  melody  and  of  the  har 
monic  elements.  In  vocal  music,  whether  in  opera  or 
in  song,  there  is  almost  without  exception  a  harmonic 
accompaniment;  music  for  choral  singing  is  written 
in  "parts";  orchestral  music  is  so  dominantly  har 
monic  that  the  more  common  way  to  emphasize  a 
theme  is  to  give  it  added  stress  rather  than  to  intro 
duce  it  as  a  solo ;  and  even  the  best  solo  instruments, 
such  as  the  violin  or  the  'cello,  are  rarely  used  without 
accompaniment.  But  the  fact  is  so  evident  that  it 
needs  no  further  confirmation ;  it  will  be  worth  while, 
however,  to  inquire  a  little  more  particularly  into  the 
artistic  justification  for  the  current  practice. 

In  discussing  the  relation  of  harmony  to  melody 
Gurney  distinguishes  four  stages:  (i)  where  the  mel 
ody  is  able  to  stand  alone  without  harmonic  support ; 
(2)  where  the  melody  is  not  only  enriched  as  a  whole, 
but  where  the  harmony  is  needed  at  particular  points 
to  bring  out  its  point  and  character;  (3)  where  the 
melody  in  certain  places  needs  the  harmony  to  pre- 


HARMONY  129 

vent  it  from  seeming  incoherent  or  inane;  and  (4) 
where  the  chords  have  no  definite  relation  to  a  distinct 
melody,  but  themselves  present  a  definite  sound  pat 
tern.1  The  last  division  corresponds  to  division  three 
of  our  classification  given  above,  and  2  and  3  are  so 
closely  related  that  there  is  hardly  sufficient  warrant 
for  separate  treatment.  We  may,  therefore,  give  our 
remarks  under  the  two  heads :  melody  able  to  stand 
alone,  and  ha*rmony  used  for  the  enrichment  of  simple 
melody. 

As  has  been  said,  division  (i)  includes  but  a  very 
small  part  of  modern  music.  There  are  some  melo 
dies,  however,  generally  those  of  Folk-song,  which  do 
not  need  the  support  of  a  harmonic  accompaniment. 
These  are  the  simple  melodies  of  popular  favor,  such 
as  Annie  Laurie,  Old  Kentucky  Home,  Kathleen  Ma- 
vourneen,  and  their  like.  The  chief  virtue  of  such 
music  is  in  the  simple  melody  itself;  harmonization 
adds  but  little  to  their  beauty  and  nothing  to  their 
popular  favor.  Their  charm  is  in  their  simplicity, 
their  palpable  unity,  their  inevitable  progressions, 
their  perfect  cadences,  and  partly  doubtless  to  the 
universal  and  elemental  emotions  to  which  they  ap 
peal.  But  it  is  an  open  question  at  least  just  how  far 
they  should  be  considered  true  works  of  art.  The 
other  typical  example  is  found  when  some  melody  or 
theme  of  more  complex  compositions  stands  unsup 
ported  for  a  few  measures,  but  soon  graduates  into  the 
richer  sound  of  the  harmony  from  which  for  the  mo 
ment  it  had  freed  itself.  In  orchestral  music  this  may 
be  exemplified  by  brief  passages  in  which  the  melody 
or  theme  is  taken  by  some  one  instrument.  But  the 
age  of  pure  melodic  music  is  past,  as  evinced  by  the 
1  Power  of  Sound,  p.  250. 


130  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

fact  that  such  passages  are  used  mostly  for  the  sake 
of  contrast. 

Harmony  finds  one  of  its  legitimate  uses  in  an  en 
richment  of  melody,  as  a  support  running  along  in 
the  same  rhythmic  sequence.  So  intimately  related 
are  they,  melody  and  support,  that  except  for  pur 
poses  of  analysis  there  is  hardly  ground  for  distin 
guishing  between  them.  They  blend  in  the  listener's 
ear  and  are  one  in  the  composer's  thought.  As  very 
familiar  examples  of  music  of  this  class  mention  may 
be  made  of  compositions  essentially  melodic  in  char 
acter  and  yet  the  melody  dependent  for  its  point  and 
character  upon  its  harmonic  support ;  such,  for  exam 
ple,  are  the  Intermezzo  from  the  "  Cavalleria  Rusti- 
cana,"  Schubert's  Serenade,  Mendelssohn's  Spring 
Song,  and  the  like.  The  principality  of  these  com 
positions  is  in  the  melody,  for  it  is  upon  this  that 
the  mind  fastens  as  the  most  distinctive  feature. 
The  ordinary  listener  will  get  the  melody  fixed  in 
mind  long  before  he  has  any  idea  of  its  harmoniza 
tion.  Such  compositions,  because  the  principality 
lies  in  the  melody,  are  eminently  adapted  for  Obli- 
gato  with  solo  instruments.  And  yet  without  the 
harmonic  accompaniment  the  beauty  of  the  compo 
sition  is  sadly  lessened  if  not  lost;  the  melody,  im 
portant  and  beautiful  though  it  be,  is  not  able  to 
stand  alone,  but  requires  the  harmonic  elements  to 
reveal  its  beauty  and  to  enrich  it. 

6.  From  music  of  this  melodic  character  we  can 
pass  by  slow  gradations  to  music  in  which  it  is  diffi 
cult  to  detach  the  melody  from  the  whole  harmonic 
ensemble.  Here,  as  in  all  developing  forms,  it  is  im 
possible  to  give  an  exact  classification;  the  best  that 
can  be  done  is  to  call  attention  to  typical  examples 


HARMONY  131 

distinct  enough  to  make  the  differences  obvious. 
Thus  we  have  noted  music  in  which  the  principal 
charm  is  found  in  the  simple  melodic  form  itself ;  also 
music  in  which  the  melody  is  still  dominant,  but  the 
effect  is  heightened  and  the  beauty  of  the  melody  in 
creased  by  its  harmonic  accompaniment. 

In  the  next  class  the  melodic  factor  is  still  present, 
but  it  cannot  be  so  readily  detached,  as  it  were.  The 
total  musical  effect  is  now  more  distinctly  harmonic. 
Such,  for  example,  is  Handel's  Largo  from  "  Xerxes." 
The  melody  here  does  not  stand  out  with  quite  the 
distinctness  that  it  did  in  the  compositions  named 
above;  and  yet  the  melodic  element  is  present  and 
still  so  potent  that  it  is  not  incorrect  to  regard  this 
as  the  inner  core  of  thought. 

The  last  step  in  this  progression  leads  us  to  the  third 
head  of  our  classification— music  in  which  the  thought 
element  is  not  melodic,  but  in  which  sound  patterns 
are  conceived  and  expressed  by  a  series  of  chords. 
In  typical  examples  of  this  class  of  music  it  may 
be  impossible  to  dissociate  any  simple  melody.  The 
chords  must  remain  as  they  are  or  the  whole  value  of 
the  music  is  changed  or  lost.  The  reason  for  this  is 
clear  enough :  a  musical  thought  may  be  conceived  in 
terms" of  single  tones  in  rhythmic  succession;  this  is 
simple  melody,  and  the  units  of  thoughts  are  the  tones 
of  the  diatonic  scale.  But  a  thought  may  be  con 
ceived  also  in  terms  of  the  richer  units  of  chords  of 
varying  qualities.  In  the  latter  case  the  music 
would  plainly  be  unanalyzable  into  melody  and  har 
mony.  Thus  Beethoven  conceived  in  his  imagination 
the  motive  upon  which  the  Fifth  Symphony  is  based. 


132 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 


But  he  also  conceived  such  harmonic  passages  as 
this  from  the  Seventh  Symphony. 


Or,  as  another  example,  listen  to  the  following  chords 
at  the  beginning  of  the  Largo  from  Dvorak's  New 
World  Symphony. 


rfg:    §    rfg:  ^  pi    1      te 
«ip  -=rz=  / 


=E5^= 

— tk_Z 


-I -i 


And  so  we  might  instance  other  passages  well 
known  in  the  musical  world  as,  for  example,  the 
Funeral  March  in  Beethoven's  Sonata,  Opus  26; 
and  indeed  no  small  proportion  of  the  best  music  of 
the  great  composers.  In  such  music  the  component 
parts  are  not  single  tones  whose  primary  difference 


HARMONY  133 

is  one  of  pitch,  but  chords  whose  differences  are 
rather  of  quality.  A  definite  musical  thought  may 
be  thought  in  terms  of  pitch  and  the  scale,  or  it  may 
be  thought  in  terms  of  related  chords,  differing  in 
quality;  that  is,  in  key  and  mode. 

Which  is  the  higher  form  of  genius,  the  power  to 
compose  a  simple  melody  or  a  composition  of  this 
deeper  harmonic  character,  it  is  needless  to  say. 
The  minds  that  can  create  simple  melodies  and  har 
monize  them  are  almost  unlimited,  but  the  minds 
that  can  conceive  and  express  such  harmonic  ideas  as 
we  find,  for  example,  in  Beethoven's  Sonata,  Op.  26, 
are  but  few.  There  is  a  complexity,  a  subtlety,  a 
richness  in  music  of  this  character  that  makes  it 
the  ultimate  test  of  the  composer's  genius.  Just  as 
the  great  colorists  of  all  time  are  but  few,  so  the 
masters  of  the  richer  vehicle  of  musical  thought  are 
not  abundant. 

7.  Undoubtedly  the  most  subtle  effect  of  any  of  the 
harmonic  factors  in  music  is  the  psychological  effect 
of  the  major  and  minor  modes.  For  a  long  time  the 
striking  contrast  in  the  effect  of  these  two  modes  has 
been  a  standing  puzzle  for  psychologists  and  physi 
cists  and  musicians  philosophically  inclined ;  and  it  is 
a  problem  well  worthy  of  investigation,  for  its  solu 
tion  would  bring  not  only  the  satisfaction  of  an  an 
swer  to  this  particular  inquiry,  but  would  throw 
much  light  upon  the  psychological  problems  now 
most  puzzling  to  students  of  musical  aesthetics. 
But  before  we  start  on  our  quest  let  us  state  the 
problem  in  its  simplest  terms. 

If  I  strike  the  simple  triad  C  E  G,  and  follow  it 
with  the  minor  chord  C  Ek  G,  the  simple  change  in 
the  chord,  changing  the  E  to  Ej,  produces  a  profound 


134  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

effect  in  the  mental  response  to  the  sound  stimulus. 
The  psychological  effect  of  the  minor  chord  is  gener 
ally,  and  I  believe  rightly,  characterized  as  a  feeling- 
tone  of  sadness  or  yearning.  The  same  result  is 
attained  by  playing  the  minor  scale  in  which  the 
position  of  the  minor  seconds  is  changed  from  the 
third  and  fourth,  and  seventh  and  eighth  of  the  ma 
jor  scale,  to  the  second  and  third,  and  fifth  and  sixth. 
These  modifications  in  the  scale  and  in  the  chord  may 
represent  for  us  the  whole  problem  of  the  major  and 
the  minor  modes,  for  these  are  the  changes  at  the 
basis  of  the  whole  subject  of  these  two  modes.  The 
composer,  it  is  true,  will  find  various  ways  to  utilize 
the  minor  mode,  but  the  psychological  problem  in 
all  its  essentials  is  found  in  these  two  simple  changes. 

As  we  pause  to  reflect  upon  the  simplicity  of  the 
changes  introduced,  the  thing  that  first  impresses  itself 
upon  us  is  that  such  an  apparently  insignificant  modi 
fication  of  the  physical  stimulus  should  be  correlated 
with  such  a  profound  change  in  consciousness.  To 
change  the  E  to  Efe  makes  all  the  difference  between 
the  strong,  confident  mood  of  the  major  mode  and  a 
mood  tinged  through  and  through  with  sadness  and 
yearning.  Likewise  the  change  in  the  scale,  appar 
ently  a  matter  of  indifference,  would  not  and  could 
not  foreshadow  the  profound  psychological  effect 
which  it  produces.  Such,  stated  in  the  simplest  terms, 
are  the  facts  in  the  case.  The  philosophical  problem 
is  to  explain  why  such  simple  changes  in  the  stimulus 
should  result  in  the  fundamental  change  produced  in 
consciousness. 

Professor  Horatio  Parker  has  suggested  to  me  that 
there  are  probably  many  analogous  cases  in  nature 
where  a  seemingly  insignificant  change  in  the  cause 


HARMONY  135 

results  in  differences  of  a  monumental  character  in 
the  effect.  This  is  doubtless  true.  As  examples  of 
this  in  the  physical  world  we  may  instance  the  differ 
ent  members  of  chemical  series :  of  the  oxides  of  car 
bon,  for  example,  CO2  is  in  itself  harmless  to  animal 
life,  CO  a  poison ;  the  oxides  of  nitrogen  also  form  a  se 
ries,  each  with  a  powerful  and  characteristic  effect  of 
its  own.  Of  the  various  oxides  of  iron  but  one  is  mag 
netic.  HgCl  is  insoluble  and  non-poisonous,  HgCl2  is 
soluble  and  poisonous  in  the  extreme.  And  so  we 
might  continue  our  list  from  the  physical  world,  where 
the  presence  of  an  atom  more  or  less  in  the  mole 
cule  changes  the  salient  properties  of  the  substance. 
But  the  most  illuminating  examples  can  be  found 
not  in  the  realm  of  the  physical  world,  but  in  the 
mental.  Here  again  the  principle  is  true  and  of  im 
portance.  For  example,  on  the  stage  the  step  be 
tween  tragedy  and  farce  is  notoriously  a  narrow  one ; 
change  the  accent  but  to  the  slightest  degree,  and 
tragedy  is  turned  to  melodrama  or  farce.  In  hysteria, 
the  patient  may  alternate  between  periods  of  laugh 
ter  and  of  weeping.  The  good  will  of  a  whole  audi 
ence  is  gained  or  lost  by  a  simple  story  or  a  manner 
ism.  We  often  form  our  likes  and  dislikes  upon  some 
insignificant  fact,  and  years  are  needed  to  eradicate 
the  prejudice.  But  more  significant  than  all  of  these 
is  the  way  in  which  the  emotions  are  aroused  or  stim 
ulated;  a  word  or  an  accent  or  a  gesture  may  be  the 
cue  which  unlocks  the  memory  and  floods  the  mind 
with  emotions  of  a  wholly  different  tone  and  color. 
Psychology  has  pointed  out  instances  innumerable 
in  which  we  see  this  principle  active.  Our  associa 
tions  are  so  made  that  with  the  emotions  the  law  of  a 
logical  relation  is  neither  the  sole  nor  the  most  im- 


136  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

portant  one :  the  all-important  thing  here  is  to  touch 
the  proper  cue,  to  waken  the  proper  association,  and 
the  emotions  come  like  a  flood  over  consciousness. 
The  case  before  us,  therefore,  is  certainly  not  anoma 
lous. 

Helmholtz,  as  might  be  expected  from  the  charac 
ter  of  his  investigations  of  the  physical  nature  of 
sound,  attributes  the  sad  effect  of  minor  chords  to  the 
dissonance  introduced  by  the  changed  note.  The 
effect  of  the  E2,  to  retain  our  former  example,  is  not 
sufficient  to  destroy  the  effect  of  the  chord,  but  it  so 
veils  it  that  it  produces  a  feeling  of  mystery.  In  his 
own  words,  "The  foreign  element  thus  introduced  is 
not  sufficiently  distinct  to  destroy  the  harmony,  but 
it  is  enough  to  give  a  mysterious,  obscure  effect  to  the 
musical  character  and  meaning  of  these  chords,  an 
effect  for  which  the  hearer  is  unable  to  account,  be 
cause  the  weak  combinational  tones  on  which  it  de 
pends  are  concealed  by  other  louder  tones  and  are 
audible  only  to  a  practiced  ear."1  Gurney's  objec 
tion  to  this  explanation  seems  to  me  to  be  well 
taken.  The  effect  of  these  foreign  notes,  he  says,  is 
to  produce  a  slight  element  of  dissonance.  But  why 
the  dissonance,  even  though  it  typifies  obscurity, 
should  be  interpreted  as  a  feeling  of  sadness  is  not  at 
all  evident.  If  this  were  true,  a  dissonance  wherever 
found  should  always  be  so  interpreted.  Such,  how 
ever,  is  not  the  case. 

Dissonance  introduced  into  music  in  the  major 
mode  does  not  produce  this  characteristic  mental  re 
action.  This  being  true,  it  seems  hardly  reasonable  to 
say  that  the  melancholic  effect  of  minor  triads  is 
due  solely  to  the  dissonance  of  the  changed  tone. 

1  Quoted  from  Gurney,  Power  of  Sound,  p.  271. 


HARMONY  137 

Helmholtz's  explanation  is  valid  so  far  as  the  physi 
cal  stimulus  is  concerned,  but  it  fails  as  a  full  explana 
tion  of  the  mental  effect. 

Gurney  approaches  the  problem  of  the  major  and 
minor  modes  not  through  the  minor  triads,  but 
through  the  minor  scale.  He  introduces,  therefore, 
some  elements  not  recognized  in  the  theory  of  Helm- 
holtz.  His  own  words  will  best  present  his  thought : 
"If  we  ascend  the  scale  of  C  and  strike  E  natural,  its 
nearness  to  F  gives  the  motion  a  similar  tendency  to 
rise;  hence  the  E  seems  able  to  supply  the  strength 
for  the  rise,  to  have  got  far  enough  from  the  D  to  be 
sure  of  its  ground,  to  have  its  own  balance  and  the 
power  of  making  an  independent  spring  which  nat 
urally  gives  an  impression  of  confidence.  If,  on  the 
other  hand,  we  strike  E  flat,  the  sound  keeps  close  to 
the  D  and  seems  dependent  on  it  and  willing  to  sink 
back  to  it;  if  we  still  advance  to  the  F,  we  seem  to 
press  our  way  through  the  reluctant  E  flat,  not  to  be 
sped  onward  as  by  the  E  natural;  and  this  depend 
ence  and  reluctance  to  advance  give  an  impression  of 
diffidence,  a  character  which  at  any  rate  seems  more 
naturally  suggestive  of  pathos  than  uncertainty  and 
obscurity  were.  Similar  remarks  apply  to  the 
F  G  A  as  compared  to  F  G  A  flat  in  the  second 
half  of  the  scale:  the  A  natural  of  the  major  scale 
is  not  quitted,  it  is  true,  by  the  step  of  a  semitone,  but 
it  leads  on  securely  and  confidently  to  that  step  at  the 
final  stage;  while  the  reluctance  of  the  A  flat  to  ad 
vance  is  even  greater  than  that  of  the  E  flat,  inas 
much  as  the  instinct  to  use  the  B  natural  as  the 
seventh  degree  in  the  scale,  in  view  of  the  approach 
ing  key-note,  is  so  strong  that,  if  the  A  flat  is  used  as 
the  sixth  degree,  the  motion  has  to  make  the  long  and 


138  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

difficult  step  of  a  tone  and  a  half.  The  same  consid 
erations,  mutatis  mutandis,  apply  to  the  descending 
scale,  the  pathetic  character  in  the  minor  descent 
always  attaching  to  the  note  which  is  only  a  semitone 
from  its  lower  neighbor:  not,  of  course,  that  the 
pathos  lies  in  the  mere  fact  of  the  close  proximity 
(for  at  that  rate  C  B  and  F  E  in  the  descending  major 
scale  would  be  pathetic),  but  in  the  close  proximity 
occurring  in  the  two  cases  where  there  is  a  choice; 
where  the  confident  and  independent  A  or  E  might 
have  been  used  instead  of  the  diffident  A  flat  and  E 
flat."  * 

This  is  the  gist  of  his  argument  and  the  real  basis 
of  his  explanation.  Although  he  admits  that  there 
are  difficulties  in  so  doing,  he  holds  that  the  minor 
scales  are  the  fundamental  thing,  and  the  minor  tri 
ads  derive  their  effect  from  the  implied  running  of  the 
minor  scale  when  the  chord  is  sounded.  In  support 
of  this  he  says  that  with  him  at  least  the  pathetic 
effect  is  more  poignant  with  the  scale  than  with  the 
chord,  and,  second,  that  the  minor  triads  of  D  and  A 
are  very  commonly  used  with  the  harmonies  of  C 
major  and  yet  do  not  there  convey  this  pathetic  im 
pression.  If  the  feeling  of  dissonance  were  the  pri 
mary  cause,  this  effect  ought  to  be  at  hand  wherever 
the  cause  is  found.  Such,  however,  is  not  the  case. 

Whatever  we  may  think  of  Gurney's  own  explana 
tion,  he  has  demonstrated  certainly  the  inadequacy 
of  that  of  Helmholtz.  The  dissonance  of  the  minor 
chord,  it  is  true,  is  the  distinguishing  characteristic  of 
this  as  compared  with  the  major  triad ;  but  this  dis 
sonance,  as  Gurney  has  shown,  may  be  present  with 
out  the  effect  on  consciousness  ordinarily  attributed 

1  Power  of  Sound,  p.  273. 


HARMONY  139 

to  the  minor  mode.  Manifestly,  therefore,  there  is 
an  element  present  which  is  not  provided  for  in  this 
purely  physical  hypothesis. 

The  same  objection  will  hold  against  the  explana 
tion  which  Gurney  offers;  to  shift  the  cause  of  the 
emotional  effect  to  the  scale  does  not  fully  meet  the 
difficulty.  Consequently  Gurney 's  explanation  also 
is  but  a  partial  one,  as  he  himself  indeed  regarded  it. 
What  must  be  done,  it  seems  to  me,  is  to  turn  from 
the  nature  of  the  physical  stimulus — never,  however, 
forgetting  it — to  the  psychical  side,  to  look  there  for 
certain  principles  of  mental  interpretation.  The 
phenomenon  we  are  investigating  is  psychical,  and 
its  ultimate  explanation  can  be  found  only  as  we 
interpret  the  physical  fact  in  the  light  of  mental 
principles. 

Looked  at  from  the  psychological  point  of  view, 
the  problem  of  the  major  and  the  minor  modes  be 
comes  largely  a  question  of  how,  in  the  course  of 
musical  development,  the  characteristic  emotions 
have  become  associated  with  the  two  scales.  To  us 
now  the  connection  seems  almost  as  natural  and  as 
inevitable  as  pleasure  and  pain.  Whether  or  not 
there  is  such  a  nexus  can  be  determined  by  reference 
(i)  to  musical  history,  and  (2)  by  a  psychological  ex 
amination  of  the  relation  between  the  stimulus  and 
the  emotion,  as  shown  in  other  and  wider  relations. 

The  modes  in  ancient  Greek  music  were  one  of  its 
most  noticeable  characteristics,  and  as  modern  music 
is  a  lineal  descendant  from  the  music  of  this  people, 
we  look  there  for  light  upon  the  development  of  the 
two  modes  of  modern  music.  Parry's  account  is  lu 
cid  and  meets  our  needs.1  The  melodic  scale  of  the 

1  Cf.  Evolution  of  the  Art  of  Music,  Ch.  II. 


140  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

Greeks,  following  the  usual  cadential  inflection  of  the 
voice  in  speech,  developed  downward,  not  upward 
as  is  ordinarily  thought  to-day,  and  the  first  interval 
to  be  fixed  was  the  fourth,  counted  in  this  direction. 

That  is,  beginning  on  our  A,  the  fundamental  interval 

r-s^.       & —        — q 
would  be  to  E  FEz*—  d  with  a  third  note  a 

L I 

semitone  above  the  E  corresponding  to  our  F.  This 
was  the  tetrachord  of  Olympus.  Then  another  note 
was  inserted  between  the  F  and  A  which  would  give 

,^ 

us  the  Doric  tetrachord  FgziE 

the  nucleus  of  the  Greek  system  of  music.  The  next 
step  was  to  extend  this  system  by  adding  a  similar 
combination  of  notes,  with  one  semitone,  the  other 
whole  tones.  The  Doric  mode  consisted  of  two  tetra- 

chords  EFGABCDE,  with  the  semitones  coming 
between  the  first  and  second  and  between  the  fifth 
and  sixth.  The  Phrygian  mode  began  one  tone  lower ; 
that  is,  on  D,  and  stood  then  DEFGABCD  with 
the  semitones  between  the  second  and  third  and  the 
sixth  and  seventh.  The  Lydian  began  still  one  tone 
lower;  that  is  on  C,  and  stood  therefore  as  our  major 
mode,  with  the  semitones  between  the  third  and 
fourth  and  the  seventh  and  eighth. 

That  the  Greeks  attached  great  importance  to  the 
emotional  significance  of  these  modes  there  can  be 
no  question.  Both  Plato  and  Aristotle  in  well-known 
passages  leave  no  doubt  upon  this  score.1  But 
whether  it  was  to  the  difference  in  the  modes  as  such, 
that  is,  to  the  position  of  the  semitones  in  the  scale 
wholly,  or  partly  to  the  pitch,  it  is  difficult  to  say. 
We  know  that  they  attributed  great  significance  to 

1  Plato,  Republic,  Book  III;  Aristotle,  Politics,  Book  VIII. 


HARMONY  141 

pitch,  abjuring  both  the  high  and  the  very  low;  but 
doubtless,  pitch  was  only  one  factor,  for  the  Greeks 
were  far  too  sensitive  to  fine  distinctions  of  sense  to 
overlook  such  fundamental  differences  as  these.  Be 
sides,  the  difference  of  pitch  between  these  modes 
was  too  small  to  account  for  their  clearly  distin 
guished  emotional  effect.  It  is  far  more  reasonable 
to  suppose  that  it  was  the  mode,  that  is  the  differ 
ent  positions  of  the  minor  seconds,  that  formed  the 
ground  for  their  distinction  and  for  the  emotional 
effect  attributed  to  them. 

It  is  both  interesting  and  instructive  to  note  the 
emotional  value  ascribed  to  these  three  Greek  modes, 
for  herein  lies  a  striking  contrast  with  modern 
music.  The  Doric  mode,  with  the  minor  seconds  be 
tween  the  first  and  second  and  the  fifth  and  sixth, 
was  the  mode  that  taught  manliness  and  self-reliance ; 
the  Phrygian,  with  the  minor  seconds  between  the 
second  and  third  and  sixth  and  seventh,  the  mode  of 
temperance  and  reason.  Plato  thus  expresses  the 
value  of  these  two  modes:  "I  want  to  have  one 
(mode)  warlike,  which  will  sound  the  word  or  note 
which  a  brave  man  utters  in  the  hour  of  danger  and 
stern  resolve,  or  when  his  cause  is  failing,  and  he  is 
going  to  wounds  or  death  or  is  overtaken  by  some 
evil,  and  at  every  such  crisis  meets  fortune  with  calm 
ness  and  endurance ;  and  another  to  be  used  by  him 
in  times  of  peace  and  freedom  of  action,  when  there 
is  no  pressure  of  necessity,  and  he  is  seeking  to  per 
suade  God  by  prayer,  or  man  by  instruction  and 
advice."1 

These  two  modes  were  the  Doric  and  the  Phry- 

1  Quoted  from  Monroe's  Source  Book  on  Greek  and  Roman  Educa 
tion,  p.  1 60. 


142  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

gian.  The  Lydian  mode,  which  it  will  be  observed 
corresponds  to  our  modern  major  scale,  was  consid 
ered  soft,  voluptuous,  orgiastic. 

In  the  light  of  such  historical  data  as  these  it  is 
evident  that  the  interpretation  of  the  major  and  mi 
nor  modes  is  not  fixed  physiologically  or  biologically 
in  the  organism  like  physical  pain  and  pleasure,  but 
is  a  matter  of  mental  interpretation  fixed  by  custom 
and  habit.  Such  facts,  however,  do  tend  to  justify 
Gurney's  contention  that  the  minor  chords  are  sec 
ondary  in  importance  to  the  scale;  the  striking  emo 
tional  reaction  to  the  latter  antedated  the  existence 
and  use  of  the  former  by  almost  two  thousand  years. 

But  apparently  the  explanation  of  such  interpre 
tation  of  musical  elements  is  just  as  far  away  as  ever. 
The  Greeks  interpreted  one  mode  in  one  way,  we 
interpret  it  in  another.  The  question,  Why?  however, 
remains  unanswered.  There  remains  the  psychologi 
cal  data  relating  to  the  subject,  and  to  this  we  turn 
for  a  final  word. 

Emotions  of  a  full-hearted,  joyous  character  are 
physiologically  excitatory,  raising  the  general  tone  of 
the  system  and  producing  stronger  and  more  health 
ful  reactions.  The  truth  of  this  is  matter  both  of 
common  belief  and  of  scientific  knowledge.  We  have 
all  been  told  that  cheerfulness  influences  the  diges 
tion,  that  hope  is  invigorating,  and  that  good  news 
will  reanimate  a  wearied  body.  Psychological  ex 
periments,  also,  by  examining  the  quickness  and 
strength  of  various  muscular  reactions  and  by  testing 
the  sensitiveness  of  different  parts  of  the  body,  con 
firm  this  impression  of  popular  belief.  On  the  other 
hand,  emotions  of  an  opposite  character,  grief,  melan 
cholia,  sadness,  etc.,  reflect  themselves  no  less  un- 


HARMONY  143 

mistakably  in  bodily  reactions.  These  tend  to  pro 
duce  a  relaxation  of  the  muscles,  a  general  lowering 
of  the  tonicity  of  the  system,  and  affect  profoundly 
the  activity  of  the  various  glands  and  organs  of  the 
body. 

In  brief,  modern  psychology  is  continually  find 
ing  some  new  way  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  the 
bodily  organism  is  extremely  sensitive  to  all  shades  of 
emotion  and  is  constantly  expressing  such  aspects 
of  consciousness  through  proper  bodily  movements. 
Attention  is  called  to  this  relation  in  this  connection 
to  emphasize  the  fact  that  points  apparently  insig 
nificant  may  be  fraught  with  profound  import  when 
psychologically  interpreted.  Especially  is  this  true 
in  the  psychology  of  the  emotions,  which  in  their 
rise  and  in  their  development  do  not,  like  the  cogni 
tive  faculties,  depend  upon  strictly  logical  relations. 

Thus,  what  is  apparently  insignificant,  through  an 
inherited  or  a  habitual  connection,  may  flood  the 
mind  with  the  deepest  and  richest  emotions.  In 
itself  it  is  a  little  thing  that  at  times  the  voice  is 
keyed  up  to  a  higher  pitch,  that  the  words  come 
quickly  and  tend  to  group  themselves  both  in  thought 
and  feeling  in  climacteric  form;  in  itself  it  is  not  of 
any  great  importance  that  the  voice  is  unsteady, 
faltering,  subdued.  At  the  most,  objectively  consid 
ered,  these  are  but  differences  in  pitch,  ease  of  utter 
ance  and  quality.  In  the  one  case  the  voice,  we  say, 
is  firm  and  resonant,  in  the  other  faltering  where  it 
was  firm,  subdued  where  it  was  resonant  and  lower 
in  pitch.  It  is  only  as  these  facts  are  interpreted 
subjectively  that  their  real  significance  can  be  appre 
ciated.  Interpreted  in  this  way,  these  qualities  of 
the  voice  are  just  the  qualities  which,  through  ages 


144  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

of  development  and  fixation  of  meaning,  have  come 
to  be  the  most  direct  signs  of  the  emotional  life. 

This  firmness  of  tone  is  interpreted  as  evidence 
of  self-confidence,  self-direction,  a  perfect  mastery  of 
mind  and  body  and  of  all  the  passions  that  human 
nature  is  heir  to;  in  the  second  case,  some  emotion 
has  disturbed  this  mental  equipoise,  and  the  mental 
state  is  revealed  in  these  bodily  activities.  Thus 
qualities  of  sound,  differences  in  accent,  changes  in 
pitch,  in  intensity,  in  quality,  in  tempo,  and  even 
changes  from  the  customary  order  in  musical  pro 
gressions  and  chords,  have  come  to  signify  or  suggest 
definite  modification  in  consciousness.  Back  of  these 
sensuous  differences,  therefore,  and  yet  implied  in 
them,  are  the  mental  conditions  of  which  they  are  but 
symbols.  Looked  at  in  this  way — and  how  else 
should  symbols  be  regarded? — it  is  not  hard  to  un 
derstand  how  even  such  apparently  trivial  changes 
in  the  musical  scales,  as  those  which  give  the  distinc 
tion  between  the  major  and  the  minor  modes,  should 
have  come  to  signify  the  most  striking  differences  in 
the  emotional  consciousness. 

But  the  reader  is  probably  objecting  to  himself 
that,  notwithstanding  this  circuitous  approach,  we 
have  not  yet  touched  the  real  crux  of  the  problem. 
However,  we  have  not  intended  to  evade  the  issue, 
but  only  to  call  to  mind  those  principles  wThich  will  jus 
tify  us  in  our  more  specific  treatment.  We  are  ready 
now  to  face  the  problem  fairly,  and  to  see  if  anything 
has  been  gained.  Coming  back  to  our  original  state 
ment  of  the  question  we  ask  again:  Why  is  it  that 
changing  the  position  of  the  two  semitone  intervals, 
or  striking  the  minor  third  in  the  chord,  produces  in 
consciousness  a  feeling- tone  of  sadness  or  yearning? 


HARMONY  145 

The  ordinary  major  diatonic  scale  is,  both  by  cus 
tom  and  by  education,  the  standard  scale  of  modern 
music  in  the  western  world.  That  is  to  say,  it  serves 
objectively  as  the  standard  for  intervals  in  melody; 
but  more  important,  it  is  also  subjectively  the  stand 
ard  of  mental  reference,  the  form  in  which  creative 
musical  thought  is  involuntarily  conceived.  This 
thought  cannot  be  too  greatly  emphasized.  Just  as 
we  expect  a  sentence  to  contain  subject,  copula,  and 
predicate,  so  we  normally  expect  all  musical  progres 
sions  to  J3e  in  terms  of  this  scale.  Whatever  emo 
tional  significance  this  scale  may  possess,  arises  from 
the  fact  that  it  is  a  definite  and  fixed  form  of  thought, 
the  musical  alphabet,  if  you  please.  When  music 
conforms  plainly  to  this  recognized  standard,  there 
is  a  feeling  of  satisfaction  and  confidence,  when  it 
does  not,  a  feeling  of  interruption  of  the  normal  pro 
cess  and  uneasiness.  Here  as  in  other  fields  it  is  lack 
of  conformity,  contrast  to  the  rule,  that  most  excites 
the  mind.  But  in  all  cases,  conformity  to  a  standard  is 
the  secret  of  the  emotional  value  of  the  major  mode,  un 
conformity  the  secret  of  the  minor  mode.  Thus,  in  the 
minor  scale  reading  upward,  the  first  two  steps  are 
identical  with  the  first  two  steps  of  the  major  scale. 
This  gives  rise  to  an  expectancy  that  the  next  step 
will  also  be  a  full  tone,  but  instead  it  is  only  a  semi 
tone.  The  mind  being  disappointed  in  the  antici 
pated  result,  hesitancy  and  uncertainty  now  enter 
where  before  there  was  certainty  and  the  confidence 
of  custom.  The  fact  that  the  tone  is  lower,  not 
higher  than  was  expected,  is  also  a  delicate  sugges 
tion  of  what  the  resulting  emotion  will  be.  This 
disappointment  is  too  strong  to  be  healed  by  the 
natural  order  of  the  remaining  notes  of  the  scale. 


146  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

In  the  descending  minor  scale,  whether  of  the  har 
monic  or  the  melodic  form,  there  is  the  same  inter 
rupted  sequence,  and,  more  important  still,  the  force 
of  the  tonic  is  thus  destroyed ;  for  as  we  descend  the 
scale  and  approach  the  key-note,  the  mind  runs 
ahead  unconsciously  as  it  were,  and  looks  to  the  last 
few  notes  of  the  scale,  to  the  satisfying  tonic  as  a 
direct  approach  home.  But  here  the  order  is  changed, 
with  the  minor  interval  between  the  second  and  third, 
so  that  the  force  of  the  tonic  when  it  is  found  is  not 
recognized  or  felt.  Thus  the  effect  of  the  minor 
scale  is  to  destroy  effectually  the  normal  order  of  the 
major  scale,  and  to  introduce  suggestions  at  least,  of 
sadness,  by  the  tones  being  lower  than  in  the  stand 
ard  major  scale. 

In  the  scale  itself  it  is  not  merely  the  key-note,  the 
tonic  that  brings  satisfaction  to  consciousness,  but 
the  tonic  in  its  proper,  that  is  to  say,  its  major  rela 
tionship.  Not  merely  the  C,  for  example,  but  C 
found  after  the  sequence  C  B  A  G  F  E  D  completes 
the  scale.  This  is  further  evinced  by  the  similarity 
in  feeling  produced  by  a  minor  scale,  and  a  major 
scale  descending,  with  the  final  key-note  omitted. 
Gurney  says  that  when  in  music  we  are  longing  for 
unutterable  things,  in  reality  we  are  only  longing  for 
the  following  notes.  And  so  we  are  so  far  as  the  ob 
jective  stimulus  is  concerned.  So  here  in  the  minor 
scale,  when  we  feel  the  unrest  and  yearning  it  pro 
duces,  we  are  yearning  in  reality  for  the  more  natural 
order  of  the  major  mode.  So  far  as  the  objective  stim 
ulus  is  concerned  this  is  true,  but  at  its  best  it  is  only 
a  partial  truth.  The  explanation  is  not  complete,  full 
rounded  in  its  three  dimensions,  until  we  have  come 
to  understand  how  the  differences  in  the  sound  stimu- 


HARMONY  147 

lus  have  come  to  stand  for  vital  considerations  in  the 
life  history  of  the  individual  and  of  the  race,  and  how 
through  heredity  and  association  they  have  become 
endowed  with  their  present  emotional  correlate. 
This  is  just  the  point  at  which  previous  explanations 
have  been  defective.  They  have  considered  that  the 
whole  solution  is  to  be  found  in  the  objective  element 
alone. 

But  not  so  can  any  form  of  conscious  phenomena 
be  adequately  understood  or  explained.  We  offer  the 
above,  therefore,  not  to  supplant  other  physical  ex 
planations,  but  to  supplement  them.  The  major  and 
the  minor  modes  do  differ  objectively :  this  no  one  can 
deny.  But  these  differences,  instead  of  being  the  ab 
solute  ground  of  difference,  are  merely  suggestions  for 
the  mind  to  apprehend  and  interpret.  And  the  in 
terpretation  must  come  from  the  inner  experience  of 
the  individual,  either  as  it  has  been  transmitted  to 
him  through  heredity,  or  lived  consciously  and  stored 
up  through  memory  and  association. 

In  conclusion,  a  brief  summary  is  in  order.  Har 
mony,  as  our  historical  sketch  of  its  development 
plainly  showed,  was  not  born  like  Athena,  mature 
and  full  panoplied,  but  was  a  product  of  growth,  and 
came  to  itself  only  through  centuries  of  trial  and 
experiment  and  of  education  of  the  mind  to  appre 
ciate  it.  Beginning  in  the  old  polyphonic  music  as  a 
variation  of  melody,  in  the  course  of  some  centuries 
of  development  it  has  come  to  be  the  distinguishing 
characteristic  of  modern  music.  To-day  there  is  no 
music  worthy  the  name  of  art  that  does  not  draw 
largely  from  this  latest  factor  of  music.  And  yet, 
while  it  has  so  vastly  enriched  music  by  providing  a 
richer  medium  of  sensuous  presentation,  by  giving 


148  THE  PHILOSOPHY   OF   MUSIC 

point  and  character  and  even  new  beauty  to  melody, 
by  furnishing  the  composer  with  a  new  vehicle  of 
musical  thought  and  expression,  and  by  making  pos 
sible  the  current  use  of  orchestration  and  of  tone- 
color,  it  has  not  even  in  all  this  worked  a  psychological 
revolution  in  the  inherent  character  of  the  musical 
experience.  It  has  increased  the  effectiveness  of 
music  and  enriched  the  reaction  to  which  music  gives 
rise ;  but  in  the  essentials  music  is  music,  whether  in 
the  simpler  melodic  or  the  richer,  more  complex  har 
monic  form. 


CHAPTER  VII 

MUSICAL   EXPRESSION 

I.  It  requires  but  a  moment's  reflection  to  realize 
that  without  a  chapter  given  to  the  subject  of  Musi 
cal  Expression  our  psychological  analysis  would  be 
incomplete.  Expression  is,  as  it  were,  the  acme  of  the 
musician's  art,  and  through  it  alone  is  revealed  the 
subtle  beauty,  the  delicate  antitheses,  the  grace  and 
power  of  the  composer's  thought.  Rhythm,  melody 
and  harmony  are  the  three  fundamental  elements  of 
music,  but  these  without  expression  lose  their  charm 
and  highest  artistic  worth.  Expression  gives  to  a 
composition  individuality  and  life,  redeems  it  from 
a  mechanical  sequence  of  sounds,  and  makes  it  reflect 
the  most  delicate  nuances  of  the  emotions,  or  throb 
with  the  deepest  passion;  expression  is  the  life,  the 
fire  that  fills  the  inert  form  with  the  pathos,  the 
yearning,  the  sadness,  the  exultation,  the  hopes,  the 
joys,  the  all  but  infinite  longing  of  the  human  soul. 
The  supreme  test  of  the  musician's  genius  is  not  in 
his  technique,  wonderful  though  it  be,  but  in  his  power 
so  to  interpret  a  composition  and  to  render  it,  that  all 
its  wealth  of  ^thought  andfeeling_will  be  understood 
and  "appreciaFed  by~otHers  acquainted  with  musical 
symbolism.  Expression  is,  therefore,  the  final  touch 
that  reveals  the  hidden  beauty  of  the  composer's 
thought,  and  makes  the  elements  of  music  reveal  this 
beauty  to  the  listener. 

149 


150  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

If  expression  is  such  an  important  factor  in  music, 
its  analysis  ought  to  give  us  some  psychological  truth 
of  commensurate  value.  This  may  be  either  some 
new  truth  not  discovered  in  our  previous  analysis, 
or  some  truth  discovered  before  but  here  further 
emphasized.  Since  expression  is  the  final  touch  of 
genius  in  the  interpretation  of  music,  an  analysis  of 
this  subject  should  throw  in  the  strongest  light  just 
these  psychological  principles  for  which  our  whole 
analysis  has  been  made.  We  shall  expect  to  find, 
therefore,  in  this  chapter  (i)  further  suggestions  as 
to  the  motives  and  ends  for  which  music  really  ex 
ists  ;  and  (2)  added  light  as  to  the  essential  psycholog 
ical  character  of  music. 

The  first  question  to  arise  is,  whether  musical  ex 
pression  in  its  essentials  is  sui  generis,  or  whether  the 
principles  involved  are  common  to  the  other  forms 
of  art  as  well.  The  assumption  upon  which  this  book 
is  written  is,  that  in  their  psychological  character,  the 
aesthetic  principles  involved  are  common  to  all  the 
arts.  Thus  far  we  have  seen  no  reason  to  cast  doubt 
upon  this  assumption,  so  we  shall  regard  it  as  valid 
and  proceed  to  apply  it  to  the  matter  under  present 
discussion.  And  further,  since  genetically  the  prin 
ciples  of  expression  had  their  origin  in  articulate 
speech,  not  in  music,  we  shall  turn  from  music  to 
language  to  get  the  fundamental  principles  of  artistic 
expression. 

2.  By  expression  in  the  use  of  language,  as  for  ex 
ample  in  reading,  we  mean  the  power  of  the  reader  so 
to  interpret  for  us  the  words  or  symbols  of  the  author's 
choosing  that  we  may  enter  as  fully  as  possible  into 
both  their  thought  and  their  feeling  content.  There 
are  several  remarks  to  be  made  upon  this  definition. 


MUSICAL  EXPRESSION  151 

It  implies,  it  wil'  be  noticed,  that  the  words  of  the 
author  may  be  meagrely  or  fully,  clearly  or  obscurely, 
rightly  or  wrongly  interpreted.  So  various  are  the 
meanings  of  most  of  our  terms,  so  carelessly  do  we 
frequently  use  them  that  language,  our  most  exact 
'  means  of  communicating  thought,  has  been  called  a 
jneans  of  concealing,  not  of  revealing  our  ideas.  Al 
lowing  for  the  exaggeration,  there  is  still  a  modicum 
of  truth  in  the  witticism;  so  formal  does  our  use 
of  language  become  that  it  is  but  seldom  we  ever 
have  our  attention  directed  to  the  exact  or  to  the 
full  connotation  of  any  of  our  terms.  Expression  is 
the  method  by  which  some  part  of  their  original  and 
legitimate  content  is  emphasized  and  thus  brought 
more  clearly  to  mind.  Language  is  symbolic,  and  in 
language,  as  in  algebra,  we  use  these  symbols  more 
mechanically  than  with  a  conscious  realization  of 
their  import.  Sully,  in  his  Human  Mind,  in  the  dis 
cussion  of  the  relation  of  Thought  and  Language, 
calls  attention  to  "the  tendency  of  words  used  re 
peatedly  to  drop  their  ideational  suggestiveness  and 
to  serve  in  themselves  as  substitutes  for  ideas." 

In  written  language,  if  the  thought  is  not  clear,  we 
can  turn  back  at  will  and  examine  again  the  vague 
passages  until  we  have  satisfied  ourselves  that  we 
have  gained  the  author's  thought.  With  spoken  lan 
guage,  however,  the  case  is  different.  Here  the  con 
stant  and  rapid  flow  of  words  limits  the  return  to 
vague  or  to  vital  passages,  while  the  rapid  succession 
of  symbols  precludes  the  possibility  of  filling  out  the 
picture  which  the  words  only  schematize.  Hence, 
under  these  conditions,  other  means  than  the  bare 
enunciation  of  sounds  are  invoked  to  make  the  com 
munication  of  the  thought  more  exact,  and  expres- 


152  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

sion  becomes  a  matter  of  the  b  ghest  importance. 
By  means  of  the  proper  inflection  and  accentuation, 
by  changes  in  the  rate  of  utterance  and  in  force,  by 
means  of  tonal  differentiation  in  phrase  and  clause, 
the  mind  is  so  directed  to  the  pivotal  points  of  the  sen 
tences  that  the  thought  is  made  clearer,  and  the 
appropriate  emotional  response  is  readily  evoked. 
Thus  we  see  that  from  the  very  nature  of  language, 
because  it  is  an  artificial  system  of  symbols  by  means 
of  which  thoughts  are  to  be  communicated,  expres 
sion  assumes  a  place  of  the  deepest  significance.  The 
same  fact,  though  under  different  conditions,  is  true 
also  of  music. 

3.  Further,  our  definition  serves  to  call  attention 
to  the  twofold  purpose  of  expression.  As  it  was 
there  worded,  the  purpose  of  expression  is  (i)  to  com 
municate  to  the  hearer  as  fully  and  as  clearly  as  pos 
sible  the  intellectual  import  of  the  author's  words, 
the  thought  content,  and  (2)  to  impart  the  emo 
tional  state  which  accompanied,  or  enriched,  or  in 
spired  his  words.  The  truth  of  this  is  obvious  in  act 
ing  or  reading  or  in  oratory  or,  indeed,  in  all  uses  of 
spoken  language,  whether  the  purpose  be  to  convince 
by  logical  reason,  or  to  persuade  or  to  excite  or  to 
calm  the  hearer.  The  relative  importance  of  the  two 
purposes  will  vary,  however,  and  between  wide  ex 
tremes,  with  the  character  of  the  discourse. 

The  distinction  just  made  is  one  that  needs  all 
emphasis,  for  it  touches  the  heart  of  the  problem  of 
expression  in  art,  and  sheds  a  wonderful  illumina 
tion  upon  the  deeper  problem  of  the  true  purpose 
and  function  of  art.  Followed  out  carefully,  I  am 
convinced  that  it  would  help  to  clear  up  many  of 
the  obscurities  that  cluster  around  the  philosophy 


MUSICAL   EXPRESSION  153 

of  the  several  arts,  and  would  resolve  many  of  the 
generalities  with  which  discussions  of  this  subject 
are  often  burdened. 

The  relative  value  of  the  emotional  and  the  intel 
lectual  factors  in  expression,  it  has  been  said,  depends 
primarily  upon  the  character  of  the  work  of  art  to  be 
thus  interpreted.  In  the  one  case,  the  principal  ob 
ject  will  be  to  make  the  thought  content  clear  and 
vivid,  in  the  other,  to  make  the  listener  feel  the  emo 
tions  that  throbbed  warm  in  the  consciousness  of 
him  who  was  thus  moved  to  express  his  thought  in 
artistic  form.  There  are  some  to  whom  Browning 
with  his  richness  of  thought,  his  philosophic  attitude 
of  mind,  seems  the  true  poet;  others,  the  majority, 
perhaps,  prefer  Tennyson  with  his  finished  phrases; 
still  others  find  in  the  burning  thoughts  of  Shelley  or 
the  intense  fervor  of  Keats  the  highest  type  of  the 
poetic  art.  But  whatever  the  extreme  to  which  the 
poet  may  go,  whether  toward  intellectualism  or  toward 
emotionalism,  the  intellectual  element  is  never  solely 
present,  nor  ever  altogether  absent.  In  literature 
there  is  always  thought,  always  emotion,  and  to  in 
terpret  and  to  communicate  these  two  essential  ele 
ments  is  the  true  function  of  expression. 

The  same  twofold  purpose  of  expression  holds  true 
of  expression  in  music.  The  character  of  the  thought 
to  be  expressed  and  the  symbols  used  are  different, 
but  the  double  function  of  expression  remains  never 
theless.  As  has  been  shown  above,  the  formal,  archi 
tectonic  side  of  music  is  an  integral  part  of  its  reality, 
and  as  such  is  deserving  of  intelligent  recognition 
and  appreciation.  To  disregard  all  this  in  the  en 
thusiasm  for  a  more  impressive  and  emotional  ap 
prehension  of  music  is  not  only  to  neglect  an  impor- 


154  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

tant  element,  but  it  is  to  vitiate  the  pleasure  and  satis 
faction  which  the  composition  was  designed  to  give. 

But  to  be  enjoyed  these  intellectual  elements  must 
be  appreciated  at  their  true  worth,  and  to  be  appre 
ciated  they  must  be  understood,  and  to  help  to  a 
more  intelligent  understanding  of  the  architectonic  of 
a  composition  is  one  of  the  distinct  purposes  of  ex 
pression.  Thus  there  is  a  place  for  expression  in  the 
rendering  of  even  the  most  classical  forms  of  music. 

Our  previous  analysis  has  demonstrated  also  that 
there  is  in  the  musical  experience  a  strong  emotional 
element.  To  communicate  this  to  the  listener  in  its 
more  delicate  nuances  as  well  as  in  its  deeper  and 
more  intense  climaxes,  by  the  modification  of  the 
sound  stimulus,  is  also  part  of  the  interpretation  of 
the  composition.  To  do  this  is  the  second  purpose  for 
which  expression  is  demanded.  Thus  expression  in 
music  is  just  as  vital,  just  as  urgent  as  in  speech; 
and  furthermore  it  exists  for  exactly  the  same  reasons. 
Some  elucidation  of  the  means  of  musical  expression 
will  serve  to  justify  this  conclusion. 

4.  The  principal  elements  of  expression  utilized 
to  make  clear  the  logical  structure  of  the  composi 
tion  are  (i)  variations  in  force,  as  in  the  clear  enunci 
ation  of  a  melody  or  of  some  melodic  factor  or  har 
monic  pattern,  and  (2)  marking  off  distinctly  by  the 
proper  accent  the  unitary  measure  and  the  rhythmic 
phrase. 

Modification  of  force  or  intensity,  as  will  be  shown 
a  little  later,  is  a  powerful  means  of  giving  emotional 
expressiveness  to  a  composition,  but  it  is  also  a  means 
hardly  less  fundamental  in  making  the  structural  ele 
ments  of  music  readily  discernible.  Our  present  re 
marks  are  confined  to  this  latter  use.  Though  it  may 


MUSICAL  EXPRESSION  155 

be  utilized  in  several  ways,  the  principle  involved 
is  a  simple  one.  Increased  force  is  the  natural  way 
of  drawing  attention  to  a  particular  structural  ele 
ment  by  making  it  sensuously  more  impressive.  It 
is  a  fundamental  law  of  attention  that  a  strong  stimu 
lus  gains  the  focus  of  consciousness  and  thus  rises  in 
clearness  and  vividness.  Thus,  when  it  is  necessary 
that  a  structural  element  should  be  accentuated  more 
than  others,  the  simplest  method  of  thus  setting  it 
apart  is  to  lay  added  stress  upon  it.  For  example,  in 
melodic  compositions,  where  the  principality  lies  in 
the  melody,  it  is  necessary  that  the  mind  should 
fasten  upon  the  melody  and  differentiate  between 
this  and  the  harmonic  accompaniment.  So,  also, 
in  thematic  music  much  can  be  done  to  help  the  lis 
tener  to  a  more  intelligent  conception  and  apprecia 
tion  by  emphasizing  the  theme  and  its  variations  so 
that  it  and  they  can  be  more  readily  distinguished. 
In  orchestral  music,  where  the  conductor  has  such 
varied  timbre  effects  at  his  command,  much  can  be 
done  by  utilizing  these  effects;  but  the  need  for  ac 
centuation  through  added  stress  is  by  no  means  ob 
viated  even  here. 

Another  opportunity  to  make  the  logical  relations 
of  a  composition  clearer  by  this  same  device  is  found 
in  thus  pointing  out  harmonic  phrases  and  patterns 
as  well  as  melodic  elements.  In  brief,  wherever  there 
is  a  structural  element,  phrase,  motive,  theme  or 
melody  which  the  mind  should  grasp  clearly  in  its 
inner  relationships  and  in  its  relation  to  the  whole, 
one  of  the  most  obvious  ways  to  gain  this  end  is 
through  a  modification  of  the  force  with  which  such 
a  part  is  played. 

It  is  needless  to  add  that  modifications  of  force  for 


156  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

the  sake  of  emphasis  include  the  use  of  piano  and 
pianissimo  as  well  as  forte  and  fortissimo.  Through 
contrast,  both  in  speech  and  in  music,  the  former  is 
just  as  impressive  as  the  latter.1 

The  other  way  in  which  expression  by  modifica 
tions  of  force  assists  in  the  intellectual  appreciation 
of  a  musical  composition  is  found  in  connection  with 
rhythm.  A  musical  composition  in  its  rhythm  has  a 
background  of  mathematical  precision.  If  this  is  to 
mean  anything  more  than  an  opportunity  for  the 
reflex  response  to  accented  beat  of  the  measure,  it 
must  be  made  so  by  so  marking  out  the  larger  rhyth 
mic  structure  that  it  will  be  readily  and  consciously 
perceived.  Lussy,  in  his  work  on  Musical  Expression, 
classifies  the  principles  of  musical  expression  under 
three  heads:  (i)  the  metrical  accent,  which  appeals  to 
the  instinct ;  (2)  the  rhythmical  accent,  appealing  to  the 
intellect ;  and  (3)  the  expressive  accent,  making  its  ap 
peal  to  the  emotions.  And  he  is  right  so  far  as  he 
makes  the  accent  of  the  measure  instinctive,  though 
it  also  appeals  to  the  emotions,  and  in  making  the 
"rhythmical  accent "  of  intellectual  significance.  The 
"metrical  accent,"  also,  as  he  calls  it,  is  not  altogether 
without  intellectual  significance,  as  has  been  amply 

1  The  universal  tendency  of  students,  both  in  oral  and  in  musical 
expression,  is  to  overlook  such  distinctions  and  merge  all  into  an 
undifferentiated  body  of  sound.  Witness  the  monotonous  drawl  or 
the  sing-song  style  of  the  boy  or  girl  learning  to  read,  or  the  equally 
noticeable  uniformity  of  those  beginning  the  study  of  music.  Play 
ing  without  expression  is  altogether  analogous  both  in  cause  and 
effect  to  the  monotonous  reading  of  the  child;  there  is  a  failure  in 
each  case  to  grasp  the  thought  relations,  to  see  the  force  of  any 
part,  and  consequently  an  utter  absence  of  power  to  make  those 
relations  evident  to  others.  A  thorough  understanding  and  ap 
preciation  of  the  composition,  therefore,  is  the  first  step  toward 
expression. 


MUSICAL   EXPRESSION  157 

shown  above.  But  the  more  important  accent, 
from  the  intellectual  point  of  view,  is  the  rhythmical, 
as  he  calls  it,  the  accentuation  of  the  phrase  and  the 
larger  rhythmic  patterns.  In  the  first  part  of  the 
chapter  upon  this  subject  he  thus  expresses  the  pur 
pose  of  rhythmical  accentuation :  "  A  performer  must 
be  able  to  distinguish  the  rhythmical  phrases,  so  as 
to  feel  the  initial  and  the  final  notes  of  each,  and 
bring  them  into  relief.  Bad  phrasing  is  like  bad  punc 
tuation  and  bad  accentuation  in  reading,  and  it  is  as 
important  in  music  to  phrase  and  to  accentuate  ac 
cording  to  the  natural  tendency  of  the  notes  and 
the  laws  of  attraction  by  which  they  are  grouped  and 
by  which  they  gain  their  meaning,  as  it  is  to  give  to 
each  word,  sentence,  or  part  of  sentence,  its  due  form." 
That  these  relations  are  purely  musical,  not  con 
ceptual  as  in  language,  to  the  uninitiated,  makes 
them  seem  more  abstract,  more  intangible.  But 
they  exist,  nevertheless,  and  are  part  of  the  very 
essence  of  music.  To  understand  this  structural  or 
ganization  of  a  composition,  therefore,  must  remain 
one  of  the  true  ends  of  the  musical  experience,  and 
for  this  reason,  one  of  the  purposes  of  musical  expres 
sion.  Art  in  its  highest  works  is  no  formless,  im 
pressionistic  affair,  the  whole  purpose  being  to 
affect  the  emotions  or  to  deceive  the  intellect,  but  it 
is  true  to  the  principles  of  the  intellectual ,  as  well  as 
of  the  emotional  life.  Thus,  it  is  evident,  there  is 
truth  in  the  words  quoted  above,  and  rhythmical 
phrasing  and  rhythmical  accentuation,  made  appar 
ent  through  expression,  are  to  music  what  punctu 
ation  and  accentuation  are  to  language — a  means  of 
giving  a  clearer  intellectual  comprehension  of  the 
logical  or  thought  content  of  the  composition. 


158  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

5.  But  when  the  term  "expression"  as  applied  to 
music  is  used,  it  is  to  the  emotional  rather  than  to 
the  intellectual  aspect  of  the  subject  that  popular 
thought  refers.  To  play  "with  expression"  is  to 
render  the  composition  so  that  the  emotional  con 
sciousness  is  stimulated  in  the  most  effective  way. 
There 'is  a  certain  justification  for  thus  giving  pre 
cedence  to  the  emotional  element,  though  no  excuse, 
certainly,  for  ignoring  the  intellectual  element.  The 
real  function  of  art  is  not  to  instruct,  not  to  develop 
intellectual  acumen  or  breadth  of  view,  but  to  give 
play  to  the  emotions  in  the  plane  of  the  ideal  and  the 
beautiful.  Hence  even  the  intellectual  elements  in 
music  exist  for  the  sake  of  the  aesthetic  emotions  they 
produce. 

It  is  in  the  province  of  these  emotional  elements 
in  music  also  where  it  is  too  commonly  thought  that 
principles  and  laws  do  not  obtain.  Art,  it  is  said,  is 
above  all  law,  and  the  emotions,  like  the  winds,  come 
and  go,  but  their  causes  are  never  seen.  This  view, 
however,  is  most  certainly  erroneous.  It  is  true  that 
the  psychology  of  the  emotions  is  still  but  imper 
fectly  understood,  but  to  contend  that  the  emotional 
consciousness  is  without  its  own  laws  and  princi 
ples  is  to  contradict  the  postulates  upon  which  all 
psychology  is  based.  If  this  be  true,  there  are 
principles  of  emotional  as  well  as  of  intellectual 
expression. 

As  the  most  common  and  efficient  means  of  thus 
increasing  the  emotional  effect  of  music,  we  shall  call 
attention  to  three  devices  at  the  command  of  the 
musician:  (i)  modifications  of  force,  (2)  modifications 
of  tempo,  and  (3)  peculiarities  in  the  sound  stimulus 
produced  by  what  is  known  genetically  as  "touch." 


MUSICAL  EXPRESSION  159 

The  simplicity  of  these  three  elements  of  expression 
is  perhaps  their  most  noteworthy  characteristic. 
Although  the  emotional  effects  produced  are  subtle 
in  the  extreme,  the  means  by  which  such  effects  are 
produced  are  of  surprising  simplicity.  Herein  lies 
the  mystery  of  the  emotional  life. 

The  three  factors  given  are  by  no  means  peculiar 
to  music,  but  are  strictly  analogous  to  modifications 
of  the  voice  in  speech,  whereby  the  speaker  is  enabled 
to  stir  up  the  emotions  of  his  hearers,  now  arousing 
them,  as  did  Antony,  to  the  heights  of  passion,  now 
calming  them  to  the  most  serious  contemplation  of 
the  issues  of  life  and  death.  In  this  way  he  gains  a 
power  over  his  audience  which  his  logic  alone  could 
never  give.  It  is  upon  these  same  sense  qualities,  too, 
that  the  demagogue  relies  for  his  influence  with  the 
masses,  and  by  factors  of  like  nature  that  the  mob 
spirit  spreads  like  contagion.  Though  they  are  all 
when  analyzed  nothing  more  than  sensuous  quali 
ties  of  sound,  this  does  not  lessen  their  effect  or  de 
stroy  their  power. 

One  need  not  listen  long  to  an  effective  speaker  to 
find  these  three  points  many  times  illustrated.  Now 
his  words,  if  the  discourse  is  descriptive,  run  evenly 
with  the  inflection  directed  more  to  a  clear  expression 
of  the  thought  than  to  move  his  hearers  to  strong 
emotional  reactions ;  but  when  occasion  for  the  latter 
comes,  all  his  energy  is  thrown  in  the  utterance  of  a 
few  words,  or  with  masterly  skill  he  so  modifies  his 
voice  in  speed  and  strength  that  his  listeners  follow 
involuntarily  all  the  movements  of  his  emotional  con 
sciousness.  Through  it  all,  the  burst  of  sudden  power, 
the  continued  monotone,  the  lowered  voice  in  phrase 
or  sentence,  the  mere  intensity  of  the  sound  is  the 


160  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

barometer  that  registers  accurately  his  own  emo 
tional  states. 

Just  as  readily  can  the  observer  note  constant  vari 
ations  in  the  rate  of  utterance  if  the  speaker  be  at  all 
susceptible  to  the  finer  possibilities  of  language.  At 
one  time,  stimulated  by  some  strong,  exciting  emo 
tion,  the  words  may  fairly  pour  from  his  lips,  at  an 
other,  when  thought  is  deadened  by  some  depressing 
emotion,  the  machinery  of  speech  works  slowly ;  and 
this  by  the  observer  is  properly  interpreted  as  sym 
bolic  of  his  emotional  life. 

Corresponding  to  the  last  division  of  the  elements  of 
emotional  expression,  touch,  the  speaker  has  charac 
teristic  ways  of  enunciating  his  words,  thus  giving 
them  a  direct,  impressive,  emotional  value.  Now 
his  voice  may  be  firm  and  steady,  resonant  with 
strength,  or  tremulous,  or  deliberative.  Such  quali 
tative  distinctions  also  have  emotional  significance. 

If  this  be  true,  and  the  principles  of  emotional  ex 
pression  in  music  are  found  also  in  articulate  speech, 
it  follows  that  musical  expression  is  not  some  mys 
terious,  inexplicable  quality  of  personality,  but 
merely  a  particular  application  of  laws  as  old  and  as 
universal  as  language  itself.  To  possess  the  rare 
gift  of  making  use  of  them  is  musical  genius,  but  to 
understand  their  application  is  nothing  more  than  a 
little  psychological  knowledge  of  one  particular  as 
pect  of  art. 

The  application  of  this  truth  to  music,  as  has  just 
been  said,  is  easy,  though  to  put  it  into  practice  is 
the  severest  test  of  the  musician's  genius  and  skill. 
Take  first,  modification  of  force.  Plainly,  as  the  con 
dition  for  making  proper  artistic  use  of  this  element 
of  expression,  there  must  be  deep,  true  feeling  on  the 


MUSICAL  EXPRESSION  161 

part  of  him  who  is  interpreting  the  composition. 
But  the  power  to  feel  deeply — not  merely  intensely— 
is  one  of  the  surest  attributes  of  maturity,  Nature's 
compensation  for  the  joys  of  childhood  forever  lost, 
the  best  insurance  against  ennui,  the  supreme  test  of 
the  artistic  temperament.  Technically  it  is  called 
"musical  feeling."  In  songs,  in  oratorio,  in  opera, 
where  the  words  are  a  guide  to  the  sentiment,  expres 
sion  is,  or  should  be,  to  the  thoughtful  person  compar 
atively  easy.  But  in  instrumental  music,  where  there 
is  no  such  infallible  clue  to  the  feeling  content,  its  cor 
rect  interpretation  becomes  a  matter  of  far  greater 
difficulty.  Here,  only  unusual  musical  genius  or  the 
most  finished  education-,  or  both,  will  enable  one  to 
compass  the  full  emotional  possibilities  of  a  master  ~ 
piece.  To  give  expression  to  this  feeling  much  can 
be  gained  through  appropriate  modifications  in  force. 
So  closely  have  differences  in  the  quality  and  inten 
sity  of  the  voice  become  associated  with  emotional 
expression  that  even  such  differences  in  musical 
sound  are  instinctively  thus  interpreted. 

From  a  natural,  instinctive  basis  for  emotional  re 
actions  to  intensive  differences  in  sound  stimuli,  the 
musician  by  a  long  process  of  training  and  educa 
tion  develops  a  refined  susceptibility  for  such  modi 
fications  until  this  becomes  one  of  the  most  direct, 
most  powerful  excitants  of  the  emotional  conscious 
ness. 

Modifications  in  its  time  rate,  also,  being  one  of 
the  attributes  of  the  emotional  consciousness  which 
normally  finds  expression  in  bodily  reaction,  the 
various  emotions  have  come  to  be  symbolized  in  this 
physical  expression.  The  stream  of  consciousness  is 
one  of  the  most  variable  streams  in  the  world,  and 


1 62  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

one  of  its  marked  characteristics  is  its  ever-changing 
rate  of  flow;  now  it  is  hurrying  on  with  all  speed  to 
some  emotional  climax,  now  it  moves  leisurely  with 
no  distinct  end  in  view,  and  now  laboriously,  and  all 
but  stops  because  of  the  obstacles  that  impede  its 
chosen  path  of  progress.  All  these  mental  changes 
are  faithfully  reflected  in  the  organism.  Now  since 
this  ever-changing  rate  of  movement  is  one  of  the 
fundamental  attributes  of  consciousness,  those  fac 
tors  which  signify  it — and  speech  and  musical  sound 
are  included  under  this  head — will  have  a  strong 
effect  upon  the  mind.  Thus  the  tempo  with  which  a 
composition  is  rendered  will  exert  a  strong  impres 
sive,  suggestive  emotional  influence  over  conscious 
ness.  The  unchanging  rhythm  of  a  popular  waltz  or 
a  quickstep  of  metronomic  accuracy  is  monotonous, 
and  hence  tends  to  deaden,  not  to  stimulate,  that 
delicate  play  of  the  emotions  essential  to  a  genuine 
artistic  experience.  The  natural  play  of  the  emo 
tional  consciousness  is  not  so  uniform  as  this.  Now 
the  current  is  slow,  now  fast,  now  leisurely,  now  aim 
less,  now  shallow,  with  ripples  of  laughter  and  joy, 
now  deep  and  quiet.  All  this  can  be  typified  in 
musical  sound,  suggested  in  the  tempo.  To  use  this 
factor  artistically,  so  that  the  emotions  will  be  ap 
pealed  to  naturally  and  strongly,  is  a  part  of  good 
expression. 

By  touch  the  musician  understands  the  style  of 
striking  the  keys  of  a  musical  instrument  so  that  dif 
ferent  qualities  of  sound  are  produced.  Staccato  and 
Legato  are  the  two  principal  styles,  though  so  far  as 
the  effect  is  concerned,  Tremolo  and  all  such  related 
and  contrasted  effects'should  be  included.  Staccato 
passages  usually  produce  the  light  and  airy  effect  of 


MUSICAL  EXPRESSION  163 

a  minuet,  for  example,  while  the  legato  is  used  to 
indicate  depth  and  intensity  of  feeling. 

By  means  of  these  comparatively  simple  modifi 
cations  of  musical  sound,  the  musician  is  able  to 
make  music  an  art  of  wonderful  beauty  and  power, 
and  to  play  over  the  whole  gamut  of  man's  emotional 
consciousness  with  the  directness  and  effectiveness 
for  which  music  is  justly  esteemed  remarkable.  Just 
why  musical  symbolism  exerts  such  power  over  con 
sciousness  will  be  inquired  into  in  the  next  chapter. 

In  conclusion,  we  pause  only  to  reaffirm  what  was 
premised  in  the  beginning  of  the  chapter.  Musical 
expression  rightly  understood  has  a  twofold  purpose, 
viz.,  to  illumine  the  intellectual  element  in  music  by 
enabling  the  listener  to  see  the  structural  relation 
ships  more  clearly,  and  to  accentuate  the  emotional 
element,  especially  in  its  higher  and  more  refined 
nuances.  Thus  the  chapter  further  justifies  the 
conclusion  toward  which  the  whole  analysis  has  been 
leading,  viz.,  that  music  is  both  intellectual  and  emo 
tional  in  its  content,  and  that  it  is  true  to  the  princi 
ples  of  art  in  general. 


PART    III 
THE    PHILOSOPHY   OF    MUSIC 


CHAPTER  VIII 

THE     UNIVERSALITY,     THE     VERSATILITY     AND     THE 
POWER     OF    MUSIC 

I.  Thus  far  music  has  been  subjected  to  a  psy 
chological  analysis  in  order  to  determine  the  charac 
ter  of  its  various  elements  and  the  nature  of  the  psy 
chological  reaction  to  which  these  elements  give  rise. 
All  of  this  is  a  necessary  prolegomenon  to  the  con 
clusions  to  be  formulated  in  the  remaining  chapters. 
But  with  the  chapter  on  Musical  Expression  this 
analysis  is  completed,  and  the  trend  of  the  discussion 
at  this  point  becomes  more  strictly  philosophical. 

At  the  very  beginning  of  the  discussion  attention 
was  called  to  three  general  attributes  that  belong  to 
music  considered  as  a  form  of  art,  viz.,  its  universal 
ity,  its  versatility,  and  its  power.  The  subject  is  worth 
pursuing  a  little  farther.  Besides  the  interest  inher 
ent  in  the  question  of  the  causes  for  these  attributes 
belonging  to  music  in  so  marked  a  degree,  the  prob 
lem  thus  raised  gives  an  excellent  opportunity  to 
test  pragmatically  the  validity  of  the  analysis  we 
have  just  completed.  Why,  then,  is  music  the  most 
popular  of  the  arts?  Why  does  it  have  such  versa 
tility?  And  how  shall  we  explain  its  power? 

The  principal  reason  for  the  universal  appeal  music 
in  some  form  makes  to  mankind  lies  in  the  fact  that 
rhythm,  always  an  indispensable  element  in  music, 

167 


1 68  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

has  an  organic  or  instinctive  basis.  Among  those 
who  have  ears  to  hear  and  minds  trained  to  perceive 
the  true  beauty  of  music  as  an  art,  nothing  more  than 
its  own  inherent  worth  as  a  form  of  art  is  needed  to 
give  it  favor.  But  music  is  different  from  the  other 
arts  in  having  as  its  basis  a  factor  which  can  be 
traced  far  beyond  the  limits  of  the  proper  realm  of 
art.  Man's  nervous  system  is  so  constituted  that  it 
attunes  itself  automatically,  as  it  were,  to  a  rhythmic 
stimulus  and  with  a  pleasurable  concomitant  strong 
enough  to  insure  a  decided  preference  for  such  form 
of  stimulation.  The  mental  response  to  music  with 
a  pronounced  rhythm  is,  therefore,  for  the  most  part 
merely  a  passive  and  reflex  response  to  a  stimulus 
which,  in  the  course  of  time,  has  acquired  a  direct  and 
a  powerful  influence  over  consciousness.  Response 
to  such  music,  therefore,  is  both  easy  and  pleasur 
able,  qualities  which  in  any  connection  will  win  a 
large  and  a  demonstrative,  if  not  a  very  discrimina 
ting  audience.  Thus  music  even  in  its  more  primi 
tive,  pre-artistic  forms  is  peculiarly  fitted  to  win  pop 
ular  favor.  The  instinctive  elements  upon  which 
other  arts  are  based,  with  the  possible  exception  of 
poetry,  which  like  music  is  based  upon  rhythm,  are 
not  so  fundamental  in  the  organism,  nor  so  strong  in 
their  appeal  to  the  undeveloped  mind. 

In  connection  with  this  fact  it  should  be  remem 
bered,  as  was  brought  out  in  the  chapter  on  Rhythm, 
that  the  mental  response  given  to  rhythm  even  in 
these  more  primitive  forms  is  emotional,  and  that 
emotional  activity  is  normally  the  most  attractive, 
the  most  seductive  form  of  all  mental  activity.  Voli 
tional  and  intellectual  activity,  since  they  require 
attention,  are  both,  as  such,  fatiguing,  and  are  usually 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,   POWER     169 

engaged  in  for  the  sake  of  some  ulterior  end;  but 
emotional  activity  is  an  end  in  itself  and  so  draws 
stronger  upon  primitive  instincts  than  the  two  other 
forms  of  mental  processes.  The  emotional  factors  in 
music,  in  the  course  of  man's  progress  toward  his 
present  intellectual  stature,  have  been  discovered, 
utilized  and  appreciated,  so  that  music,  in  the  broader 
use  of  the  term,  can  claim  for  its  adherents  now  and 
in  the  past  thousands  who  could  have  no  conception 
of  the  nature  of  music  as  a  true  form  of  art.  Thus 
there  is  a  palpable  ambiguity  in  the  use  of  the  term, 
and  music  as  a  true  form  of  art  probably  benefits  in 
its  reputation  by  the  vagueness  in  which  the  term 
is  used. 

But  even  in  the  narrower  connotation  of  the  term, 
music  has  an  advantage  over  the  other  arts  in  the 
strength  of  the  instincts  upon  which  it  rests.  The 
instinctive  reaction  to  rhythm,  we  have  seen,  is  not 
lost  even  in  the  highest  forms  of  music. 

However,  music  is  not  all  instinctive ;  in  the  highest 
forms  of  music  in  which  thought  elements  and  opportu 
nities  for  refined  emotional  reactions  are  found,  the 
charm  is  not  in  the  rhythm,  though  conditioned  by  it, 
but  in  the  aesthetic  value  of  form  and  content  intelli 
gently  apprehended.  If  music  did  not  thus  develop 
with  the  developing  mind,  it  would  have  been  out 
grown  and  cast  aside  as  worthless,  except  as  an  effec 
tive  means  of  bodily  and  emotional  stimulation.  But 
music  has  developed  and  become  a  true  art,  and  as 
such  pleases  thousands  who  have  passed  far  beyond 
the  love  of  stirring  rhythm  for  its  own  sake.  Thus, 
the  instinctive  nature  of  rhythm,  the  emotional  reac 
tion  to  which  it  gives  rise,  and  the  fact  that  as  a 
true  form  of  art  it  retains  the  force  of  these  primitive 


170  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

instincts,  all  combine  to  make  music  one  of  the  most 
universal  forms  of  the  arts. 

One  further  point  must  be  touched  upon,  though 
it  will  be  discussed  more  in  detail  in  connection  with 
the  power  of  music.  I  refer  to  the  fact  that  music  is 
the  art  of  sound,  and  sound,  being  the  most  common 
and~efFectIve  way  of  communicating  both  thought 
and  feeling,  the  race  has  been  well  trained  in  suscep 
tibility  to  tonal  distinctions. 

2.  By  the  versatility  of  music  we  mean  the  unique 
power  which  this  art  possesses  to  stimulate  in  the 
human  mind,  emotions  of  the  most  varied  character 
both  in  their  mental  coloring  and  in  the  bodily  ^e- 
actions  to  which  they  give  rise.  As  was  pointed  out 
in  the  first  chapter,  music  can  arouse  enthusiasm, 
stifle  bodily  fatigue,  instill  courage  and  endurance, 
animate  the  mind  with  gayety,  or  calm  it  when  ex 
cited  to  religious  meditation  and  worship.  Whether 
the  emotion  be  of  joy  or  grief,  of  excitement  or  re 
pose,  of  comedy  or  tragedy,  music  can  deepen  the 
note  of  sadness  or  heighten  the  touch  of  joy,  add 
fervor  to  religious  worship,  or  excite  to  deeds  of  reck 
lessness.  For  a  discussion  of  the  deeper  phases  of 
music  this  fact  calls  for  some  explanation.  A  com 
parison  of  music  with  the  other  arts  in  this  respect 
will  serve  to  suggest  the  truth  we  seek. 

The  emotions  that  architecture  and  architectural 
elements  engender  are  relatively  pure  and  of  a  very 
decided  intellectual  character.  As  the  relationships 
are  all  structural  and  formal,  the  appeal  is  primarily 
to  the  intellect  and  the  emotions  are  thus  aroused. 
There  is  little  or  no  appeal  to  instincts  connected 
intimately  with  the  direct  well-being  of  the  individ 
ual  or  with  the  more  dynamic  emotions.  Painting 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,   POWER     171 

and  sculpture  also,  while  they  can  picture  scenes  of 
tragic  import,  or  the  heroic,  or  even  scenes  of  hu 
morous  nature,  confine  their  influence  largely  to 
the  more  formal  aesthetic  emotions,  which  in  char 
acter  are  contemplative  and  therefore  largely  pas 
sive.  The  purely  sensuous  factor  even  of  color 
does  not  play  such  a  very  important  part  as  an 
emotional  excitant.  There  are  but  few  of  the  hu 
man  race  whom  color  excites  as  it  does  the  tradi 
tional  bull. 

Music  has  all  the  purely  formal  beauty  of  these 
arts,  stimulating  the  mind  as  do  they  to  the  intellec 
tual  aesthetic  emotions;  but  it  gives  rise  besides  to 
emotions  that  are  powerfully  exciting  and  directly 
and  dramatically  impressive.  In  its  emotional  sig 
nificance,  therefore,  music  stands  in  striking  con 
trast  to  these  arts. 

Literature  is  the  one  art  besides  music  that  has  the 
power  to  any  large  degree  to  engender  these  more 
dynamic  emotions  as  well  as  to  charm  by  the  more 
quiet  and  contemplative  aesthetic  sentiments.  Be 
sides  the  pure  impartial  feelings  due  to  the  artistic 
beauty  of  a  masterpiece  of  literature,  a  work  of  art 
in  this  field  may  fire  the  heart  with  zeal,  excite  it 
to  brave  deeds  or  self-denial,  awaken  the  strongest 
feeling  of  sympathy  and  partisanship,  fill  the  heart 
with  longing,  or  bring  the  reflective  attitude  of  re 
ligious  worship  and  prayer.  Literature  and  music 
therefore  must  be  classed  together  in  their  power  to 
play  widely  upon  the  emotional  consciousness,  and  to 
engender  other  emotions  than  the  purely  aesthetic 
ones  arising  from  elements  of  formal  beauty  there 
expressed.  They  both  have  the  power  to  control  the 
emotional  consciousness  in  its  broader  and  more  dy- 


172  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

namic  aspects  as  well  as  in  the  restricted  realm  of 
pure  art  feeling. 

But  notwithstanding  the  close  similarity  in  the 
emotional  results  obtained  in  the  two  cases,  the 
means  by  which  this  effect  is  produced  stand  in  strik 
ing  contrast.  Literature,  being  the  art  of  articulate 
speech,  is  definite  and  exact  in  its  representation  of 
scene,  or  act,  or  thought.  It  is  the  art  of  conceptual 
thought,  and  is  able  to  portray  in  the  fullest  manner 
and  with  all  the  accuracy  of  language,  the  conception 
which  forms  the  subject  of  the  production.  Its 
power  over  the  emotions  lies  in  the  facility  and  ac 
curacy  with  which  it  represents  scenes  and  actions 
and  thoughts  that  simulate  actual  life.  Just  as  actual 
experiences  of  life  are  productive  of  sorrow,  or  joy,  or 
yearning,  or  exultation,  etc.,  so  the  feigned  experi 
ence  which  literature  portrays  engenders  a  rich 
and  varied  emotional  reaction.  By  recounting  the 
glory  in  the  life  of  the  hero,  or  the  ignominy  of  the 
coward,  it  can  inspire  man  to  noble  deeds;  by  pictur 
ing  for  us  the  tragedies  of  life,  it  can  oppress  our  hearts 
with  sadness;  by  interesting  us  in  the  fortunes  of 
characters  whose  lot  is  cast  under  sunnier  skies  than 
our  own,  it  can  lighten  our  cares;  by  the  proper  in 
terpretation  of  life,  it  can  bring  both  a  philosophic 
calm  and  a  divine  content ;  or  it  can  turn  our  hearts 
to  prayer  and  worship  by  showing  the  presence  and 
love  of  God  in  the  world.  But  the  time  would  fail  us 
to  enumerate  all  the  emotions  that  literature  can 
stimulate  and  raise  to  a  motive  tension.  But  in  all 
these  cases  the  method  by  which  it  acts  upon  the 
emotions  is  the  same,  viz.,  by  picturing  for  us  in  the 
definite  medium  of  language  some  concrete  repre 
sentation  that  simulates  the  conditions  of  life  as  they 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,  POWER     173 

actually  are  or  as  they  might  be.  Here  the  emo 
tional  responses  depend  directly  upon  the  fulness 
and  the  vividness  of  the  portrayal. 

Music,  on  the  other  hand,  as  an  emotional  excitant 
stands  in  striking  contrast  to  literature;  while  it  is 
not  less  versatile  nor  less  powerful  in  its  emotional 
effectiveness,  it  is  justly  considered  as  the  most  vague 
and  indefinite  of  the  arts.  It  cannot  express  in  its 
symbolism  even  the  most  general  outlines  of  the 
scenes  and  actions  and  thoughts  which  literature 
pictures  with  such  fulness  and  clearness.  It  has  not 
less  power  over  the  emotions,  but  its  method  of 
stimulating  them  is  radically  different  from  the 
method  of  literature.  The  secret  of  the  versatile  power 
of  music  over  the  emotions  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  sym 
bolism  of  music  conforms  so  closely  to  the  dynamics  of 
the  emotional  consciousness.  Although  this  is  not  a 
recent  discovery,  it  has  not  for  all  that  been -devel 
oped  or  emphasized  as  its  importance  deserves. 
Aristotle,  with  his  keen  insight  into  the  secrets  of  the 
inner  life,  adumbrated  this  thought  when  he  con 
tended  that  music  of  all  the  arts  most  closely  imi 
tated  the  inner  activity  of  the  soul.  And  Hanslick, 
whose  whole  discussion  is  against  the  emotional  in 
terpretation  of  music,  in  answer  to  the  question, 
"What  element  of  the  emotions  does  music  express?" 
replied  promptly  and  correctly,  "  Nur  das  dynamische 
derselben."  The  difficulty  with  him  is  that  he  does 
not  appreciate  the  significance  of  his  concession.  He 
passes  it  by  as  having  but  little  import,  when  in 
truth  this  is  the  very  strongest  factor  emotionally 
that  could  possibly  have  been  named.  In  granting 
that  music  does  give  the  dynamic  of  the  emotions,  he 

1  Vom  Musikalisch-Schonen,  p.  32. 


174  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

has  granted  that  there  must  be  some  very  intimate 
relation  between  music  and  the  emotions.  But  just 
what  this  relation  is,  and  why  it  means  so  much,  is 
yet  to  be  stated. 

The  musical  elements  which  in  their  mere  sound 
attributes  reflect  the  dynamic  qualities  of  the  emo 
tions,  are  the  same  elements  that  we  have  had  occa 
sion  to  mention  in  other  connections,  viz.,  modifica 
tion  of  Force  and  Tempo,  Movement,  Rhythm,  the 
effect  of  the  Major  and  the  Minor  modes,  as  well  as 
the  climacteric  character  of  melodic  and  harmonic 
progressions.  By  means  of  these  the  musician  is  able 
to  give  in  the  bare  sense  attributes  of  music  a  very 
accurate  representation  of  the  dynamic  qualities  of 
the  various  emotions.  If  the  emotion  is  excitatory, 
consciousness  moves  with  increased  speed  and  a 
higher  tension;  this  is  duplicated  in  musical  symbol 
ism  by  a  quick  tempo  and  greater  stress  in  playing. 
If  the  emotion  is  one  of  yearning,  it  is  characterized 
by  a  serious  mental  tone,  relative  slowness  of  the 
stream  of  consciousness  and  by  a  feeling  of  obstruc 
tion  and  hindrance ;  these  can  be  duplicated  in  music 
by  a  sedate  rhythm,  a  slow  tempo,  a  legato  touch,  and 
by  the  use  of  the  minor  mode  with  its  altered  and 
obstructed  harmonies.  If  the  feeling  tone  is  cheer 
ful,  the  mental  processes  are  all  healthful  and  strong, 
and  confidence  is  a  ruling  characteristic  of  the  state 
of  mind:  music  can  express  just  such  qualities  in 
sound  by  an  allegro  movement,  and  by  a  firm,  con 
fident  touch  in  expressing  the  sound  pattern,  what 
ever  it  may  be.  Thus  we  might  continue,  and  just 
as  far  as  we  could  give  the  dynamic  characteristics 
of  the  emotions,  so  far  could  they  be  duplicated  by 
means  of  some  of  these  dynamic  qualities  of  music. 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,   POWER     175 

The  secret  of  the  emotional  value  of  literature 
lies  in  its  power  of  accurate  representation  of  those 
conditions  which  in  real  life  would  bring  such  an 
emotional  reaction.  In  music  the  same  power  is 
gained  by  duplicating  in  musical  sound  the  dynamic 
qualities  of  the  various  emotions.  The  illuminating 
word  therefore  in  the  one  case  is  representation,  in 
the  other  suggestion.  In  music  the  dynamic  ele 
ments  of  the  sound,  the  tempo,  the  force,  the  pro 
gressions,  the  rhythm,  suggest  the  mood  in  which 
such  attributes  predominate,  and  from  these  mere 
forms  of  sensuous  stimulus  the  proper  emotion  arises 
and  spreads  itself  over  consciousness.  Usually  the 
suggestion  is  not  confined  to  any  one  of  these  factors, 
but  several  act  together  and  with  cumulative  effect, 
so  that  there  is  in  the  mere  sound  symbolism  a  com 
pelling  power  to  insure  emotions  of  the  proper  tone, 
though  no  imagery  be  present  to  mold  the  thought. 
Thus,  while  we  must  perforce  admit  that  music  is  too 
vague  and  indefinite  in  its  symbolism  to  picture 
forms  or  scenes  so  as  to  control  the  emotional  re 
sponse  as  literature  does,  this  does  not  mean  that  the 
emotional  interpretation  of  music  is  without  founda 
tion.  There  is  no  art  that  has  a  stronger  influence 
over  the  emotions  than  music,  nor  that  manifests 
this  power  in  more  varied  ways.  And  this  is  due  in 
the  main  to  the  similarity  between  the  dynamic 
elements  of  musical  symbolism  and  the  dynamic  ele 
ments  of  the  emotions  which  music  arouses  and 
stimulates. 

3.  Music,  in  the  third  place,  is  also  remarkable  for 
the  power  it  exerts  over  the  human  mind.  This 
power  shows  itself  in  two  distinct  ways:  First  music 
is  sensuously  more  clamant,  more  impressive,  more 


J 


176  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

insistent  than  any  other  art.  The  medium  of  the  art, 
the  objective  stimulus,  sound  has  for  some  reason 
greater  force,  engrossing  the  attention  more  urgently 
and  completely  than  the  like  stimulus  of  any  other  art. 

Again,  the  power  of  music  is  revealed  in  the  emo 
tions  music  arouses.  No  other  art,  with  the  possible 
exception  of  literature  as  exemplified  in  the  novel 
and  the  drama,  takes  hold  of  the  emotional  con 
sciousness  with  such  compelling  force.  In  its  influ 
ence  over  the  emotions  music  has  direct,  dramatic 
power.  As  a  pure  form  of  art,  that  is,  in  its  structural, 
formal  qualities,  and  in  the  exemplification  of  the 
higher  aesthetic  attributes,  music  does  not  differ  es 
sentially  from  the  other  arts.  Such  qualities  wher 
ever  found  produce  a  deep,  contemplative,  almost 
passive  reaction.  But  in  its  impressive,  dramatic 
qualities  music  is  unique  and  demands,  therefore, 
some  explanation  for  its  power. 

There  are  three  points  to  be  mentioned  as  throw 
ing  light  upon  the  power  of  music.  _First,  the  bio 
logical  significance  of  sound,  the  medium  in  which 
music  is  expressed;  second,  the  organic  character  of 
rhythm,  always  an  indispensable  element  in  music; 
and  third,  the  dynamic  character  of  the  elements  of 
musical  symbolism. 

As  an  art,  music  gains  greatly  in  impressiveness 
and  in  power  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  it  has  for  its 
medium  of  expression  that  sense  stimulus  which 
both  psychologists  and  biologists  are  telling  us  is 
most  intimately  connected  with  the  emotional  life. 
An  Italian  psychologist  only  recently,  seeking  for  an 
explanation  of  the  close  relation  between  sound 
stimuli  and  the  emotions,  has  advanced  the  theory 
that  the  fibres  of  the  auditory  and  the  pneumogas- 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,   POWER     177 

trie  nerves  are  closely  interlaced;  thus  the  stimula 
tion  of  the  auditory  nerve  affects  also  the  vital  organs 
controlled  by  the  latter  nerve,  and  this  in  turn  affects 
the  emotional  consciousness.  It  is  true  that  this 
hypothesis  has  not  been  verified,  but  the  fact  it  was 
meant  to  explain  is  too  obvious  to  be  questioned. 

More  illuminating  is  the  explanation  of  biologists. 
They,  too,  impressed  with  the  fact  that  sound  seems 
most  intimately  connected  with  the  emotions,  have 
not  ceased  to  remind  us,  from  the  time  of  Darwin  and 
Spencer,  that  sound  is  the  most  natural,  the  most 
common  and  the  most  effective  way  of  expressing 
and  communicating  the  emotions,  not  only  for  man, 
but  for  the  lower  animals  as  well.  Having  become 
fixed  as  the  habitual  method  of  emotional  expression, 
sound  is  sensuously  the  most  exciting  form  of  sense 
stimulus  used  in  art.  Spencer's  theory  of  music,  it 
will  be  remembered,  was  that  music  is  but  a  develop 
ment  from  the  emotional  outcries  of  our  primitive 
ancestors.  Here  again  we  leave  theorists  in  peace  to 
work  out  and  to  justify  their  hypotheses;  but  the 
point  we  are  interested  to  make  is  even  here  further 
justified.  They  give  an  impartial,  unbiased  judg 
ment  and  withal  a  truth  that  goes  far  to  explain  the 
attributes  of  music  we  are  discussing. 

Common  experience  also  confirms  our  point;  the 
moans  of  a  sufferer  excite  our  sympathy  and  pity  as 
a  sight  of  his  emaciated  form  will  not ;  animals,  habit 
ually  silent,  in  extremities  of  suffering  or  terror  give 
utterance  to  cries  of  the  most  expressive  anguish; 
the  importance  of  inflection  and  accent  by  the  actor 
or  the  reader  in  producing  the  emotional  response 
from  the  listener  also  calls  attention  to  the  expres 
siveness  of  sound  as  mere  sound.  Thus,  through  the 


1 78  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

long  development  of  the  ages  sound  qualities  have  be 
come  indissolubly  associated  with  emotional  states  and 
have  come  to  be  the  most  exciting,  the  most  power 
ful  sense  stimulus  in  producing  emotional  reactions. 

This  natural  impressiveness  of  sound,  instilled 
and  fixed  in  us  by  ages  of  development  in  which 
issues  of  life  and  death  were  involved,  is  carried 
over  from  the  realm  of  man's  normal  experience 
with  the  world  to  the  realm  of  music,  and  there  func 
tions  with  its  pristine  significance  unimpaired  and 
not  greatly  altered.  Here  it  manifests  itself  by  giv 
ing  to  the  mere  sound  qualities  of  music  harmonic 
factors  such  as  harmony,  discord,  dissonance,  and  the 
effect  of  the  major  and  minor  modes,  timbre,  and 
modifications  of  tempo  and  force  an  influence  over  the 
emotions  that  is  almost  hypnotic  in  its  directness  and 
power.  The  secret  of  this  influence,  then,  to  state  it 
in  other  terms,  lies  in  the  inherited  tendency  to  rely 
chiefly  upon  sound  attributes  in  interpreting  the 
emotional  content  of  the  mental  experience  of  others. 
Through  heredity  this  tendency  has  become  fixed, 
until  it  is  both  natural  and  inevitable  to  regard  modi 
fication  of  sound  as  the  most  direct  and  unmistakable 
evidence  of  the  feeling  tone  of  others. 

We  have  already  had  occasion  to  call  attention  to 
the  organic  character  of  rhythm  and  to  state  in  what 
sense  this  expression  is  to  be  understood.  So  far  as 
can  now  be  seen,  it  is  due  to  the  metabolism,  purely 
physiological  changes,  of  the  nerve  cells.  The  accu 
mulation  of  energy  there  is  approximately  uniform, 
while  the  nervous  discharge  is  essentially  explosive, 
a  certain  potential  being  required  to  overcome  the 
internal  resistance  of  the  nerve  fibres.  Under  such 
conditions  the  discharge  must  necessarily  be  periodic 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,  POWER     179 

or  rhythmical.  If  this  be  the  true  explanation  of 
rhythm,  it  follows  that  rhythm  considered  from  the 
mental  side  is  an  instinctive  mode  of  reaction.  This 
means  much  when  translated  into  terms  of  impellant 
force.  In  proportion  as  an  act  is  instinctive,  that  is, 
structurally  and  functionally  provided  for  in  the  econ 
omy  of  the  organism,  the  driving  force,  the  vis  a  tergo, 
to  be  effective  must  be  the  stronger.  The  leading 
force  of  consciousness  is  in  such  cases  inoperative, 
the  power  all-impellant.  By  means  of  discipline  and 
education  and  by  taking  advantage  of  instincts  of 
later  development,  man  can  place  rational  motives, 
high  moral  ideals,  over  primitive  instincts,  but  with 
out  such  training  and  years  of  external  inhibition, 
instincts  by  their  native  strength  would  determine 
the  actions  of  man  as  well  as  of  the  lower  animals. 
The  impulse  to  play  in  the  child  is  naturally  stronger 
than  the  impulse  to  work;  the  desire  for  wealth,  the 
acquisitive  instinct,  even  in  spite  of  years  of  training, 
is  sometimes  stronger  than  the  cultivated  habit  of 
social  regard.  Education  is  easy  both  for  teacher 
and  pupil  just  so  far  as  educational  practice  can  base 
itself  upon  these  motor  proclivities,  and  a  ceaseless 
struggle  so  far  as  some  must  be  opposed.  When  we 
say  therefore  that  rhythm  is  organic,  wTe  say  it  is  in 
stinctive  and  ascribe  to  it  all  the  clamant  strength 
that  belongs  to  these  inherited  predispositions  to 
certain  forms  of  motor  reactions.  It  may  be  blind  and 
unreflective  and  without  any  consciousness  of  its 
true  function,  but  it  is  clamant,  intense  and  strong. 
Our  third  point,  the  dynamic  character  of  the  ele 
ments  of  musical  symbolism,  has  been  touched  upon 
in  explaining  the  versatility  of  music;  but  it  is  not  less 
effective  as  one  of  the  sources  of  the  power  which  is 


i8o  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

also  characteristic  of  music.  As  the  principle  has 
been  stated,  it  affirms  that  music  gains  greatly  in 
power  by  virtue  of  the  fact  that  the  elements  of  its 
symbolism  are  inherently  dynamic.  Thus  there  are, 
even  in  the  sense  stimulus  itself,  the  strongest  sug 
gestions  of  force  and  movement,  and  these  through 
heredity  have  became  the  natural  excitants  of  the 
emotions.  If  we  pause  for  a  moment  to  enumerate 
what  have  been  called  the  sensuous  or  impressive 
elements  of  music,  it  will  be  readily  seen  how  strong 
in  them  all  is  this  dynamic  factor.  Rhythm  is  sur 
charged  with  movement  and  energy  and  is,  indeed, 
meaningless  without  them.  Both  the  movement  of 
the  rhythmic  sequence,  and  the  accent  by  which 
rhythm  is  marked,  are  due  in  the  last  analysis  to  the 
expenditure  of  energy.  And  this  is  evident,  not 
merely  in  the  broader  psychological  interpretation, 
but  even  in  the  sense  stimulus  itself.  Modifications 
of  tempo  and  force  are  inseparable  from  movement 
and  change,  both  dynamic  factors. 

And  even  timbre  and  harmony  are  so  intimately 
connected  with  the  progression  of  melody  that  they 
too  give  the  impression  of  being  charged  with  the 
same  dynamic  power.  Music,  therefore,  we  see,  Js 
inseparable  from  movement.  Gurney  calls  melody 
"Ideal  Motion."  The  deep  psychological  signifi 
cance  of  this  fact  will  be  better  appreciated  if  we 
compare  music  in  this  respect  with  the  other  arts. 

The  purpose  of  the  painter,  for  example,  is  to 
choose  some  critical  moment  in  the  experience  of  his 
characters,  or  some  scene,  and  to  crystallize  this 
moment  for  us  in  such  a  way  that  the  sense  qualities 
will  be  pleasing  and  the  thought  content  expressive 
of  some  phase  of  life.  But  he  is  limited  by  the  con- 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,  POWER     181 

ditions  of  his  art  to  the  representation  of  a  single  mo 
ment.  In  all  the  forms  of  his  art,  in  landscape,  in 
portraiture,  in  genre  painting,  this  condition  is  abso 
lute.  There  is,  therefore,  a  total  absence  of  any  real 
dynamic  element  in  the  sense  stimulus.  In  this 
sense  of  the  term  all  painting  is  "still-life."  It  is 
true  that  painting  has  its  figures  representing  mo 
tion  and  energy  and  effort;  but  even  here  there  is 
wanting  that  real  movement  and  action  in  the  sense 
stimulus  which  is  so  characteristic  of  music.  In 
Millet's  "Sower,"  for  example,  the  figure  is  replete 
with  energy  and  action,  but  the  mere  sense  effect  in 
strength  is  distinctly  below  the  effect  of  a  strong 
rhythm,  or  the  effect  of  modified  force  or  a  changed 
tempo.  When  the  painter  has  done  all  in  his  power 
the  feeling  of  movement  and  energy  is  still  biitjn- 
ferential,  not  a  direct  datum  of  sense.  In  this  art 
there  are  only  quiescent  figures,  unchanging  color 
forms. 

The  influence  of  these  facts  upon  the  mental  re 
action  is  important;  since  there  is  no  similarity 
dynamically  between  the  sense  factors  and  the  nat 
ural  life  of  the  emotions,  the  feeling  is  aroused  not 
through  the  suggestiveness  of  the  sense  factors,  but 
chiefly  through  the  appreciation  of  the  thought  con 
tent.  And  while  there  may  be  a  gain  in  purity  and 
in  accuracy,  there  is  a  distinct  loss  in  force.  A  paint 
ing  because  of  this  static  quality  of  the  sense  stimulus 
tends  to  keep  the  emotion  aroused  upon  one  un 
changing  plane,  rather  than  to  develop  it  up  to  its 
climax  according  to  the  natural  developing  phases 
of  a  feeling  state.  Once  I  comprehend  the  artist's 
thought  and  appreciate  his  technique,  there  is  noth 
ing  in  the  stimulus  itself  to  carry  the  emotions  on  to  a 


1 82  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

richer,  fuller  life.  But  the  emotions  are  naturally 
climacteric,  dramatic,  and  require  definite  and  de 
veloping  antecedents  to  arouse  them  to  their  greatest 
depth  and  to  their  greatest  strength.  Compare,  if 
you  wish  an  example  of  this,  the  emotional  effect  of 
reading  an  account  of  a  death  as  given  in  our  news 
papers  and  the  tragic  death  of  Hamlet.  In  the  first 
case  we  know  nothing  of  the  antecedents  of  the  death, 
which  may  be  fully  as  tragic  as  that  of  Hamlet,  while 
in  the  latter  we  are  led  up  to  the  death  which  comes  as 
a  climax  to  a  long,  emotional  and  dramatic  sequence 
of  events.  The  one  is  a  mere  expression  of  a  fact,  a 
sad  fact  doubtless;  but  the  other,  in  giving  us  a 
connected  account  of  the  circumstances,  prepares  us 
for  the  full  emotional  reaction. 

In  viewing  a  painting  with  its  static  and  momen 
tary  conception,  the  emotions  which  have  been 
aroused  by  the  representation  tend  at  once,  by  a 
well-known  law  of  mental  fatigue,  to  fade  away. 
The  stimulus  does  not  develop.  It  is  true  that 
through  association  the  representation  may  be  so 
enriched  that  the  emotions  will  develop  and  be  car 
ried  on  to  a  full  and  a  rich  reaction.  The  associated 
factors  and  the  strength  of  the  subjective  element  will 
provide  for  this.  The  point  we  wish  to  make  is  not 
that  such  works  of  art  do  not  stimulate  the  emotions, 
but  that  they  do  not  do  so  so  effectively  as  music. 
In  the  case  of  painting  the  emotions  are  aroused 
principally  through  the  meaning  attached  to  the  rep 
resentation,  that  is,  through  the  thought  content,  but 
in  the  case  of  music  by  this  and  also  by  the  sugges 
tion  in  the  dynamic  factors  of  the  sense  stimulus  itself. 

The  exceptional  power  which  certain  forms  of 
literature  exert  upon  the  human  mind,  e.  g.,  the  novel 


UNIVERSALITY,  VERSATILITY,   POWER     183 

and  the  drama,  well  confirm  our  point  as  a  positive 
example  of  the  principles  which  give  music  its  power. 
As  Lessing  long  ago  explained,  literature  is  peculiarly 
adapted  to  express  ideas  in  which  there  is  develop 
ment  from  moment  to  moment.  It  conforms  to  the 
natural  process  of  thought  and  so  is  adapted  to  ex 
press  thought  relations.  Literature,  therefore,  is  to 
be  classed  with  music  as  an  art  adapted  to  carry  the 
mind  on  to  emotional  climaxes  of  great  intensity 
and  force.  By  means  of  conceptual  representations 
presented  in  logical  or  panoramic  succession,  that  is, 
by  the  concrete  imagery  of  language  picture,  or  by 
certain  thoughts,  the  emotions  are  awakened  and 
stimulated  and  carried  on  through  a  natural  order 
of  development  to  maximum  degrees  of  intensity. 
Literature,  like  music,  takes  a  deep  hold  upon  the 
mind  because  it  conforms  closely  to  the  natural  func 
tioning  of  the  emotional  consciousness.  Unlike  paint 
ing,  it  does  not  leave  to  the  individual  the  task  of 
mentally  completing  the  drama  suggested,  but  carries 
it  out  definitely  so  that  if  the  listener  but  follows  the 
imagery  presented  he  can  hardly  help  but  become  en 
grossed  in  the  story  and  follow  emotionally  all  the 
changes  and  vicissitudes  of  its  characters. 

But  even  as  compared  with  literature,  music  in  one 
respect  stands  superior;  the  dynamic  similarity  of 
literature  to  the  emotional  life  is  confined  chiefly 
to  the  thought  content,  in  music  it  extends  even  to 
the  elements  of  its  sensuous  expression.  And  we  are 
still  functionally  so  truly  bodily  that  these  sensuous 
elements  have  an  amazing  hold  upon  us  emotionally. 
It  is  man's  life-long  task  so  to  become  master  of  him 
self  that  he  can  subordinate  in  certain  matters  of 
moral  import  the  instinctive  to  the  rational,  the  sen- 


1 84  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

suous  to  the  intellectual.  Music  in  its  symbolism, 
both  in  the  thought  content  expressed  and  in  its  sen 
suous  factors  employed,  conforms  closely  to  the  nat 
ural  laws  of  emotional  reactions.  This  symbolism 
therefore  makes  a  direct  and  a  tremendous  appeal  to 
the  emotional  consciousness.  Thus  it  is  that  music 
ranks  in  power  with  the  most  powerful  forms  of  the 
literary  art,  and  in  some  respects  surpasses  it  in  the 
directness  and  immediacy  of  its  appeal. 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE   CONTENT   OF   MUSIC 

i .  The  central  problem  in  the  philosophy  of  an  art 
is  the  problem  of  its  content.  What  is  the  essential 
nature  of  its  subject  matter,  its  inner  core  of  thought, 
the  irreducible  substratum  that  gives  it  character 
and  determines  its  proper  function  in  the  economy 
of  life?  This  is  the  inquiry  that  goes  nearest  to  the 
heart  of  the  matter,  that  lays  bare  as  it  were  the  very 
principles  of  its  being.  In  comparison  with  this  sub 
ject  the  problem  of  form  is  relatively  simple  and  easy. 
The  truth  there  sought  can  be  empirically  investi 
gated  and  scientifically  determined,  but  the  data  thus 
gained  are  only  the  starting-point  for  the  more  pro 
found  inquiry  concerning  the  content.  However, 
though  the  problem  is  difficult,  its  solution  will  yield 
ample  returns  for  all  the  labor  expended;  for  when 
once  determined,  the  content  becomes  a  very  touch 
stone  through  which  that  art  may  be  related  to  other 
phases  of  human  experience. 

It  is  upon  this  problem  of  the  content  of  music,  it 
will  be  remembered,  that  musical  theorists  have  long 
been  divided  into  two  opposing  schools — the  "  For 
malists  "  and  the  "  Expressionists."  The  former  con 
tend  that  the  content  of  music  is  nothing  more  than 
the  auditory  nerve  receives  and  transmits  to  the  brain, 
that  is,  sound  patterns,  melodic,  harmonic  and  rhyth 
mic,  and  withal  as  a  stimulus  sensuously  pleasing,  and 

185 


1 86  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

in  their  mere  sonorous  reality  beautiful.  This  school, 
therefore,  emphasizes  the  architectonic,  the  formal 
attributes  of  music,  finding  the  essence  of  the  beauty 
of  music,  the  content,  in  the  mere  formal  play  of  tones 
and  in  the  structural  unity  expressed  in  musical  sym 
bols.  The  latter,  on  the  other  hand,  contend  for  the 
emotional  significance  of  music,  finding  its  true  func 
tion  not  merely  or  principally  in  the  play  of  tones 
standing  in  logical  relations  to  one  another,  but  in  the 
stimulation  of  the  emotions.  The  one  school  con 
siders  music  merely  an  "arabesque  of  sound,"  the 
other  a  "language  of  the  emotions." 

This  wide  divergence  of  opinion  is  due  largely  to 
the  two  points  of  view  from  which  musical  theorists 
have  considered  the  question.  The  theories,  there 
fore,  are  not  necessarily  mutually  exclusive  nor  irrec 
oncilable.  The  Formalists,  considering  music  from 
the  objective  standpoint,  describe  it  in  terms  of  its 
objective  reality,  that  is,  music  consists  of  sound  pat 
terns  of  definite  logical  form,  differing  in  their  rhyth 
mic,  melodic  and  harmonic  attributes.  Being  an 
objective  phenomenon,  its  ultimate  reality  must  be 
ascertained  through  the  sense.  That  this  is  a  valid 
and  a  legitimate  point  of  view  cannot  be  denied.  The 
inadequacy  of  this  conception  of  music  is  not  due  to 
any  falsity  in  the  general  tenets  held,  but  rather  to 
the  fact  that  the  whole  truth  can  no  more  be  gained 
from  one  point  of  view  than  a  solid  can  be  seen  in  its 
entirety  from  any  one  side.  So  long  as  the  stand 
point  of  the  Formalists  is  rigidly  maintained  their 
argument  is  well-nigh  if  not  quite  irrefragable. 
Music  is  certainly  all  that  they  claim  it  to  be,  though 
not  necessarily  merely  that:  it  is  a  well-ordered, 
logical  sequence  of  pleasing  musical  sounds  express- 


THE   CONTENT  OF   MUSIC  187 

ing  a  musical  thought.    Certainly  it  is.    But  it  may 
be  all  this  and  much  more  besides. 

The  indictment  to  be  brought  against  this  hypoth 
esis  therefore  is  not  so  much  inaccuracy  as  inadequacy. 
To  limit  the  term  content  merely  to  that  which  is  seen 
from  the  objective  point  of  view,  is  to  use  the  term  in 
the  most  superficial  and  unphilosophic  manner.  Ob 
serve  the  illuminating  analogy  that  can  be  drawn  in 
this  respect  between  music  and  the  other  arts !  The 
content  of  sculpture  is  not  the  bare  form  of  stone  to 
be  apprehended  by  the  eye  alone.  The  content  of 
painting  is  not  the  mere  form  on  the  canvas,  the  color, 
the  light  and  shade,  the  drawing,  the  composition  and 
perspective,  qualities  visible  to  the  eye.  These  are 
all  essential  qualities  of  painting,  it  is  true;  but 
granted  that  they  are  worth  all  that  painters  claim, 
even  so  we  do  not  fathom  the  depth  of  art  or  find  the 
true  secret  of  artistic  genius.  Who  beholding  the 
Sistine  Madonna  would  be  content  to  note  merely 
the  form,  the  lines,  the  shading,  the  color,  and  not 
feel  the  influence  of  the  pure,  thoughtful  soul  that 
looks  out  of  the  wondering  eyes  of  the  Child's 
mother?  And  if  there  are  paintings  whose  value 
lies  wholly  in  the  formal  attributes,  as  there  doubt 
less  are,  it  is  due  rather  to  the  limitations  of  genius 
than  to  the  adequacy  of  the  theory  itself.  They  who 
painted  thus  lacked  the  genius  of  Raphael  and  An- 
gelo  and  those  who  reveal  in  their  works  the  deeper 
passions  and  truths  of  life.  This  latter  is  the  sublime 
in  art,  the  deeper  content  that  not  only  satisfies  the 
soul  of  the  beholder,  but  even  the  quest  of  the  phi 
losopher  looking  for  the  deep  foundations  of  life  and 
of  art.  Who,  I  say,  who  has  once  felt  the  force  and 
depth  of  this  element  in  art,  can  escape  the  feeling  of 


1 88  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

trivialities  when  he  is  recalled  to  the  mere  sense  quali 
ties  of  art  ?  And  yet  such  an  one  is  he  who  sees  in 
music  nothing  more  than  a  discourse  of  sweet  sounds. 
The  objective  elements  of  every  art  are  genuine  and 
important,  and  with  their  principles  and  sensuous 
beauty  worthy  of  intelligent  appreciation.  But  after 
all  they  are  but  the  means  of  expressing  a  thought 
that  can  hardly  be  found  in  such  an  analysis  as  this. 
Music,  as  has  been  shown  throughout  our  whole  dis 
cussion,  has  its  thought  and  its  emotional  aspects  as 
well  as  its  striking  sense  attributes.  When  we  refer 
to  the  content  of  music,  therefore,  we  must  compre 
hend  under  the  term  something  more  than  is  found 
in  the  conception  of  the  Formalist. 

2.  From  the  subjective  point  of  view,  the  stand 
point  of  the  Expressionists,  the  time-honored  ques 
tion  is,  "Does  music  express  the  emotions?"  This 
question  they  answer  unhesitatingly  and  emphatic 
ally  in  the  affirmative.  Music  is  not  only  able  to  ex 
press  the  emotions,  but  so  direct  is  its  power  over  the 
emotional  consciousness  that  it  is,  as  it  were,  a  very 
language  of  the  emotions.  But  the  question  itself  is 
most  unfortunately  stated  because  of  the  manifest 
ambiguity  in  the  pivotal  word  "express."  And  be 
sides  it  no  longer  serves  to  state  accurately  the  real 
problem  in  musical  aesthetics.  Few  indeed  are  they 
who  still  hold  to  a  strict  interpretation  of  the  Formal- 
istic  hypothesis  and  deny  to  music  a  direct  and  a 
powerful  influence  over  the  emotional  consciousness. 
In  this  respect  the  Expressionists  have  won  a  deci 
sive  victory.  The  real,  vital  problem  in  musical 
aesthetics  to-day  is  the  problem  of  the  relative  value 
of  the  emotional  and  the  intellectual  elements  in 
music,  it  being  no  longer  denied  that  music  does 


THE  CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  189 

contain  them  both.  The  result  of  our  psychological 
analysis  justifies  this  new  point  of  attack.  We  leave 
the  old  question,  therefore,  and  turn  to  this  more 
modern  and  more  fruitful  inquiry. 

3.  In  an  inquiry  as  to  the  emotional  significance  of 
music,  it  will  be  well  to  keep  in  mind  a  distinction  that 
has  been  suggested  between  the  dramatic  or  impres 
sive  attributes  of  music  and  its  more  comprehensive, 
more  abstract,  aesthetic  qualities.  No  small  part  of 
the  confusion  in  which  the  subject  of  musical  aesthe 
tics  now  stands  is  due  to  a  failure  to  distinguish 
properly  between  the  impressive  qualities  of  musical 
sound  considered  merely  as  sound  and  the  more 
truly  aesthetic  qualities  of  music  which  make  it  a  true 
form  of  art.  As  one  writer  expresses  the  distinction : 
"Music  presents  two  sets  of  psychological  phe 
nomena.  It  can  suggest  and  stimulate  feelings  akin 
to  those  produced  by  the  vicissitudes  of  real  life ;  and 
it  can  interest,  fascinate,  delight  or  weary  and  dis 
please  by  what  we  can  only  call  the  purely  musical 
qualities  of  its  sound  patterns.  Music  thus  awakens  ,' 
two  sets  of  emotions — a  dramatic  one  referred  to  its 
expressiveness,  and  an  esthetic  one  correlated  with 
the  presence  or  absence  of  beauty."  The  distinc 
tion  is  an  excellent  one  and  our  discussion  of  the 
emotional  significance  of  music  will  be  based  upon  it. 
Music,  by  the  presence  of  certain  factors,  is  peculiarly 
adapted  to  arouse  and  to  stimulate  the  emotions  in 
a  direct  and  dramatic  way;  but  it  is  also  by  the 
presence  of  universal  aesthetic  qualities  capable  of 
arousing  the  less  intense  aesthetic  emotions  or  senti 
ments. 

As  an  art,  music  is  blessed  with  unique  power  and 

'  Vcrnon  Lee,  Riddle  of  Music,  Quarterly  Review,  Jan.,  1906. 


THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

effectiveness  by  having  as  its  medium  of  expression 
that  sense  stimulus  which  both  for  biological  and 
psychological  reasons  is  most  directly  and  intensely 
impressive.  Consequently  there  is  to  music,  by  vir 
tue  of  the  character  of  its  medium,  an  impressiveness 
strong  enough  at  times  to  overbalance  completely 
the  less  obtrusive,  less  clamant  aesthetic  qualities 
which  belong  to  music  in  its  higher  artistic  relations. 
These  impressive  or  dramatic  qualities  of  musical 
sound  are  all  so  perfectly  adapted  to  awaken  and  to 
stimulate  the  emotions  that  it  seems  to  be  playing 
loose  with  the  facts  in  the  case  to  explain  them  in  any 
other  way. 

But  besides  the  impressiveness  of  musical  sound 
due  to  evolutionary  factors,  music  exemplifies  as  a 
true  form  of  art  certain  aesthetic  attributes  common 
to  all  the  arts  and  universally  regarded  as  principles 
of  beauty  in  its  purer  forms.  These  principles,  we 
say,  are  common  to  all  the  arts;  the  musician,  like  the 
poet  or  the  painter,  has  an  idea  to  express  in  sensu 
ous  form,  an  idea  characterized  by  certain  assignable 
aesthetic  principles  due  to  the  character  of  the  idea 
and  not  to  the  nature  of  the  medium  in  which  it  is 
expressed.  That  the  idea  is  musical,  not  concep 
tual  or  pictorial,  in  no  way  alters  this  fundamental 
fact.  Because  such  an  idea  is  musical  and  must  be 
expressed  in  musical  sounds,  it  has  its  own  charac 
teristic  sense  qualities ;  these  are  the  obvious  factors 
that  first  appeal  to  the  natural  ear,  the  differentia 
determining  its  specie. 

But  if  the  composition  is  worthy  of  the  name  of 
art  there  must  be  besides  these  pleasing  qualities  of 
sound,  or  behind  them,  an  idea  exemplifying,  not 
withstanding  its  musical  character,  the  same  aesthetic 


THE   CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  191 

ideals  and  principles  that  determine  the  value  of  any 
other  work  of  art.  Indeed,  music  is  an  art  only  by 
virtue  of  this  fact.  Art  is  something  deeper,  some 
thing  nobler  and  more  significant  than  mere  sense 
stimulus,  enriched  and  intensified  though  it  be  by  all 
the  qualities  that  can  be  predicated  of  such  forms  of 
objective  reality.  Music  is  music,  if  you  please,  be 
cause  of  its  sound  attributes,  but  it  is  an  art  only 
because  it  is  a  vehicle  for  the  expression  of  thought. 
These  thought  attributes  are  the  principles  that  de 
termine  its  genus,  that  is,  make  it  a  true  form  of  art. 

But  in  whatever  terms  it  is  stated,  the  distinction 
is  valid  and  important  and  much  will  be  gained 
toward  a  truer  conception  of  music  if  it  is  kept  con 
stantly  before  us.  In  discussing  the  emotional  sig 
nificance  of  music,  therefore,  we  shall  observe  this 
twofold  character  of  music  and  note  first  some  of  the 
impressive  qualities  of  musical  sound,  and  then  some 
of  the  most  typical  aesthetic  principles. 

4.  It  is  no  difficult  task  to  analyze  a  musical  com 
position  so  as  to  determine  the  various  sources  of  its 
psychological  effect.  Indeed  so  few  and  so  simple 
are  these  elements  found  to  be  that  they  have  been 
declared  for  this  very  reason  inadequate  for  the  de 
mands  made  upon  them  by  the  Expressionist's  hy 
pothesis.  We  need  not  hesitate,  therefore,  to  enumer 
ate  them:  the  real  problem  is  to  understand  how 
factors  apparently  so  simple  can  still  be  so  tremen 
dously  effective.  Gurney,  in  his  Power  of  Sound, 
enumerates  the  following  means  at  the  disposal  of  the 
musician,  whereby  he  is  able  to  awaken  emotional 
responses  in  the  minds  of  his  hearers:  Timbre,  the  use 
of  the  Major  and  the  Minor  Modes,  Harmonic  Feat 
ures  such  as  Discords  and  Resolutions,  Pace,  strongly 


192  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

marked  Rhythmic  Outlines  and  Undecided  Rhythm.1 
To  these  must  be  added,  certainly,  modifications  of 
Force.  These  dramatic  or  impressive  factors  can 
all  be  conveniently  subsumed  under  the  following 
heads:  Rhythm,  Harmonic  Factors  including  the 
major  and  the  minor  modes,  Timbre,  and  modifica 
tions  in  Force  and  in  Tempo. 

It  is  little  wonder  that  to  those  of  a  formalistic  dis 
position  of  mind  these  few  elements,  one  and  all, 
should  seem  too  vague,  too  indefinite  to  meet  the  re 
quirements  of  a  "language  of  the  emotions."  More 
over,  the  emotions  are  notoriously  averse  to  any 
orderly  manipulation  such  as  the  term  "language" 
implies.  But  while  this  is  all  true,  we  may  still  in 
quire  as  to  the  presence  and  value  of  the  emotional 
element  in  music. 

Rhythm  has  already  been  declared  to  be  instinc 
tive,  that  is,  directly,  and  without  the  mediation  of 
consciousness,  impressive  and  emotional.  The  re 
action  it  calls  forth  is  quasi-reftex,  but  with  the  most 
profound  and  dramatic  influence  over  the  emotional 
consciousness.  This  point  needs  no  further  elucida 
tion. 

Harmonic  elements  also  have  a  direct,  sensuous, 
dramatic  power  as  well  as  a  more  complex,  aesthetic 
significance.  While  the  explanation  of  the  major 
and  the  minor  modes,  for  example,  entails  an  abstract 
analysis  and  shows  the  presence  of  complex  psycho 
logical  principles,  these  principles  manifest  their 
presence  chiefly  in  the  reaction  to  the  mere  sensuous 
differences  so  emphasized  in  Helmholtz's  explana 
tion.  The  contrasted  effect  of  the  two  modes,  there 
fore,  is  also  more  direct,  dramatic,  than  an  intel- 

1  Vid.  Chapter  XIV. 


THE   CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  193 

lectual  appreciation  of  all  the  elements  shown  by  a 
logical  analysis  to  be  involved.  And  this  mental 
response  also  is  strongly  colored  emotionally. 

Of  the  same  nature  and  due  to  the  same  develop 
mental  reasons  is  the  effect  of  discords  and  resolu 
tions  mentioned  by  Gurney.  They  also  are  potent 
emotionally,  but  the  reaction  to  them  has  become  so 
habitual  that  the  reflective  element,  if  it  was  ever 
present,  has  been  lost,  and  they  are  appreciated  now 
in  this  same  gz*<m'-instinctive  fashion,  and  for  their 
emotional  value. 

Timbre  or  "tone-color,"  as  it  is  often  called,  refers 
to  the  quality  of  the  sound,  due,  as  physicists  tell  us, 
to  the  presence  and  prominence  of  various  over 
tones  entering  into  the  composition  of  the  fundamen 
tal  tone.  This  tone-quality  is  also  directly  and  dra 
matically  impressive,  that  is,  has  in  itself  emotional 
significance.  The  recognition  of  this  fact  is  not  a  dis 
covery  of  modern  music.  Aristotle  in  his  scheme  of 
education,  because  of  the  dissolute  tendency  of  such 
instruments,  would  interdict  the  flute,  the  harp,  and 
the  lyre.1  But  it  is  only  in  recent  years,  through  the 
development  of  orchestration,  that  this  fact  has  been 
seized  upon  and  developed  so  as  to  produce  a  new 
departure  in  music.  In  the  light  of  the  recognition 
and  emphasis  it  is  thus  receiving,  it  will  be  well  to 
note  carefully  its  true  character  and  thus  to  see  the 
strength  and  the  weakness  of  the  movement  based 
upon  it. 

We  have  just  said  that  timbre  is  a  quality  of 
sound  due  primarily  to  the  character  of  the  over 
tones  produced  by  various  instruments  or  voices. 
Because  of  the  different  shapes  of  the  resonating 

1  Vid.  'Politics,  Bk.  VIII. 


194  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

cavities  of  musical  instruments  the  fundamental 
tones  have  different  overtones,  or  these  are  variously 
emphasized.  Thus  timbre  is  primarily  a  sensuous 
attribute,  and  to  pitch  and  intensity  and  "touch"  is 
added  another  sense  attribute  hardly  less  obvious 
than  the  most  evident  of  these  sensuous  qualities  of 
sound.  To  a  close  observer  it  is  not  strange  that  a 
characteristic  so  palpable  as  this  should  be  used  to 
base  a  new  departure  in  music:  its  inherent  impor 
tance  justifies  the  movement. 

Timbre  thus  is  the  principle  underlying  the  decided 
musical  movement  of  our  day,  viz.,  orchestration. 
To  discuss  this  subject  in  detail  is  the  work  of  the 
musician;  we  shall  only  note  its  principles.  In  the 
orchestra,  as  we  know  it  to-day,  there  are  certain 
groups  of  instruments,  each  group  characterized  by 
its  own  quality  of  tone.  Such,  for  example,  are  the 
"strings,"  the  "wood-wind,"  the  "brass"  and  the 
"battery."  But  the  principle  leads  to  a  much  more 
extended  division  than  this ;  indeed,  each  instrument 
of  each  group  has  its  own  peculiar  color,  and  for  the 
musician  this  has  a  certain  specific  value.  Each  in 
strument,  therefore,  is  an  opportunity  for  the  musi 
cian  to  further  accentuate  this  sensuous  character  of 
musical  sound,  and  to  make  a  direct  appeal  to  the 
emotions  of  the  listener.  The  insistent  tones  of  the 
violin,  the  martial  tone  of  the  brass,  the  plaintive  tone 
of  the  flute,  the  clanging  cymbal,  illustrate  what  is 
meant.  And  even  between  instruments  as  closely 
related  as  the  violin  and  the  viola  the  modern 
world  has  learned  to  ascribe  important  differences. 

The  modern  school  of  "colorists,"  seizing  upon 
these  qualitative  distinctions  in  conjunction  with  the 
other  sense  qualities,  have  developed  them  most  fer- 


THE  CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  195 

tilely  and  have  produced  a  music  of  unprecedented  in 
tensity  and  passion.  Strauss,  for  example,  in  some  of 
his  latest  "tone-poems"  has  startled,  amazed  and 
even  shocked  the  musical  world  by  the  passion  he 
pictures.  Whether  or  not  this  be  the  highest  or  even 
the  truest  form  of  art,  there  is  no  question  of  its 
dramatic  effectiveness.  The  thought  will  rise,  how 
ever,  that  in  the  very  intensity  of  his  music  and  in 
the  appeal  he  makes  to  these  sensuous  attributes  he 
is  departing  from  the  sober  advance  along  the  lines 
of  pure  musical  thought,  rather  than  pointing  with 
unerring  hand  to  the  sacred  wray  of  enduring  art. 
To  ignore  the  demands  of  pure  thought  for  the 
greater  impressiveness  of  sense  is,  in  all  art  and  for 
all  time,  a  questionable  procedure.  However,  this  is 
no  reason  why  the  movement  may  not  result,  when 
sober  second  thought  has  pruned  away  its  asperities, 
in  a  decided  enrichment  of  the  musical  art,  not  only 
in  an  increased  sensuous  beauty  and  effectiveness, 
but  also  in  the  possibilities  for  working  out  new 
thought  relations. 

To  complete  the  list  of  these  impressive  or  dra 
matic  attributes  of  musical  sound,  we  refer  again  to 
modifications  of  Force  and  of  Tempo,  which,  because 
of  their  similarity  dynamically  to  emotional  changes, 
have  a  direct  and  a  powerful  suggestibility.  They 
too  are  made  use  of  in  modern  music  to  heighten  and 
intensify  its  sensuous  effect,  and  belong,  therefore,  to 
the  same  category  as  the  factors  previously  men 
tioned. 

In  considering  the  character  and  mental  signifi 
cance  of  these  factors,  the  first  common  attribute 
is  their  immediacy.  As  has  been  pointed  out,  they 
may  all  be  regarded  as  attributes  of  the  musical 


196  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

tones  considered  as  sound ;  they  do  not  therefore  de 
pend  for  their  effect  upon  their  symbolic  content, 
though  they  may  all  have  such  value,  but  as  mere 
modifications  of  sensuous  stimuli  have  the  directness 
and  force  of  sensational  and  perceptual  elements. 
It  is  a  well-known  psychological  law  that  factors 
long  and  repeatedly  used  assume  a  quasi  -reflex  char 
acter,  exercising  their  pristine  function  without  the 
mediation  of  consciousness.  This  is  just  the  case  with 
the  factors  we  are  now  discussing.  Once  interpreted 
as  symbols  of  emotional  reaction,  they  have  now 
become  fixed  in  the  organic  structure  of  the  individ 
ual  and  function  with  their  primal  force,  but  without 
consciousness  of  the  end  they  subserve. 

Another  common  attribute  of  these  sense  qualities 
is  their  indefiniteness.  Were  any  further  evidence 
needed  to  show  the  inadequacy  of  the  expression- 
istic  hypothesis,  this  fact  should  prove  convincing. 
The  sensuous  factors,  remarkable  though  they  be, 
are  one  and  all  too  vague,  too  indefinite  to  fulfil 
the  exigencies  of  a  language.  And  yet  as  compared 
with  the  other  arts,  music  is  in  this  direction  far  su 
perior  to  any  art  that  might  be  named.  The  sensuous 
factors  utilized  for  emotional  expressiveness  in  sculp 
ture,  or  architecture,  or  in  literature,  or  even  in 
painting,  are  not  to  be  compared  with  those  avail 
able  in  music,  either  in  number  or  in  expressiveness. 
So,  while  we  admit  their  conceptual  vagueness,  we 
must  not  overlook  their  sensuous  suggestibility. 
And  as  we  have  already  said,  not  accurate  represen 
tation,  but  suggestibility,  is  the  illuminating  term  in 
the  psychology  of  the  emotions. 

In  the  net  outcome  upon  the  emotional  conscious 
ness  I  am  not  sure  but  that  this  indefiniteness  is 


THE  CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  197 

a  distinct  gain  rather  than  a  source  of  weakness. 
For  example,  if  I  am  reading  a  poem  or  looking 
at  a  picture  I  must  follow  the  representation  there 
definitely  and  accurately  expressed.  Such  repre 
sentations  may  or  they  may  not  be  for  me  rich  in 
interest  and  in  emotional  significance:  that  will  de 
pend  upon  my  education  and  previous  experience. 
But  the  indefinite  suggestibility  of  the  sensuous  fac 
tors  of  music  leaves  the  mind  free  to  create  its  own 
imagery,  to  bring  to  consciousness  ideas  which  for 
it  are  fraught  with  feeling.  The  laws  of  association 
teach  that  it  may  be  just  for  this  reason,  indeed,  that 
they  are  revived.  So  long  as  these  factors  have  char 
acter  enough  to  give  color  to  the  feeling,  and  this 
cannot  be  denied,  their  conceptual  vagueness  may 
therefore  be  a  distinct  gain  emotionally,  not  a  source 
of  weakness.  Such  being  the  case,  it  is  folly  to  over 
look  their  inherent  character  and  to  deny  that,  psy 
chologically  considered,  they  have  direct  and  re 
markable  emotional  significance.  Being  direct  and 
sensuous,  they  serve  to  give  to  the  emotions  music 
engenders  a  warmth  and  vividness  and  color  that 
approximates  in  these  particulars  the  emotions  pro 
duced  by  the  vicissitudes  of  real  life. 

5.  In  estimating  the  value  of  the  emotional  element 
in  music,  the  more  abstract  aesthetic  attributes  must 
also  be  considered.  Though  they  are  by  no  means 
so  clamant  or  exciting  or  so  dramatically  powerful 
as  the  sensuous  qualities  to  which  we  have  already 
called  attention,  they  are  the  source  of  an  aesthetic 
pleasure,  pale  in  hue  it  may  be,  but  pure  in  texture. 
Such,  for  example,  are  unity,  symmetry,  graceful 
ness,  originality,  and  the  like.  As  aesthetic  attributes 
they  are  common  to  all  the  arts,  though  in  the  case 


198  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

of  each  differently  expressed;  the  unity  in  a  drama 
is  not  produced  by  the  same  means  as  the  unity  in 
a  building  or  in  a  painting,  or  in  a  musical  composi 
tion.  Nevertheless,  since  it  is  unity  in  each  case, 
the  psychological  reaction  is  identical.  So  far  as 
the  logical  and  psychological  value  of  the  principle 
is  concerned,  it  is  a  matter  of  indifference  whether 
it  is  manifested  in  one  work  of  art  or  in  another. 
The  emotional  value  of  these  aesthetic  attributes, 
when  realized  in  music,  therefore,  is  not  different 
from  their  psychological  function  when  found  in 
any  of  the  other  arts;  it  is  true  that  their  effect  is 
supplemented,  often  overshadowed,  by  the  more 
striking  effect  of  the  dramatic  qualities  of  musical 
sound,  but  as  aesthetic  principles,  considered  for 
their  own  sake,  there  is  no  sufficient  ground  for 
introducing  a  distinction. 

These  aesthetic  attributes  in  music,  as  in  the  other 
arts,  produce  the  characteristic  aesthetic  emotion, 
an  emotion  of  a  refined,  intellectual  character,  calm 
or  contemplative,  but  pure,  and  recognized  as  of 
high  inherent  worth.  They  and  they  alone  redeem 
music  from  being  merely  an  effective  means  of  emo 
tional  stimulation,  and  place  it  high  in  the  category  of 
art.  Thus  the  emotions  they  arouse  are  an  indispensa 
ble  element  in  the  psychological  reaction  to  music; 
otherwise,  there  is  nothing  worthy  the  name  of  art. 

The  conclusion,  therefore,  to  which  we  are  led 
by  the  argument,  is  that  if  the  proper  function  of 
art  in  its  other  forms  is  to  awaken  an  emotional 
reaction,  the  same  is  true  of  music,  and  also  to  a 
like  degree.  The  purpose  of  art  is  one,  whatever 
its  form.  Music  is  blessed  by  having  at  its  disposal, 
due  to  the  medium  in  which  it  is  expressed,  numerous 


THE  CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  199 

factors  of  direct  emotional  significance;  but  these 
in  no  way  change  its  function  as  a  form  of  art. 
They  give  it  power,  they  give  it  universality,  they 
give  it  versatility;  but  the  true  purpose  of  music  is 
not  changed  thereby,  and  any  attempt  to  neglect 
the  former  or  to  even  emphasize  the  latter  is  a  de 
parture  from  the  true  pathway  of  art  and  of  art 
development. 

6.  In  our  discussion  of  the  intellectual  element 
in  music,  the  purpose  of  this  chapter  does  not  demand 
that  we  enter  into  a  detailed  description  of  such 
factors,  but  only  that  we  attempt  to  evaluate  them. 
In  the  true  content  of  music  is  there  a  real  and  a 
vital  intellectual  factor  ?  Or,  in  other  words,  in 
the  aesthetic  experience  resulting  from  the  apprecia 
tion  of  a  musical  composition,  what  is  the  value  of 
the  intellectual  activity  involved  ? 

As  a  preliminary  to  the  consideration  of  this  sub 
ject,  it  should  be  remembered  that  there  is  the 
widest  difference  in  musical  compositions  as  to  the 
presence  and  relative  importance  of  these  intel 
lectual  elements.  Some  compositions  depend  for 
their  effect  so  largely  upon  the  dramatic  qualities 
and  so  little  upon  formal  architectonic  elements, 
that  they  are  correctly  characterized  as  emotional; 
others  subordinate  these  attributes  and  demand 
upon  the  part  of  the  listener  a  very  keen,  analytic 
attitude  of  mind  if  the  content  is  to  be  at  all  ade 
quately  apprehended.  In  the  first  case,  appeal  is 
made  largely  to  reflex  and  instinctive  factors,  and 
the  mind  is  more  passively  receptive  than  dis 
criminatingly  and  actively  analytic.  But  there  is 
music  also  that  cannot  be  comprehended  in  any 
such  listless  fashion.  The  compositions  of  Bach  or 


200  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

Beethoven,  for  example,  or  of  any  of  the  classical 
composers,  demand  a  marshalling  of  the  powers  of 
the  mind  and  a  critical  and  sustained  attention 
that  can  be  denominated  nothing  else  than  intellec 
tual.  In  this  respect  music  is  again  closely  analo 
gous  to  various  forms  of  literature.  Just  as  some 
poems,  for  example,  require  little  more  than  a  pass 
ive  though  sensitive  response  to  the  obvious  ima 
gery  of  the  word  pictures,  so  some  music  is  ade 
quately  apprehended  through  a  simple  response  to 
its  dramatic  elements.  But  there  is  literature  also 
which,  to  be  appreciated,  requires  the  most  energetic 
activity  of  the  mind's  analytic  powers  and  of  in 
tellectual  synthesis.  In  the  latter  case,  the  proper 
aesthetic  emotion  comes  only  through  the  clear 
comprehension  of  the  thought. 

When  we  speak  of  the  intellectual  element  in 
music,  therefore,  it  is  evident  that  we  do  not  refer 
to  any  fixed  or  constant  factor.  Some  music  is  rich 
in  such  elements,  some  relies  for  its  effect  more 
upon  the  impressive  attributes  of  musical  sound. 
Under  such  conditions  we  can  escape  the  difficulty 
either  by  making  our  remarks  so  general  that  they 
will  apply  to  the  two  extremes,  or  we  can  inquire 
more  specifically  as  to  the  general  character  of  the 
intellectual  processes  involved  in  the  musical  ex 
perience,  and  then  determine  the  source  of  the 
pleasure  in  such  activity.  Our  method  will  be  the 
latter  one.  Two  questions  will  serve  to  focalize 
our  remarks:  First,  what  are  the  intellectual  pro 
cesses  involved  in  apprehending  a  musical  composi 
tion  ?  And,  second,  do  such  activities  result  in  a  truly 
aesthetic  pleasure  ? 

In   apprehending    a   musical    composition   as  an 


THE  CONTENT  OF  MUSIC  2ol 

objective  form,  there  are  involved  necessarily  all 
those  activities  of  the  sense  organ  and  brain  centres 
used  in  any  perceptual  process.  This  is  obviously 
true,,  whether  the  composition  be  of  the  emotional 
or  of  the  intellectual  type.  It  makes  no  difference, 
so  far  as  this  stage  of  the  process  is  concerned, 
whether  the  composition  is  to  be  apprehended  for 
aesthetic  or  for  critical  or  for  scientific  purposes. 
There  must  be  a  certain  voluntary  or  involuntary 
focussing  of  the  attention,  a  real  though  an  unre- 
flective  discrimination  of  factors,  an  implicit  or 
explicit  judgment  such  as  is  involved  in  any  process 
of  sense  perception.  However,  this  does  not  get 
to  the  heart  of  the  matter,  for  the  aesthetic  experi 
ence  is  determined,  not  by  the  process  of  sense  per 
ception,  but  by  the  mental  attitude  toward  an 
object  when  perceived.  We  must  look,  therefore, 
to  the  processes  involved  in  the  apprehension  of  these 
higher  aesthetic  qualities  of  a  work  of  art. 

In  the  aesthetic  apprehension  and  appreciation  of 
a  quality  like  unity,  intellectual  processes  of  a  high 
order  are  involved.  The  unity  of  a  musical  compo 
sition  is  not  a  datum  of  sense,  and  thus  a  part  of 
the  perceptual  process.  If  the  composition  is  at 
all  complex,  it  is  more  like  the  unity  of  a  drama  or 
a  novel,  an  attribute  to  be  recognized  only  as  sense 
data  are  analyzed  and  the  relation  of  part  to  part 
intelligently  understood.  To  be  more  specific,  the 
recognition  of  unity  in  music  worthy  of  the  name 
of  art,  presupposes  an  analysis  of  the  composition 
into  its  structural  elements  and  the  recognition  of 
the  relation  between  them,  the  evaluation  consciously 
or  unconsciously  of  thematic,  rhythmic  and  har 
monic  features,  and  the  whole  series  of  related  ele- 


202  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

ments  synthesized  into  an  artistic  whole.  It  is 
true  that  for  a  mere  impressionistic  appreciation  of 
some  music  all  this  need  not  be  done  in  so  clear 
cut  and  conscious  a  fashion  as  is  implied  in.  our 
remarks;  there  is  what  we  may  call  an  emotional 
unity  attainable  through  the  dramatic  qualities  of 
musical  sound.  But  for  a  composition  built  upon 
more  severe  intellectual  lines,  this  kind  of  mental 
reaction  will  not  suffice. 

The  reason  classical  music  is  so  often  a  bore  to 
the  average  listener  is  exactly  the  same  as  the  reason 
technical  discussions  fail  to  interest  the  man  on  the 
street ;  he  is  unacquainted  with  the  terminology  in 
which  the  thought  is  expressed  and  fails,  therefore, 
to  find  meaning  in  the  sounds  through  which  the 
thought  is  expressed. 

The  recognition  and  appreciation  of  balance  or 
symmetr}''  in  a  composition  implies  a  high  degree  of 
refinement  in  discriminating  ability  and  enough 
practice  to  lead  to  the  appreciation  of  contrasted 
musical  elements. 

Strength  in  expression,  we  have  said,  implies  com 
prehensiveness  and  clearness  of  vision,  that  is  to  say, 
a  logical,  masterful  understanding  of  the  thought 
expressed.  This  is  essentially  an  intellectual  pro 
cess,  a  matter  of  the  understanding,  not  of  the 
emotions. 

The  detection  and  appreciation  of  gracefulness  is 
first  of  all  a  sensibility  for  fine  distinctions,  both  of 
sense  and  of  thought,  and  is,  so  far,  closely  akin  to 
the  other  intellectual  processes  of  discrimination 
and  judgment. 

For  the  appreciation  of  originality  and  significance 
in  the  content  of  a  composition,  there  is  required  the 


THE  CONTENT  OF   MUSIC  203 

functioning  of  the  mind  in  the  most  abstract  and 
plainly  intellectual  way.  These  two  attributes  are 
inherently  attributes  of  thought,  not  of  the  emotions, 
and  can  be  apprehended  and  appreciated,  therefore, 
only  through  the  activity  of  intellect.  That  this 
is  true  will  be  readily  seen  if  it  is  remembered  what 
the  recognition  of  such  attributes  implies,  viz.,  the 
analysis  of  the  most  abstract  ideas,  the  application 
of  standards  of  intellectual  and  emotional  values, 
and  comparisons  with  ideas  and  ideals  which  are 
comparable  with  the  abstract  processes  of  scientific 
judgment  and  reasoning. 

We  conclude,  therefore,  that  music  of  any  real 
artistic  value,  because  such  music  must  exemplify 
these  various  aesthetic  attributes,  does  contain  an 
intellectual  as  well  as  an  emotional  element.  Thus 
pure  emotionalism  as  the  basis  for  a  theory  of  mu 
sic  is  proven  inadequate.  Not  only  are  intellectual 
elements  present,  but  they  play  so  large  a  part  in 
the  musical  experience  that  they  must  be  recog 
nized  as  an  indispensable  element  in  the  musical  ex 
perience.  With  this  conclusion  forced  upon  us,  the 
question  now  arises,  is  such  intellectual  activity  for 
its  own  sake,  or  for  the  sake  of  the  pleasure  resulting 
therefrom  ? 

To  maintain  that  these  intellectual  processes 
exist  for  their  own  sake  were  to  confuse  the  aesthetic 
and  the  scientific  experience.  We  affirm  at  once, 
therefore,  and  without  further  argument,  that  they 
are  not  to  be  thus  interpreted.  But,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  analogy  between  the  musical  experience 
and  other  forms  of  artistic  reaction  leads  us  to 
assert  that  in  the  intellectual  activity  involved  in 
the  apprehension  of  these  aesthetic  attributes  there 


204  THE   PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

is  that  refined,  intellectual  pleasure  known  as  the 
characteristic  aesthetic  emotion.  To  explain  why 
such  intellectual  activity  should  give  pleasure,  we 
shall  refer,  in  lieu  of  a  better  one,  to  the  biological 
theory  of  pleasure  and  its  function. 

If  there  is  an  aesthetic  pleasure  in  the  physiological 
activity  of  the  sense  organs,  due,  as  the  theory 
phrases  it,  "to  the  healthful  functioning  of  the 
organs  involved,"  the  presumption  is  that  pleasure 
of  a  similar  character  wrould  result,  as  the  mind  in 
its  higher  processes  functions  aesthetically.  In 
deed,  if  the  theory  is  to  be  credible  at  all,  it  must  be 
so.  Pleasure  is  the  reward  Nature  gives  her  children 
for  working  for  their  own  advantage,  pain  her 
penalty  for  self -in  jury.  But  the  intellect,  evolu 
tionists  tell  us,  is  Nature's  crowning  gift  to  man, 
the  most  perfect  instrument  of  adaptation  and  ad 
justment.  Since,  however,  the  mind  is  still  the 
battle  field  of  evolutionary  forces,  favorable  activities 
still  need  the  preferential  accompaniment  of  pleasure. 
Thus  we  are  justified  by  the  theory  in  regarding 
these  higher  intellectual  processes  involved  in  the 
aesthetic  experience  as  productive  of  a  pleasurable 
emotion,  strong  enough,  unless  inhibited  by  other 
stronger  factors,  to  insure  a  preference  for  such 
modes  of  activity.  Thus,  ultimately,  even  these 
most  pronounced  intellectual  processes  involved  in 
the  highest  type  of  musical  experience  yield  a  rich 
return  in  the  common  currency  of  the  art  realm, 
viz.,  in  the  emotions.  We  close  the  chapter  with  a 
brief  summary. 

7.  The  analysis  of  this  chapter  has  been  based 
upon  the  distinction  between  the  sensuous  qualities 
of  musical  sound  and  the  more  abstract  aesthetic 
attributes  of  music  which  give  it  place  in  the  category 


THE   CONTEXT  OF  MUSIC  205 

of  art.  These  sensuous  attributes  of  music  psycho 
logically  considered  have  greater  value  than  the  sen 
suous  attributes  of  any  other  art.  So  urgent  are 
they,  so  clamant,  so  intense  in  their  appeal,  that  they 
tend  to  overshadow  the  more  intellectual  attributes 
with  which  they  have  been  contrasted.  In  the  course 
of  men's  development  these  sensuous  factors  have 
acquired  a  direct  and  a  powerful  influence  over  the 
emotional  consciousness.  Music,  therefore,  that 
relies  chiefly  for  its  effect  upon  such  attributes, 
whether  it  be  the  crude  music  of  primitive  people  or 
"popular  music,"  or  much  of  the  music  of  the  ro 
manticists,  or  the  "tone-poems"  of  the  current 
movement,  is  as  to  its  content  predominately  emo 
tional.  Such  music  may  be  tremendously  impress 
ive  and  intense,  and  yet  demand  but  little  intellect 
ual  activity  or  appreciation. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  music  that  produces  its 
proper  effect  not  so  much  through  the  use  of  these 
impressive  attributes  as  through  the  elaboration  of 
pure  musical  thought.  So  little  are  the  mere  sense 
factors  regarded,  so  important  is  the  presentation  of 
the  thought  for  its  own  sake,  that  a  failure  to  appre 
ciate  this  latter  element  results  inevitably  in  boredom 
for  the  listener,  none  the  less  real  that  it  is  unfash 
ionable  to  let  it  be  known.  In  music  of  this  class  the  • 
content  is  musical  thought  expressed  for  its  own  sake, ; 
thought  demanding  upon  the  part  of  the  listener  \ 
concentrated  attention  and  genuine  intellectual 
labor.  And,  yet,  even  here  the  emotional  element  is 
not  absent,  for  it  is  through  such  intellectual  activity 
that  the  purest  and  richest  aesthetic  emotion  is  to  be 
gained. 

Because  there  are  these  two  wellrciefilie.iasp_e.c_ts  to 
music,  and  because  they  are  utilized  in  such  varying 


206  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

proportions,  the  content  of  music  cannot  be  ex 
pressed  solely  in  terms  of  either.  Music  that  em 
ploys  in  the  main  these  impressive  attributes  of 
sense,  derives  its  value  chiefly  from  the  active  func 
tioning  of  the  emotional  consciousness.  The  dan 
ger  in  such  music  is  that  it  will  sacrifice  refinement 
for  intensity,  a  true  aesthetic  enjoyment  for  an  excit 
ing  emotional  reaction.  However,  these  factors  have 
their  proper  place  and  function  in  music  of  the  high 
est  type,  although  alone  they  are  not  sufficient. 

Music  of  the  sort  that  will  live  and  be  loved  per 
ennially,  that  does  not  grow  old,  that  tries  to  stimu 
late  the  mind  not  merely  effectively  but  aesthetically, 
must  do  so  by  finding  its  virtue  principally  in  these 
aesthetic  attributes.  The  sensuous  attributes,  one 
and  all,  may  then  be  present  to  aScTinterTsity  and 
warmth  and  life  to  further  the  effect  of  these  more 
intellectual  qualities.  But  without  the  latter  all  the 
impressiveness,  all  the  intensity,  all  the  dramatic 
power,  will  but  go  to  show  how  sadly  the  composer 
has  missed  the  true  purpose  and  function  of  art. 
The  reason  there  is  any  more  question  as  to  the  con 
tent  of  music  than  of  any  other  art  is  due  partly, 
doubtless,  to  the  non-conceptual  character  of  musi 
cal  symbolism,  but  also  partly  to  the  remarkable 
emotional  impressiveness  of  these  sensuous  factors. 
However,  they  alone  are  not  sufficient  to  produce 
masterpieces  in  this  art.  Not  strength,  but  refine 
ment  of  feeling  is  the  true  criterion  of  the  aesthetic 
experience.  And  this  in  its  greatest  purity  and 
beauty  can  be  obtained  only  in  these  aesthetic  attri 
butes.  The  future  of  music,  therefore,  we  dare  to  say, 
does  not  lie  in  the  conception  of  strongly  impression 
istic  "tone-poems,"  but  in  the  expression  of  clear, 
logical,  artistic  musical  thought. 


CHAPTER  X 

MUSICAL   CRITICISM 

I .  It  is  not  our  purpose  in  this  chapter  to  trespass 
on  the  rights  of  the  musical  critic  by  offering  sug 
gestions  as  to  the  canons  of  correct  musical  taste,  but 
rather  to  get  down  beneath  such  canons  to  examine 
the  principles  upon  which  they  rest  and  by  virtue  of 
which  they  have  authority.  Musical  criticism  being 
a  systematic  evaluation  of  individual  compositions, 
it  is  not  surprising  if  our  analysis  of  music  should 
throw  some  light  also  upon  the  subject  of  musical 
values.  Whether  or  not  this  presumption  is  justi 
fied  the  discussion  itself  will  decide. 

The  need  for  a  critical  examination  into  the 
grounds  of  musical  criticism  is  particularly  urgent.  In 
no  other  branch  of  art  criticism  is  there  less  unanim 
ity  of  opinion,  or  so  little  understanding  of  the  phil 
osophical  basis  upon  which  correct  judgment  must 
be  founded.  Musical  criticism  to-day  lacks  both  sys 
tem  and  authority,  and  the  difficulty  evidently  is 
that  there  is  no  common  and  philosophical  basis  for 
judgment  as  to  what  is  valuable  in  music.  Conse 
quently  individual  caprice  and  multifarious  opinions 
are  left  to  flaunt  themselves  where  there  should  be 
unanimity  and  authority.  It  is  not  long  since  one  of 
our  leading  comic  papers  .amused  itself  and  its  read 
ers  by  publishing  side  by  side  a  long  list  of  contradic 
tory  opinions  concerning  the  value  of  certain  musical 

207 


208  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

productions,  taken  from  the  musical  criticism  of  the 
leading  papers  of  the  metropolis  of  our  country. 

That  musical  criticism  is  in  a  sad  plight  no  one 
realizes  better  than  musical  critics  themselves.  Only 
a  few  months  ago  the  writer  read  with  interest  from 
the  pen  of  one  of  the  leading  critics  of  the  country  a 
jeremiad  upon  the  lamentably  unstable  condition  of 
musical  criticism.  That  conditions  are  as  they  are  is 
due  to  the  failure  to  get  down  beneath  individual 
opinion  and  caprice  to  the  fundamental  principles 
upon  which  there  can  be  general  agreement.  When 
such  a  starting-point  is  found,  then  and  then  only  can 
musical  criticism  firmly  establish  itself  for  systematic 
and  effective  work.  It  is  true  that  there  will  always 
be  room  for  difference  in  the  final  judgment,  but  that 
is  no  objection,  provided  good  reasons  based  upon 
some  tangible  principle  can  be  shown.  So  long  as 
such  principles  are  wanting,  however,  musical  criti 
cism  must  remain  in  its  present  purely  individualis 
tic  state,  a  condition  not  unlike  the  condition  mathe 
matics  would  be  in  without  its  axioms,  or  science 
without  its  postulates. 

That  there  are  such  principles,  provided  they  can 
only  be  found,  is  as  certain  as  that  music  is  a  true 
form  of  art,  and  that  art  has  its  own  definite  charac 
teristics  and  attributes.  If  there  are  principles  of 
literary  or  dramatic  criticism,  there  are  also  princi 
ples  of  musical  criticism.  And  it  certainly  behooves 
those  who  love  and  revere  this  art  to  lose  no  time 
in  seeking  for  the  unchanging  psychological  grounds 
upon  which  all  sane  and  telling  criticism  must  firmly 
rest. 

In  the  light  of  the  analysis  already  made,  the  sim 
plest  and  most  direct  method  of  proceeding  will  be  to 


MUSICAL   CRITICISM  209 

take  up  in  order  the  elements  of  music,  rhythm, 
melody,  and  harmony,  and  inquire  as  to  their  rela 
tive  aesthetic  value,  and  for  the  criteria  of  worth  for 
each  in  its  own  proper  sphere. 

2.  So  far  as  the  analysis  has  gone,  it  goes  to  show 
that  of  these  three  elements  of  music,  rhythm  in  its 
absolute  aesthetic  value  ranks  lowest  in  the  scale. 
That  it  has  a  legitimate  place  and  an  important 
function  in  music  is  not  to  be  denied ;  that  it  possesses 
unusual  power  as  a  stimulus  for  the  emotional  con 
sciousness  is  also  quite  evident ;  but  in  itself  consid 
ered,  and  for  its  own  sake,  its  artistic  worth  is  not  pro 
portionate  to  its  emotional  effectiveness.  That  it  has 
an  important  place  also  in  the  economy  of  the  vital 
processes  of  life  has  been  shown  to  be  a  well-estab 
lished  fact,  but  biological  standards  of  value  are  not 
artistic  standards,  nor  are  they  interchangeable.  In 
fact  its  emotional  effectiveness  and  the  striking  re 
flex  response  it  elicits  from  the  listener  are  doubtless 
the  source  of  the  popular  misapprehension  as  to  its 
inherent  artistic  value.  A  brief  resume  of  the  essen 
tial  facts  brought  out  in  our  analysis  will  suffice  to 
justify  the  conclusion  that  it  is  distinctly  below 
melody  and  harmony  qualitatively  considered. 

Susceptibility  to  rhythm,  it  has  been  shown,  is  in 
stinctive  and  the  response  elicited  is  more  reflex  than 
reflective.  This,  it  is  needless  to  say,  is  an  attribute 
belonging  to  the  order  of  lower  organic  reactions,  not 
to  those  of  the  higher,  more  intellectual  type.  The 
basis  for  the  one  is  in  nerve  centres  controlling  muscu 
lar  action,  while  the  basis  for  the  other  is  in  the  higher 
centres  connected,  we  know  not  how,  with  the  func 
tioning  of  mind  in  its  more  abstractly  intellectual  and 
emotional  activities. 


2lo  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

It  does  not  require  any  strenuous  intellectual  activ 
ity  to  respond  to  the  palpable  rhythm  of  "ragtime" 
or  the  popular  waltz  or  two-step.  The  mind,  under 
!,  the  stimulus  of  such  music,  is  essentially  passive, 
stimulated  to  an  emotional  activity,  but  in  a  niean- 
\mgless  way.  In  such  music  the  melody  is  usually  but 
indifferently  good  or  positively  poor,  though  which 
ever  it  is,  the  strong  rhythm  overshadows  it  so  that 
it  loses  its  effect.  And  as  to  the  harmonic  factor 
Parry  says,  "Dance  music  demands  very  little  in  the 
way  of  harmony.  The  world  would  go  on  dancing  to 
the  end  of  time  without  it ;  and  whatever  harmony 
is  added  to  pure  dance  tunes,  even  in  days  of  ad 
vanced  art,  is  generally  of  the  simplest  and  most 
obvious  character."  Reaction  to  rhythm,  therefore, 
though  strongly  emotional,  is  an  activity  containing 
only  a  minimum  of  genuine  intellectual  elements, 
and  is  in  this  respect  distinctly  below  both  melody 
and  harmony. 

That  rhythm  serves  but  a  subordinate  function  in 
art  is  further  established  by  the  fact  that  it  relates 
more  to  the  form  of  a  wrork  of  art  than  to  its  content, 
and  that  alone  it  has  little  or  no  real  artistic  value. 
Rhythm  can  enhance  the  artistic  value  of  a  poem, 
for  example,  but  the  rhythm  without  the  thought  is 
meaningless.  Rhythm  is  essential  to  the  dance,  but 
without  the  animated  living  forms  it  loses  all  its 
charm;  the  rhythmic  movement  of  machinery  in 
itself  does  not  fascinate  or  produce  any  lasting  aesthe 
tic  emotion.  In  the  same  way  rhythm  in  music, 
though  it  has  its  proper  function  and  heightens  the 
artistic  effect  produced,  does  so  by  putting  its  stamp 
upon  a  content  that  is  in  itself  genuinely  intellectual. 
Rhythm  alone,  as  found  in  the  most  primitive  forms 


MUSICAL  CRITICISM  211 

of  music,  is  not  art  but  merely  an  effective  mode  of 
emotional  stimulation.  The  truth  we  are  interested 
to  stress  will  be  clearer  from  a  possible  classification 
of  music  based  upon  the  presence  and  value  of 
rhythm  alone. 

3.  First,  music  of  the  primitive  sort,  preponder- 
atingly  rhythmical,  either  in  monotone  or  with  sim 
ple  melodic  figures,  which,  repeated  over  and  over, 
serve  to  further  accentuate  the  rhythmic  element. 
Second,  music  in  which  both  melodic  or  harmonic 
factors  are  found,  and  yet  in  which  the  rhythmic 
element  is  still  predominant,  as  in  popular  music  and 
in  dance  tunes  referred  to  above.  Third,  music  in 
which  the  rhythmic  factor  is  still  pronounced,  and 
yet  not  so  powerful  as  to  overshadow  the  melodic 
and  harmonic  elements  which  are  here  of  a  higher 
order  than  in  music  belonging  to  the  preceding 
classes.  Under  this  head  would  come  many  of  the 
world's  national  songs,  like  Die  Wacht  am  Rhein,  La 
Marseillaise,  etc.,  marches  and  spirited  music  of  the 
higher  order.  The  essential  difference  between  music 
of  this  class  and  of  the  class  just  preceding  is  that 
here  there  is  a  logical  and  an  artistic  justification  for 
the  rhythm  in  which  the  composition  is  written,  while 
in  the  former  case  there  is  not.  For  example,  the 
heroic  element  is  an  integral  part  of  patriotism,  and 
music  representing  this  fine  feeling  should  reflect  this 
essential  element ;  the  pronounced  rhythm  does  this, 
though  not  to  the  exclusion  of  melodic  and  harmonic 
virtues.  Consequently  the  pronounced  rhythm  is  not 
an  intrusion,  or  a  meaningless  excitation,  but  a  part 
of  a  consistent  artistic  idea.  Then  fourth,  and 
finally,  there  is  music  in  which  the  rhythm  is  less 
pronounced,  more  subtle  but  still  serves  a  definite 


212  THE   PHILOSOPHY   OF   MUSIC 

artistic  function.  Here  as  before  the  rhythmic  factor 
exists  not  merely  as  an  effective  means  of  emotional 
excitation,  but  as  a  most  delicate,  most  subtle  in 
strument  for  stimulating  the  emotions  in  their  most 
refined  nuances.  The  end  of  rhythm  in  such  music 
is  to  accentuate  the  beauty  of  the  structural  element 
by  a  direct  control  of  the  mood  under  which  this 
beauty  will  be  most  effectively  apprehended.  It 
thus  serves  a  definite  and  an  important  artistic  pur 
pose. 

Music  of  the  first  class,  dependent  upon  rhythm 
almost  exclusively  for  its  effect,  as  a  matter  of  fact 
has  no  just  claim  to  be  placed  in  the  category  of  art 
at  all.  Its  function  is  not  artistic,  but  mere  emo 
tional  excitation  of  the  cruder  sort. 

Music  of  the  second  class,  in  which  the  rhythmic 
factor  is  still  predominant,  at  the  expense  of  melodic 
and  harmonic  elements,  marks  a  step  in  musical 
development,  but  hardly  a  transition  to  the  true 
realm  of  art.  It  is  true  that  in  music  of  this  class 
the  melody  may  be  "catchy,"  and  clever,  as  it  was 
for  example  in  the  hilarious  Hiawatha,  a  composition 
that  lived  both  broadly  and  vigorously  for  a  time, 
but  only  briefly.  The  rhythm  in  such  music  is  still 
obtrusive  and  forms  the  principal  source  of  its 
attraction  and  charm.  But  such  forms  of  stimu 
lation  soon  pall,  and  music  that  depends  for  its 
charm  upon  such  a  factor  soon  goes  to  a  deserved 
oblivion.  In  any  true  form  of  art  there  must  be 
elements  of  perduring  worth,  truth  that  wakes  to 
perish  never,  beauty  that  time  cannot  destroy. 
Such  truth,  such  beauty  is  not  found,  or  has  not 
been  found  as  yet,  by  emphasizing  the  rhythmic  factor 
at  the  expense  of  the  other  two  elements  of  music. 


MUSICAL   CRITICISM  213 

In  music  of  the  third  class  there  is  a  balancing 
of  musical  factors  that  leans  more  to  the  side  of  art. 
The  rhythm  is  still  plainly  evident,  but  it  is  not  the 
dominating  element  as  heretofore.  The  principality 
now  lies  in  the  melodic  and  harmonic  factors  and  the 
rhythm  is  used — and  this  is  the  redeeming  fact — 
not  merely  to  excite  the  mind  for  the  sake  of  the 
excitation,  as  alcoholic  beverages  are  sometimes 
taken,  but  for  the  sake  of  producing  a  definite  result 
as  was  shown  above.  It  now  has  a  true  artistic 
raison  d'etre. 

In  the  last  division  of  our  classification  this  use 
is  further  exemplified,  only  in  more  subtle  forms. 
Thus  it  passes  from  the  primitive  function  of  a 
crude  emotional  excitant  and  becomes  a  legitimate 
element  of  art,  but,  as  has  been  said,  its  function  is 
even  here  a  subordinate  one,  and  to  over-emphasize 
it  for  the  sake,  of  its  emotional  effectiveness,  is  to  be 
false  to  the  first  principles  of  true  art. 

4.  Our  psychological  examination  of  melody  led 
us  to  the  conclusion  that  it  is  par  excellence  the 
thought  element  in  music.  It  is  true  that  there  is 
in  the  higher  forms  of  music  an  intellectual  element 
in  rhythm,  and  that  harmony  like  melody  is  a  pure 
product  of  the  creative  imagination.  Notwith 
standing  this  fact,  however,  the  analogy  between 
melody  and  conceptual  thought  is  more  extended 
and  more  vital  than  it  is  between  these  other  ele 
ments  of  music.  Melody,  like  conceptual  thought, 
is  indissolubly  connected  with  time  relations,  both 
being  inherently  phenomena  in  time.  Musical 
phrases  and  periods,  essentially  melodic  factors, 
like  the  elements  of  language,  follow  each  other 
successively;  also,  they  stand  in  definite  ascertain- 


214  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

able — shall  we  not  say — logical  relations  to  each 
other,  successive  phrases  and  periods  amplifying, 
illustrating,  expounding  the  principal  theme  or  sub 
ject.  The  bond  which  unites  them  into  an  aesthetic 
whole  is  also  closely  akin  to  the  abstract  bond  that 
unifies  the  elements  of  discursive  thought.  In 
neither  is  the  source  of  unity  a  datum  of  sense, 
but  an  abstract  relationship,  to  be  detected  and  ap 
preciated  only  through  the  functioning  of  the  higher 
powers  of  mental  activity. 

Historically,  also,  the  conclusion  that  melody  is 
jthe  most  distinctive  thought  element  in  music  is 
justified.  Before  harmony  was  born  the  principles 
of  melody  resting  upon  the  tonal  relations  of  the 
scale  were  firmly  established,  and  the  principles  of 
structural  unity  fully  recognized.  The  introduction 
and  development  of  harmony  as  an  additional  ele 
ment  in  music  did  not  invalidate  or  obviate  the 
position  melody  had  held  as  the  thought  element  of 
music.  Harmony  was  utilized  to  enrich  melody, 
not  to  supplant  it.  Thus  the  primacy  of  melody 
as  the  thought  element  in  music  has  not  been  lost. 
Whether  or  not  an  exception  to  this  fact  is  found  in 
the  more  radical  forms  of  modern  music  is  a  point  we 
shall  not  here  engage  to  decide.  When  it  shall  have 
been  more  definitely  shown  that  this  movement  is 
in  the  direction  of  permanent  advance,  there  will 
be  time  enough  to  examine  this  question  further. 

In  characterizing  the  melodic  element  in  music 
as  the  thought  element  of  this  art,  we  have  ascribed 
to  it  a  high  place  in  the  scale  of  musical  values. 
Though  its  thought  content  is  not  the  sole,  nor  the 
ultimate  test  of  a  work  of  art,  a  work  of  art  can 
hardly  be  a  masterpiece  unless  it  represents  some 


MUSICAL   CRITICISM  215 

truth  of  commanding  importance.  Great  art  is  a 
vision  of  some  great  truth,  and  truth  is  a  relation 
apprehended  and  appreciated  through  the  cognitive 
powers  of  the  mind.  Art  is  not  truth  for  truth's 
sake,  and  yet,  as  has  been  shown,  significance  is  one 
of  the  most  important  aesthetic  attributes.  Art 
without  thought  significance  is  almost  sure  to  be 
vapid,  ephemeral,  and  soon  becomes  a  weariness  to 
the  flesh,  not  a  source  of  mental  inspiration  and  de 
light.  Moreover,  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the 
appreciation  of  thought  relations  is  the  source  of  an 
aesthetic  pleasure,  pure  and  permanent,  not  to  be 
gained  by  an  appeal  to  the  more  dramatic  elements 
of  sense. 

Applied  to  the  case  in  hand,  this  means  that  music 
that  lays  stress  upon  the  melodic  factor,  music 
whose  palpable  virtues  are  melodic,  is  superior  in 
artistic  worth  to  that  which  emphasizes  chiefly  the 
rhythmic  element.  Intrinsically,  melody  is  of  higher 
worth  than  rhythm  or  of  any  of  the  purely  sensuous 
elements.  This  is  not  said  to  disparage  the  sense 
elements,  but  to  exalt  the  thought  content.  This 
does  not  mean  that  rhythm  does  not  have  its  proper 
and  indispensable  function,  nor  that  simple  melodic 
music  is  the  highest  type  of  music;  it  does  mean, 
however,  that  music  that  accentuates  the  thought 
element,  that  finds  its  value  whether  in  simple  beau 
tiful  melody  or  in  the  more  complex  development 
of  theme  or  motive,  is  on  a  higher  plane  than  music 
that  appeals  primarily  to  strong  instinctive  ten 
dencies  in  man,  such  as  rhythm,  or  to  other  sensuous 
qualities  of  sound  as  sound.  Music  that  emphasizes 
these  sensuous,  dramatic  elements  will  almost  cer 
tainly  be  both  effective  and  popular,  but  if  this  is 


2l6  THE  PHILOSOPHY   OF  MUSIC 

all,  or  the  principal  source  of  its  appeal,  it  fails  to 
measure  up  to  the  standard  and  dignity  of  a  true 
work  of  art. 

5.  But  this,  however,  is  only  the  starting-point; 
for  further  progress  suitable  standards  applicable  to 
each  individual  composition  must  be  agreed  upon. 

The  nature  of  these  criteria  of  value  for  melody 
is  determined  by  the  nature  of  melody  itself.  In  the 
chapter  above  dealing  with  this  subject  such  criteria 
have  already  been  enumerated.  If  we  accept  the 
conclusion  there  maintained,  that  melody  is  in  a 
unique  way  the  thought  element  in  music,  then  these 
criteria  of  melodic  value  are  the  criteria  of  the 
thought  value  of  any  other  work  of  art.  The  value 
of  any  melody,  therefore,  or  of  any  thought  element 
in  music,  is  to  be  determined  by  examining  it  with 
reference  to  its  unity,  its  originality,  its  .significance, 
its  strength,  its  gracefulness,  etc.  The  way  in  which 
these  attributes  will  be  expressed  in  music  will  be 
different  from  their  expression  in  the  other  arts,  but 
this  does  not  alter  their  character  nor  their  psycho 
logical  effect.  They  can  be  taken,  therefore,  for  the 
criteria  of  value  in  music  just  as  they  are  accepted 
as  the  criteria  of  value  in  any  other  form  of  art. 

The  relation  of  these  attributes  to  one  another, 
the  proportion  in  which  they  shall  exist  in  works  of 
artistic  merit,  cannot  be  definitely  fixed.  There  is 
the  greatest  freedom  and  variation  as  to  just  which 
quality  in  a  given  work  of  art  shall  be  predominant, 
and  to  what  extent  the  others  shall  be  present  and 
how  much  they  shall  be  emphasized.  However, 
certain  general  conclusions  can  be  formulated  and 
affirmed  with  confidence.  It  is  safe  to  say,  for  ex 
ample,  that  no  one  of  these  qualities  alone,  to  what- 


MUSICAL   CRITICISM  217 

ever  marked  degree  it  may  be  present,  is  sufficient 
to  give  a  composition  standing  as  a  masterpiece  nor 
even  as  a  work  of  art.  Unity  will  not  suffice,  nor 
originality,  nor  grace,  nor  strength,  nor  any  other 
one  attribute,  however  important  it  may  be.  Origi 
nality  may  be  the  vagaries  of  a  disordered  brain; 
unity  is  an  attribute  of  logical  as  well  as  of  artistic 
significance;  profundity  of  thought  is  a  quality  of 
value,  but  it  may  be  altogether  independent  of  art. 
And  so  we  might  go  through  the  list  but  never  find 
in  any  one  of  these  attributes  the  secret  of  a  true 
art  conception.  Unity  is  perhaps  of  them  all  the 
only  one  that  is  really  indispensable.  The  others 
may  be  important,  and  each  will  add  something  of 
aesthetic  value  not  provided  for  in  any  other  way; 
but  gracefulness  may  take  the  place  of  originality 
and  strength,  or  significance  in  the  subject  matter 
may  so  excuse  blatant  faults  in  the  elements  of  style 
that  the  work  though  marred  is  esteemed  immor 
tally  great.  Thus  it  is  obviously  true  that  a  work 
of  art  is  not  to  be  judged  according  to  any  fixed  rule 
or  pattern.  Every  work  of  art,  being  a  true  work  of 
creation,  must  be  judged  for  its  own  value.  There 
are  no  patterns  in  art,  though  we  are  endeavoring 
to  establish  certain  principles.  Because  of  the  rich 
and  varied  character  of  these  aesthetic  elements 
there  is  always  the  possibility  for  some  new  and 
forceful  combination.  Thus  new  movements  in 
art,  new  schools  rise  now  and  then  to  disturb  our 
narrow  and  fixed  preconceptions,  surprise  or  shock 
us  for  the  time  by  their  unfamiliarity,  but  soon 
are  given  a  place  in  our  ideas  of  what  true  art  may 
include.  The  standard  of  art  in  its  details  is  not 
a  fixed,  but  a  developing  ideal.  Elements  that  may 


2i8  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

be  approved  to-day  are  obsolete  to-morrow,  and 
those  which  meet  with  invective  to-day  are  hailed 
as  precursors  of  a  great  movement  to-morrow. 
There  is  no  way  accurately  to  gauge  popular  ap 
proval  in  these  details,  but  the  principles  of  art 
fixed  in  the  mind  are  inviolable,  unchangeable,  the 
bed-rock  upon  which  criticism  must  firmly  take 
its  stand. 

6.  The  comparative  value  of  harmony  in  the 
trinity  of  musical  elements  is  also  to  be  determined 
by  its  inherent  character  and  by  what  it  adds  to 
music.  A  cursory  survey  of  its  place  in  modern 
music  leaves  the  impression  that  it  is  second  in 
importance  neither  to  rhythm  nor  to  melody.  Is 
it  not  to  the  harmonic  element  that  modern  music 
owes  its  distinction,  and  in  it  finds  its  greatest 
possibilities  for  development  and  for  beauty  ?  Is 
it  not  in  this  element  that  the  modern  world  finds 
its  sole  claim  to  have  originated  and  developed  a 
new  form  of  art  ?  Take  from  modern  music  all 
that  harmony  gives,  and  all  the  glory  and  most  of 
the  beauty  are  gone  forever;  and  this  not  merely 
because  modern  music  has  been  conceived  and 
written  under  the  form  of  harmony,  but  because 
harmony  adds  to  music  elements  of  beauty  and  power 
that  can  be  found  nowhere  else.  Thus  it  would 
appear,  that  since  modern  music  is  the  highest 
manifestation  of  the  musical  art,  and  modern  music 
'finds  its  essential  characteristics  inseparably  bound 
up  with  harmony,  harmony  ipso  facto  is  the  element 
of  superlative  worth.  But  such  a  general  line  of 
argument,  though  it  is  not  without  its  value,  is  not 
sufficient  for  the  present  discussion.  We  must  look 
at  the  matter,  therefore,  from  another  point  of  view. 


MUSICAL  CRITICISM  219 

What,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  has  harmony  added  to 
music,  and  what  is  the  true  valuation  of  such  ele 
ments  ? 

In  the  chapter  on  Harmony  it  was  asserted  that 
harmony  (i)  adds  sensuous  beauty  to  music;  (2) 
that  it  serves  to  enrich  melody,  and  (3)  that  it  forms, 
as  it  were,  a  new  medium  in  which  musical  thought 
is  conceived  and  expressed.  If  such  are  the  uses 
of  harmony  in  modern  music,  its  artistic  value  must 
lie  therein,  and  can  be  evaluated  approximately  by 
noticing  the  aesthetic  significance  of  each. 

Since  every  work  of  art  must  be  a  concrete, 
sensuous  form,  there  must  be  some  virtue  inherent 
in  these  sensuous  attributes  indispensable  for  a 
truly  aesthetic  reaction.  The  Law  of  Gravitation 
and  Kepler's  Laws  of  Motion  as  forms  of  thought 
are  beautiful  conceptions  in  the  abstract,  but  they 
are  not  works  of  art,  nor  do  they  suffice  to  produce 
a  genuinely  aesthetic  experience;  they  are  too  ab 
stract,  too  impersonal,  to  produce  the  warmth  and 
vigor  requisite  for  such  experience.  Or  again, 
though  the  sublime  in  art  can  be  gained  only  by  the 
representation  of  some  profound  truth  of  life,  some 
representation  of  an  inner  human  experience,  the 
representation  itself  must  be  made  in  some  concrete, 
individual  form.  Great  art  must  be  an  expression 
of  a  great  truth,  and  yet  it  is  worthy  of  note  that  the 
masterful,  artistic  representation  of  sensuous  attri 
butes  in  themselves  and  for  their  own  sake  is  a  very 
common  and  withal  a  legitimate  justification  of  a 
very  large  number,  if  not,  indeed,  the  majority  of 
the  pictures  we  find  in  modern  exhibitions.  Color, 
light  and  shadow,  atmosphere,  perspective,  draw 
ing,  compositions,  etc.,  are  the  aim  and  end  of 


220  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF   MUSIC 

thousands  upon  thousands  of  paintings  found  in 
our  galleries  to-day.  Van  Dyke's  A rt  for  A  rt's  Sake, 
to  mention  a  well-known  treatise  on  art,  leaves  the 
impression  that  this  is  even  the  greater  part  of  art. 
Nor  is  this  aspect  of  the  subject  trivial  or  unim 
portant.  Great  colorists  in  all  the  roll  of  painters, 
we  are  told,  are  but  a  scanty  dozen  or  so,  because  of 
the  inherent  difficulty  of  mastering  even  this  one 
sensuous  attribute.  And  its  value  when  attained 
is,  from  the  painter's  point  of  view,  fully  com 
mensurate  with  the  difficulty  of  its  attainment. 
Thus  in  painting,  certainly,  the  sensuous  side  of 
this  art  is  of  sufficient  importance  to  merit  the 
highest  consideration  and  to  serve  as  a  proper 
sphere  of  effort  for  the  talent  and  energies  of  the 
artist. 

And  yet  it  is  to  be  remembered  that  the  great 
masterpieces  that  rise  to  the  sublime  touch  a  deeper 
strain.  But  in  itself  the  sensuous  is  important, 
though  not  sublime. 

Thus  while  it  is  evident  that  we  cannot  give  to 
harmony  because  of  the  increased  sensuous  beauty 
it  gives  to  music  the  first  place  in  the  scale  of  musi 
cal  value,  it  is  proper  to  recognize  its  legitimate 
function  and  not  to  disparage  what  is  beautiful 
merely  because  it  is  sensuous. 

The  second  use  of  harmony  given,  viz.,  enrich 
ment  of  melody,  also  fails  to  show  that  harmony 
has  any  clear  title  to  precedence  in  the  evaluation 
of  the  elements  of  music.  The  phrase  itself  suggests 
that  it  serves  only  in  a  subordinate  position,  that 
instead  of  expressing  the  essence  of  music  it  is  used 
j  more  as  a  decorative  feature.  It  adds  to  the  beauty 
and  value  of  music,  but  it  does  so  by  enhancing  the 

\ 


MUSICAL  CRITICISM  221 

value  of  an  element  that  is  more  elemental  and,  pre 
sumably,  more  fundamental. 

There  remains,  however,  one  other  claim  of  har 
mony  to  be  examined,  namely,  its  value  as  a  new 
medium  of  musical  thought  and  expression. 

That  the  richness,  the  fulness,  the  power,  the 
beauty,  and  even  the  thought  content  of  an  art 
depend  vitally  upon  the  medium  in  which  it  is  ex 
pressed  is  a  conclusion  that  admits  of  little  doubt. 
Illustrations  of  this  truth  are  legion,  examples  being 
found  not  only  in  the  case  of  every  art,  but  also  in 
the  wider  field  of  all  linguistic  expression.  The 
arts  each  have  their  own  proper  subjects  because  of 
the  nature  of  the  medium  in  which  that  art  finds 
expression.  We  shall  let  one  illustration  suffice. 

In  painting,  the  principal  idea,  the  thought  con 
tent,  can  usually  be  expressed  in  black  and  white, 
that  is,  without  the  aid  of  color.  Prints  and  photo 
graphs  of  the  Madonnas  of  Raphael  or  of  the  frescoes 
of  Michael  Angelo,  for  example,  if  carefully  studied, 
will  enable  one  who  has  never  seen  the  originals  to 
get  a  fairly  accurate  and  adequate  conception  of  the 
thought  and  genius  of  these  two  masters.  Even 
without  the  color — which  most  of  us  without  train 
ing  would  not  appreciate — the  ideas  and  ideals  of 
these  two  men  are  obvious  enough.  But  even  so, 
<ve  do  not  compass  the  whole  purpose  and  province 
of  painting;  all  the  beauty,  the  harmony,  the  vital 
touch  which  color  gives  is  of  course  denied  to  him 
who  thus  becomes  acquainted  with  art.  If  not  all 
that  they  prize  and  strive  in  the  concrete  to  realize, 
so  much  is  gone  that  artists  themselves  would  feel 
that  such  a  method  of  studying  art  is  most  frag 
mentary  and  incomplete.  The  difficulty  is  that 


222  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

color  is  a  new  medium  that  defies  adequate  descrip 
tion  or  representation.  For  the  new  elements  it 
introduces  and  for  the  effect  they  produce  upon  the 
mind  there  is  no  substitute.  The  vitality  due  to 
color,  the  color-harmony,  the  sensuous  effect  of  the 
color  scheme,  are  all  integral  parts  of  the  artist's 
conception,  and  without  color  all  of  these  are  irrep 
arably  lost. 

The  same  principle  applies  to  music,  though  even 
in  a  more  vital  way.  Harmony  not  only  adds  to 
the  sensuous  beauty  of  music,  and  accentuates  and 
augments  the  beauty  and  force  of  the  melodic 
factor,  but  it  furnishes  music  with  a  new  element,  a 
new  medium,  in  which  ideas  are  conceived,  wrought 
out  to  more  varied,  more  perfect  forms,  and  ex 
pressed.  As  a  new  element  it  has  its  own  inherent 
attributes  and  laws,  but  it  also  opens  up  new  possi 
bilities  for  musical  thought.  In  it  musicians  have 
found  such  opportunities  for  development  and  for 
the  elaboration  of  new  forms  of  beauty  that  it  has 
indeed  been,  in  this  respect,  not  the  means  of  in 
augurating  a  new  departure  in  music,  but  the  means 
of  creating  what  is  essentially  a  new  art.  It  has 
made  possible  sensuous  beauty  never  before  even 
dreamed  of,  it  has  brought  to  melody  the  richest 
boon;  but,  more  than  that,  it  has  revealed  a  new 
world  of  musical  relationships,  in  which  musicians 
find  the  richest  beauty,  the  most  profound  thought, 
the  most  perfect  works  of  art.  It  is  in  this  revelation 
,  of  a  new  world  for  musical  thought  that  its  true 
greatness  lies,  and  here  that  it  can  best  justify  its 
claim  to  be  the  highest  element  in  music.  So  com 
pletely  has  harmony  conquered  the  field,  so  universal 
has  the  custom  become  of  conceiving  musical  thought 


MUSICAL  CRITICISM  223 

i  i  terms  of  harmony,  such  is  the  wealth  of  new 
musical  relation  it  alone  makes  possible,  that  we 
must  admit  its  exalted  worth.  This  does  not  mean, 
however,  that  it  is  to  possess  the  field  solely  and 
completely,  or  that  the  principles  of  musical  form, 
principles  essentially  melodic  in  character,  are  now 
or  ever  will  be  obsolete.  Color  has  not  obviated 
form  in  painting,  but  only  enabled  it  to  realize  its 
latent  possibilities.  And  so  it  will  be  in  music; 
harmony  has  not  superseded  melodic  form,  but 
only  opens  up  the  way  through  which  music  as  a 
form  of  thought  is  to  manifest  its  highest  esthetic 
worth. 

7.  In  conclusion,  we  pause  to  look  back  over  the 
way  our  argument  has  led  and  to  gather  up  the 
threads  that  have  now  and  then  appeared  through 
out  the  discussion.  If  some  of  the  conclusions  seem 
trite  and  without  significance,  let  it  be  remembered 
that  they  are  given  not  so  much  for  instruction  as 
for  doctrine,  to  show  that  the  principles  thus  formu 
lated  apply  to  the  whole  field  of  music,  and  not 
merely  to  music  in  its  more  specialized  forms. 

We  conclude:  (i)  that  the  true  goal  of  music  is  not 
found  in  its  sensuous  impressiveness.  It  has  been 
shown  that  music  due  to  the  medium  of  its  expression 
and  to  the  biological  significance  of  that  medium 
has  remarkable  dramatic  power,  that  it  thus  has  a 
direct  and  potent  influence  over  consciousness  not 
equalled  in  any  other  art.  This  influence,  depending 
upon  racial  factors,  is  inherited  and  therefore  in 
stinctive.  There  is  opportunity,  therefore,  by  means 
of  these  various  factors,  for  playing  upon  the  emo 
tions  with  the  most  intense  and  demonstrative 
effect.  But  the  true  goal  of  music  does  not  lie  in 


224  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

this  direction;  to  regard  this  sensuous  impressive- 
ness  as  the  measure  of  musical  worth  is  plainly  to 
revert  to  primitive  standards  and  to  give  up  alle 
giance  to  the  ideals  of  thought  for  which  the  race 
has  contended  and  striven  through  long  cycles  of 
mental  development.  The  standards  of  highest 
worth  in  art  are  not  independent  of  the  ideals  in 
other  realms  of  thought,  but,  on  the  contrary,  de 
pendent  upon  them  in  the  most  intimate  way. 
To  look  for  the  ideals  of  music  in  its  sensuous 
impressiveness,  therefore,  is  to  be  false  to  the  first 
principles  of  mental  growth. 

The  true  function  of  sensuous  impressiveness  in 
music  is  closely  analogous  to  the  place  of  pleasure 
in  ethics.  Pleasure  is  a  good  and  not  to  be  despised, 
except  as  it  conflicts  with  some  higher  standards 
of  value.  It  is  only  when  it  would  arrogate  to 
itself  the  honor  of  the  highest  good  that  it  deserves 
the  condemnation  of  the  ascetic.  As  a  means  it  is 
to  be  highly  esteemed;  it  is  a  witness  of  physical 
welfare,  a  safeguard  to  health,  a  spur  to  action,  and 
an  incentive  to  right  conduct.  But  as  the  end,  the 
Summum  Bonum,  its  dignity,  its  inherent  psycho 
logical  character,  its  transient  nature,  its  inde 
pendence  of  the  intellect  in  so  many  forms,  all 
declare  its  inadequacy.  So  it  is  with  sensuous 
impressiveness  in  music.  In  itself  it  is  a  source  of 
pleasure,  a  source  of  power;  but  let  it  try  to  assume 
the  dignity  of  the  true  end,  and  at  once  its  lower 
birth  and  character  make  it  the  object  of  attack 
for  the  merest  novice  in  the  principles  of  psycho 
logical  and  philosophical  analysis. 

(2)  Though  in  itself  eminently  desirable,  and  fror.- 
the  (Esthetic  point  of  view  valuable,  even  sensuous 


MUSICAL   CRITICISM  225 

beauty  is  not  the  end  of  music  nor  the  final  test  of  the 
musical  worth  of  a  composition.  By  sensuous  beauty 
we  comprehend  such  elements  as  the  beauty  and 
charm  of  simple  melody,  the  consonance  and  in 
creased  sound  beauty  of  harmony,  timbre,  palpable 
conformity  to  the  elemental  requirements  of  musical 
form,  the  simpler  forms  of  balance,  etc.  It  is  upon 
the  issue  involved  in  this  point  that  the  musician 
and  the  philosopher  are  apt  to  differ  radically.  This, 
it  will  be  remembered,  was  the  question  upon  which 
the  two  schools,  the  Formalists  and  the  Expression 
ists,  were  divided.  To  ascribe  the  real  end  of  music 
to  sensuous  beauty  is  to  over-emphasize  the  ob 
jective  attributes  at  the  expense  of  its  psycho 
logical  or  subjective  qualities.  But  this  you  urge 
is  no  argument;  as  well  place  the  final  criteria  of 
worth  in  the  objective  as  the  subjective.  True 
enough  if  this  were  the  whole  truth.  The  fact  is, 
however,  that  these  objective  attributes  do  not  have 
meaning  or  value,  except  as  interpreted  as  symbolic 
for  the  needs  of  the  perceiving  mind.  Then,  again, 
it  is  true  that  though  developed  to  the  highest 
degree,  without  some  deep  significant  thought  con 
tent,  these  sensuous  qualities  will  not  suffice  to 
place  a  work  in  the  highest  rank.  Their  effect  upon 
the  mind  is  too  fleeting,  too  ephemeral,  too  super 
ficial  to  represent  the  deepest  truth  in  art. 

(3)  The  analysis  made,  all  goes  to  show  that  in  the 
evaluation  of  musical  factors  the  virtues  of  musical 
form  rank  high.  In  the  first  place,  it  is  impossible 
to  have  content  without  form;  and  in  order  that 
the  content  may  be  readily  and  easily  apprehended — 
an  essential  requirement  in  art — it  must  be  ex 
pressed  in  an  intelligible,  pleasing  manner.  Form, 


226  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

therefore,  is  the  indispensable  condition  for  the  proper 
expression  of  thought.  Again,  form  in  music  is 
what  order,  proportion,  symmetry  are  in  architecture, 
or  what  logical  development  is  in  the  drama  or  the 
novel;  it  is  the  plan,  the  logical  arrangement  of 
parts,  the  structural  order,  the  system  that  redeems 
musical  compositions  from  being  disjointed,  hetero 
geneous,  chaotic,  meaningless,  babels  of  sound,  and 
makes  them  definite,  intelligible,  organized,  unified 
works  of  art.  Form,  therefore,  is  not  only  a  pre 
condition  for  the  expression  of  thought,  but  a  form 
of  thought  itself  and  as  such  productive  in  the  mind 
of  a  pure,  intellectual  form  of  aesthetic  emotion. 

(4)  The  final  test  (not  the  sole  one,  however)  of  the 
value  of  a  musical  composition  is  the  inherent  worth 
of  its  thought  content.  Just  as  in  literature  no  virtues 
of  style  have  ever  sufficed,  independent  of  a  deep, 
significant  thought  content,  to  give  first  rank  to 
literary  productions,  so  in  music  the  ultimate  test 
of  greatness  is  the  worth  of  the  thought  expressed. 
Of  such  manifest  importance  to  consciousness  are 
the  things  pertaining  to  itself  that  it  ascribes  highest 
value  only  to  those  qualities  and  attributes  which 
plainly  relate  to  its  own  aims  and  ends.  Call  it 
anthropomorphism  or  egoism  or  an  inherent  preju 
dice  of  consciousness,  or  whatever  you  will,  the 
fact  remains  that  qualities  and  attributes  are  thus 
evaluated.  The  whole  trend  of  art  and  of  art 
development  to  a  certain  extent  justifies  this  pro 
cedure,  for  from  its  inception  until  now  art  has 
to  a  larger  and  larger  degree  found  its  proper  con 
tent,  not  in  mere  objective  forms,  but  in  subjective 
ideas  and  ideals.  Literature  develops  from  the 
epic  to  the  drama,  from  mere  descriptions  of  objective 


MUSICAL  CRITICISM  227 

scene  or  act  to  the  most  subtle  psychological  anal 
ysis  of  motives,  of  consciousness,  and  of  character. 
Painting  passes  from  the  crude  representation  of 
form  and  action  to  the  representation  of  the  deepest 
emotions  and  the  most  profound  depths  of  character. 
Music  also  has  followed  the  same  line  of  progress 
and  has  led  from  an  undue  stress  given  to  sense 
elements,  to  a  form  of  art  in  which  genuine  thought 
relations  are  the  mark  of  the  highest  worth. 

What  some  of  these  thought  relations  are  has 
been  pointed  out  in  our  discussion  of  the  aesthetic 
attributes  of  music.  To  form  correct  judgments  of 
musical  value,  to  apply  the  standards  we  have 
attempted  to  enumerate,  is  the  proper  work  of  the 
musical  critic,  not  of  the  student  of  musical  aesthetics. 
We  leave  this  aspect  of  the  problem,  therefore,  to 
those  to  whom  it  properly  belongs. 

There  is  one  caution,  however,  to  which  attention 
must  be  called  before  we  conclude.  While  we  have 
thus  introduced  distinctions  of  worth  among  the 
various  attributes  and  qualities  of  music,  this  does 
not  imply  that  any  one  is  sufficient  in  itself,  or  that 
others  lower  down  in  the  scale  do  not  exert  a  proper 
and  an  important  aesthetic  function.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  were  truer  to  fact  to  say  that  just  so  far 
as  a  work  of  art  fails  to  exemplify  all  of  these  at 
tributes,  just  so  far  does  it  fail  to  attain  to  the 
perfect  fulness  and  beauty  and  significance  and 
power  of  the  ideal  of  art. 


CHAPTER  XI 

THE    EDUCATIONAL   VALUE    OF   MUSIC 

i .  In  these  days  of  the  practical  even  in  the  very 
heart  of  philosophical  discussion,  there  is  little  need 
to  excuse  the  introduction  of  a  concluding  chapter 
upon  the  practical  or  educational  value  of  music. 
It  will  certainly  do  no  harm  to  the  sanctity  of  the 
theoretical  if  it  can  be  made  to  serve  as  the  basis 
for  some  suggestions  by  means  of  which  its  truth 
will  bear  fruit  in  actual  life.  Indeed,  the  theoretical 
and  the  practical  should  be  so  correlated  that  each 
will  supplement  and  complete  the  other.  They  are 
both  essential  parts  of  the  complete  envisagement 
of  a  subject.  Theory  without  practice  is  but  futile 
speculation;  practice  without  theory  puerile  ex 
perimentation.  Practice  needs  to  be  guided  by 
theory  to  attain  the  best  results,  and  theory  should 
be  checked  by  experience,  if  it  is  not  to  lose  itself 
in  empty  generalities.  Hence  it  is  eminently 
fitting  before  we  bring  our  discussion  to  a  close, 
that  we  desert  for  a  time  the  goal  that  has  guided 
us  thus  far,  and  frankly  turn  our  faces  toward  the 
practical.  This  we  shall  do  by  endeavoring  to 
estimate  the  educational  value  of  music. 

Attention  has  already  been  called  to  the  large 
place  which  music  now  holds  in  our  social,  educa 
tional,  artistic,  and  religious  life,  and  reasons  given 

228 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC         229 

to  explain  its  importance.  Starting  with  this  same 
fact,  we  shall  now  inquire,  cui  bono  ?  To  what 
end  ?  What  does  music  bring  to  the  individual  or 
to  society  to  justify  the  enormous  expenditure  of 
time  and  energy  now  devoted  to  its  cultivation  ? 
Not  only  are  millions  of  dollars  expended  annually 
in  our  larger  cities  for  its  artistic  development — 
that  in  itself  were  a  matter  of  little  importance — 
but  on  every  hand  we  see  the  "precious  plastic 
period  of  youth"  in  our  schools  and  out  of  them 
being  expended  that  it  may  have  even  a  greater 
part  in  our  social  and  intellectual  life.  Can  it 
justify  its  place  in  our  already  overcrowded  courses 
of  study,  and  in  taking  the  time  that  might  be 
devoted  to  more  practical  pursuits  ? 

The  answer  to  these  questions  can  be  found  only 
in  a  careful  inquiry  as  to  the  true  educational 
value  of  music.  But  before  we  are  ready  to  discuss 
the  subject  intelligently,  we  must  have  before  us 
some  definite  conception  of  the  proper  function  of 
education.  For  as  an  object  has  value  only  in 
relation  to  some  end  to  be  attained,  so  a  subject  in 
a  course  of  study  must  be  appraised  in  relation  to 
the  ideal  of  education  itself.  Before  we  can  say, 
therefore,  whether  music  has  educational  value, 
the  purpose  of  educational  discipline  must  be  stated. 
In  so  doing  we  must  necessarily  be  somewhat 
dogmatic,  for  there  is  here  no  opportunity  to  support 
our  definition  by  argument.  To  meet  the  present 
need,  we  premise  that  education  is  that  mental 
discipline  and  growth  by  which  a  man  is  prepared 
to  enter  intelligently  and  sympathetically  into  the 
most  important  forms  of  human  thought  and  action, 
and  to  attain  for  himself  maximum  efficiency  in 


230  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

some  useful  line  of  human  endeavor.  It  is  in  the 
light  of  some  such  comprehensive  conception  of 
education  as  this  that  the  educational  value  of  music 
must  be  considered  and  its  value  determined. 

2.  In  seeking  to  get  a  clear  idea  of  the  practical 
value  of  music  as  a  method  of  educational  discipline 
it  is  natural,  and  it  will  be  helpful  to  turn  first  to 
that  people  whose  educational  maxim  for  centuries 
was,  "  Gymnastics  for  the  body,  music  for  the  mind." 
And  not  only  was  this  the  maxim  of  Athens  in  the 
days  of  her  glory,  but  it  was  through  following  this 
method  of  education  that  she  attained  to  her  exalted 
place  as  the  world's  preceptress  in  so  many  branches 
of  learning  and  of  art.  It  is  true  that  with  the 
Greeks  the  term  music  included  more  than  it  does 
with  us  to-day,  but  it  is  also  true  that  no  small  part 
of  the  training  of  their  youth  consisted  in  learning 
to  improvise  upon  the  lyre  a  rhythmical  and  melodi 
ous  accompaniment  to  passages  of  Homer.  The 
teacher  of  music — music  in  this  technical  sense — had 
his  place  with  the  teacher  of  reading.  So  even  in 
the  restricted  sense  of  the  term,  their  "music"  was 
largely  musical;  that  is,  a  training  in  rhythm  and  in 
melody.  We  to-day  have  no  training  comparable 
to  their  training  in  these  two  subjects. 

As  to  the  value  which  they  attributed  to  this 
kind  of  training  there  can  be  no  question.  Listen 
to  the  words  of  Plato,  who  but  expressed  the  current 
belief  of  his  time :  ' '  We  wrould  not  have  our  guardians 
grow  up  amid  images  of  moral  deformity,,  as  in  some 
noxious /pasture,  and  there  browse  and  feed  upon 
many  a  baneful  herb  and  flower  day  by  day,  little 
by  little,  until  they  silently  gather  a  festering  mass 
of  corruption  in  their  soul.  Let  our  artists  rather 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF   MUSIC          231 

be  those  who  are  gifted  to  discern  the  true  nature 
of  the  beautiful  and  the  graceful;  then  will  our 
youth  dwell  in  a  land  of  health,  amid  fair  sights 
and  sounds,  and  receive  the  good  in  everything; 
beauty,  the  effluence  of  fair  works,  shall  flow  into 
the  eye  and  ear  like  a  health-giving  breeze  from  a 
purer  region,  and  insensibly  draw  the  soul  from 
earliest  youth  into  likeness  and  sympathy  with  the 
beauty  of  reason."  As  to  the  best  means  to  secure 
this  inward  disposition  of  soul,  he  says:  "Musical 
training  is  a  more  potent  instrument  than  any  other, 
because  rhythm  and  harmony  find  their  way  into 
the  inward  places  of  the  soul,  on  which  they  mightily 
fasten  imparting  grace  and  making  the  soul  of  him 
who  is  rightly  educated  graceful,  or  of  him  who  is 
ill-educated  ungraceful.  And  also  because  he  who 
has  received  this  true  education  of  the  inner  being 
will  most  shrewdly  perceive  omissions  or  faults  in 
art  and  nature  and  with  a  true  taste,  while  he  praises 
and  rejoices  ever  to  receive  into  his  soul  the  good, 
and  becomes  noble  and  good,  he  will  justly  blame 
and  hate  the  bad  now  in  the  days  of  his  youth, 
even  before  he  is  able  to  know  the  reason  why; 
and  when  reason  comes,  he  will  recognize  and  salute 
the  friend  with  whom  his  education  has  made  him 
familiar." 

Such  was  Greek  education,  not  merely  in  theory, 
but  in  actual  and  long -continued  practice.  In 
what  it  resulted,  history  informs  us;  we  still  to-day 
look  back  with  wonder  and  admiration  to  see  what 
this  people  accomplished,  not  only  in  Art,  in  the  Epic, 
the  Drama,  in  Sculpture,  in  Architecture,  but  in 
other  fields  where  mental  acumen  and  trained  powers 

1  Republic,  III. 


232  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

of  discrimination  are  essential.  Whatever  the  causes 
may  be,  the  fact  remains  that  during  the  Periclean 
age  and  immediately  following,  there  was  in  Athens 
such  a  coterie  of  poets,  sculptors,  dramatists,  orators, 
philosophers,  and  statesmen,  as  the  whole  world 
has  not  equalled  at  any  one  time  since.  And  whether 
or  not  the  musical  training  which  the  Greek  youth 
as  a  rule  received  be  the  whole  explanation,  it  is 
true  that  just  such  a  training  in  the  power  of  dis 
crimination  is  an  essential  factor  in  producing  that 
sensitiveness  to  fine  shades  of  difference  which  is 
demanded  not  only  in  art,  but  in  all  the  higher  forms 
of  mental  activity.  On  the  whole,  therefore,  I  am 
inclined  to  believe  that  their  musical  education  goes 
far  to  explain  the  remarkable  intellectual  genius 
of  this  people. 

Aristotle,  also,  with  his  more  analytic  mind, 
similarly  approves  the  importance  given  to  musical 
education.1  He  goes  further  than  Plato,  and  sug 
gests  definite  reasons  why  music  should  be  retained 
as  a  factor  in  their  educational  procedure.  In 
brief,  his  argument  can  be  summarized  under  three 
heads :  ( i )  Music  should  be  cultivated  as  a  desirable 
form  of  pleasurable  recreation;  (2)  as  conducive 
to  mental  development,  and  (3)  for  its  effect  upon 
moral  character.  But  we  cannot  accept  unquestion- 
ingly  as  advantageous  for  society  to-day  educational 
practices  which  then  may  have  been  never  so 
beneficial.  New  social  conditions,  new  industrial, 
new  ethical,  new  religious  environment  demand  on 
the  part  of  the  individual  new  adjustments,  new 
reactions.  So  while  this  musical  training  seems  to 
have  been  eminently  adapted  to  the  aesthetic  and 

1  Vid.  Politics,  Book  VIII. 


233 

intellectual  life  of  the  Greeks,  from  that  fact  alone 
there  is  but  little  assurance  that,  followed  now,  it 
would  result  in  like  effects.  We  can  properly  do 
no  more  than  consider  these  facts  as  suggestions 
worthy  of  consideration  in  the  light  of  the  changed 
conditions  of  our  modern  environment.  We  shall 
take  these  suggestions  of  Aristotle,  therefore,  and 
see  how  far  they  can  be  adapted  with  helpfulness  to 
modern  life. 

3.  There  is  no  need,  I  fancy,  to  advance  argument 
to  show  that  in  order  to  obtain  from  the  human 
organism,  either  physically  or  mentally,  the  highest 
results,  both  quantitatively  and  qualitatively,  some 
form  of  recreation  is  imperative.  The  demand  is 
one  which  has  the  sanction  of  law,  both  divine  and 
scientific,  and  is  a  fact  of  experimental  knowledge 
with  all  who  have  done  intense  or  long-continued 
labor,  whether  physical  or  mental.  In  modern  life, 
this  demand  has  -become  peculiarly  urgent;  our 
social  and  industrial  organizations  have  so  modi 
fied  the  activities  of  life  that  this  need  is  greater 
than  ever  before.  In  the  days  of  simpler  organiza 
tion,  the  duties  of  life  were  different  enough  to 
satisfy  the  demands  for  variation  in  the  form  of 
activity  for  the  day  or  the  week.  But  to-day 
excessive  specialization  has  altered  this  condition 
of  labor.  The  highly  organized  condition  of  all 
departments  of  human  activity,  educational,  politi 
cal,  industrial,  has  divided  society  into  two  general 
divisions.  On  the  one  hand,  there  are  the  few  at 
the  head  of  great  corporations  and  organizations 
where  the  nerve  strain  of  management  and  control 
is  intensified  by  the  magnitude  of  the  interests 
represented;  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  the  great 


234  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

mass  of  people  condemned  in  their  work  to  a  life  of 
mental  inanition  because  of  the  monotony  and 
routine  required  in  their  subordinate  positions. 
There  are  the  few,  of  course,  who  will  rise  to  more 
responsible  positions,  or  have  other  interests  to 
keep  the  mind  from  stagnation.  But  the  great 
masses  cannot  or  will  not;  they  will  settle  down  in 
their  narrow  sphere  and  become  little  more  than  a 
part  of  the  great  machinery  of  life.  And  the 
tragedy  of  it  is,  that  the  closer  they  approach  to 
this  automatism,  the  better  they  are  fitted  to  fulfil 
their  part.  Such  is  the  actual  condition  of  thousands 
upon  thousands  employed  in  our  factories  to-day. 
This  is  a  part  of  the  price  we  must  pay  for  progress. 
With  the  few,  great  responsibility  and  nerve  strain, 
and  with  the  many,  lack  of  initiative  and  the  in 
spiration  from  control,  and  too  often  a  monotony 
in  their  work  that  blunts  the  sensibilities  and  the 
emotions  and  atrophies  the  intellectual  faculties. 

In  both  cases  recreation  is  demanded  to  prevent 
disaster.  In  the  one  case,  to  take  the  mind  com 
pletely  away  from  its  cares  and  usual  circle  of 
activity ;  in  the  other,  to  stir  the  mind  to  life  by  some 
thing  different  from  the  ceaseless  hum  of  machinery 
and  from  the  deadening  fatigue  and  monotony  of 
the  same  action,  repeated  week  after  week,  year 
after  year.  It  is  to  break  the  monotony  of  such 
lives,  to  give  opportunity  for  fancy,  stifled  in  the 
grime  of  the  shop,  to  play,  and  for  the  emotions, 
weighted  down  with  the  cares  of  a  sordid  reality, 
to  rise,  that  we  see  our  theaters  filled  by  melodrama 
or  vaudeville  and  stand  astounded  at  the  sale  of 
indifferent  fiction.  It  is  not  a  question  whether 
or  not  the  people  will  have  recreation — that  is  a 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF   MUSIC          235 

psychological  demand  or  protest  that  cannot  be 
smothered — but  what  shall  be  the  nature  of  their 
amusement.  The  conditions  of  life  to-day,  as  they 
did  not  in  a  simpler  society,  justify  the  demand  for 
radical  recreation. 

For  this  great,  almost  overpowering  demand  of 
the  masses  for  some  form  of  relaxation  and  relief 
from  the  tedium  of  their  toil,  music  may  become  a 
veritable  godsend.  Notice,  if  you  will,  how  well 
it  meets  the  prime  conditions  of  a  good  form  of 
recreation.  First,  a  good  recreation  must  call  into 
activity  those  mental  faculties  which,  in  the  course 
of  one's  vocation,  are  usually  dormant.  Second, 
if  it  be  more  than  a  passing  fad,  it  must  be  inherently 
pleasurable.  There  is  an  undoubted,  an  ascertain- 
able  physiological  effect  in  pleasure,  a  stimulus  to 
healthful  metabolism,  which  is  often  more  effica 
cious  than  the  services  of  the  best  physician.  Then, 
third,  it  must  hold  the  mind  so  firmly  that  there  is 
no  slipping  back  into  the  old  grooves  of  thought. 
It  must  have  such  inherent  interest  and  power 
that  the  mind  is,  as  it  were,  compelled  to  follow  in 
these  new  lines  of  activity,  leaving  the  fatigued 
centres  of  the  brain  time  to  recuperate  and  recover 
their  vitality  and  power. 

Music,  it  is  needless  to  say,  is  eminently  adapted 
in  all  these  respects  to  serve  as  an  ideal  form  of 
recreation,  and  to  help  counterbalance  the  emotional 
lifelessness  which  present  industrial  conditions  make 
inevitable  in  so  large  a  part  of  labor.  Music,  as 
has  been  so  often  asserted,  is  a  direct  and  a  powerful 
stimulus  for  the  emotions  and  so,  better  than  any 
other  art,  can  relieve  the  fatigue  of  the  day  and 
arouse  the  mind  from  its  listlessness  and  lassitude 


236  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

to  pleasurable  and  intense  emotional  reaction.  In 
such  uses  as  this  there  is  no  need  to  discard  the 
sensuous  qualities  which  give  it  power.  Thus  it 
meets  the  first  condition  of  a  good  form  of  recreation 
in  the  fullest  manner.  Music  is  also  inherently 
pleasurable  and  so  produces  that  beneficial  effect 
which  results  from  the  heightened  feeling  tone,  and 
also  creates  a  taste  for  itself  so  that  it  may  the  more 
readily  become  effective  as  a  method  of  relaxation 
and  recreation. 

It  also  claims  the  attention  completely,  so  that 
it  in  fact  produces  that  mental  condition  requisite 
for  a  literal  re-creation  of  nervous  force  and  energy. 
In  all  these  respects,  therefore,  it  meets  the  demands 
of  a  good  form  of  recreation.  If  for  no  other  reasons, 
it  has  to-day  sufficient  value,  upon  this  ground  alone, 
to  justify  its  place  as  an  important  element  in  life, 
and  worthy  of  careful  and  widespread  cultivation. 

But  however  strong  may  be  the  claims  of  music 
as  a  desirable  form  of  recreation,  education,  it  will 
be  insisted,  should  be  for  the  business  of  life  rather 
than  for  the  enjoyment  of  its  leisure.  Prepare 
for  the  business  and  the  people  will  look  out  for 
amusement.  Though  this  principle  is  plainly  con 
trary  to  all  psychological  law  and  to  educational 
theory,  as  well  as  to  common  sense,  we  are  by  no 
means  limited  to  this  one  means  of  justifying  the 
place  of  music  in  our  educational  practices.  Music 
has  value,  also,  as  we  shall  now  attempt  to  show, 
as  a  means  of  intellectual  discipline  as  well  as  a 
valuable  means  of  recreation. 

4.  There  is  a  popular  impression  that  the  value  of 
music  as  a  means  of  intellectual  discipline  is  so 
small  that  it  can  safely  be  neglected;  nay,  more,  it 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC          237 

is  held  that  the  cultivation  of  this  art  is  positively 
injurious  to  intellectual  interests,  that  it  leads  to 
such  excessive  emotionalism,  that  .the  stability  of 
the  judgment  and  of  reason  is  seriously  impaired. 

The  source  of  this  misconception  is  now  evident. 
It  lies  in  the  failure  to  discriminate  properly  between 
the  two  aspects  of  music  which  we  have  called  the 
"dramatic"  and  the  "aesthetic."  There  is  such 
force,  such  dramatic  impressiveness  in  the  sensuous 
attributes  of  music,  that  for  the  untutored,  untrained 
mind,  they  overshadow  the  less  evident  aesthetic 
qualities.  Consequently,  there  is  a  tendency  on 
the  part  of  those  not  versed  in  the  intricacies  of 
musical  structure  to  overlook  this  aspect  of  the 
subject  and  to  regard  the  dramatic  attributes  as 
the  characteristic  elements  of  music.  The  instinct 
ive,  quasi-reflex,  response  to  the  sensuous  attributes 
of  musical  sound  is  mistaken  for  genuine  musical 
appreciation,  when  in  some  respects  they  are  no 
more  alike  than  the  tingle  of  pain  from  a  burn  and 
a  scientific  discussion  of  the  molecular  theory  of 
heat.  In  the  one  case  the  reaction  is  organic, 
physiological,  reflex,  while  in  the  other  it  is  strictly 
psychical,  analytic,  and  discriminatingly  intellectual. 

Were  these  sensuous  attributes  all  that  there  is  to 
music,  there  would  be  some  justification  for  the 
popular  belief  just  referred  to;  there  is  little  educa 
tional  value  in  simple  reaction  to  instinctive  forms 
of  stimuli.  They  are  by  nature  fitted  to  accom 
plish  their  purpose  without  the  mediation  of  con 
sciousness;  this  is  what  their  instinctive  nature 
signifies.  But  there  is  to  music,  as  our  analysis 
has  plainly  shown,  another  aspect,  the  possibilities 
of  which  are  not  to  be  compassed  bv  any  such 


238  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

simple,  inattentive  way.  As  a  true  form  of  art, 
music  rises  above  the  plane  of  primitive  emotions 
and  simple  reaction  to  sense  stimuli,  to  the  realm 
of  the  intellectual,  and  of  the  emotions  in  their  very 
purest  forms.  To  get  the  thought  element  in  music 
of  this  latter  type,  to  appreciate  the  beauty  of  form 
and  of  formal  relations,  to  apprehend  the  unity  of  a 
composition,  the  unity  of  logical  structure  in  the 
midst  of  sensuous  complexity,  or  to  feel  the  proper 
interpretation  for  the  subtleties  of  harmony,  all 
of  this  opens  up  a  new  field  for  intellectual  and 
emotional  activity  of  a  very  complex  and  intricate 
kind.  There  is  no  dearth  of  opportunity  here  for 
intellectual  acumen,  for  logical  analysis,  and  for  all 
the  activities  of  aesthetic  synthesis.  Plainly,  it  is 
in  this  direction  that  opportunities  for  real  and 
useful  intellectual  activity  may  be  found. 

In  considering  more  specifically  the  value  of  music 
as  a  form  of  intellectual  discipline,  attention  is 
called  first  to  its  possible  utility  as  a  means  of  ear- 
training.  In  connection  with  the  activity  of  each 
sense  there  is  necessarily  a  certain  amount  of 
mental  functioning  involved,  discrimination  in 
cipient  or  explicit,  comparison  and  judgment,  etc. 
To  develop  these  processes  so  that  accuracy  of  ob 
servation  becomes  a  matter  of  habit,  is  no  little 
task  nor  an  inconsequential  form  of  mental  attain 
ment.  The  sense  of  hearing,  next  to  the  sense  of 
sight,  offers  the  greatest  opportunities  for  develop 
ment  of  this  sort,  and  is  second  in  importance  only 
to  the  visual  sense.  Whatever  mental  discipline 
there  is  to  be  gained  in  the  perceptual  process, 
through  the  training  of  the  sense  to  greater  accuracy 
and  greater  sensitiveness,  can  be  gained  as  readily 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC          239 

by  developing  the  sense  of  hearing  as  the  sense  of 
sight.  And  is  it  not  possible,  aside  from  the  practi 
cal  value  of  such  training,  that  a  greater  refinement 
of  this  sense  might  reveal  beauties  around  us  to 
which  most  of  us  are  habitually  insensible  ?  While 
nature  is  doubtless  richer  in  her  visual  attributes 
than  in  her  auditory,  there  may  still  be  something 
of  value  even  for  the  ear  if  it  only  be  trained  to  hear 
it.  Why  might  there  not  be  a  poet  of  nature's 
voices  as  well  as  painters  of  her  visual  phases? 

But  of  greater  practical  value  would  be  the  sensi 
tiveness  to  tonal  inflection  in  spoken  language 
which  such  an  ear-training  would  promote.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  only  a  few  are  responsive  to  in 
flection  when  it  is  heard,  and  only  now  and  then  do 
we  find  one  who  to  any  degree  utilizes  the  possibili 
ties  of  his  voice  in  this  direction.  An  increased 
susceptibility  to  the  sound  qualities  of  language 
would  not  only  increase  the  pleasurable  effect,  but 
it  would  serve  to  promote  the  efficiency  of  spoken 
language  for  all  the  purposes  for  which  it  exists. 

The  chief  source  of  the  intellectual  value  of 
musical  training,  however,  is  to  be  found  in  con 
nection  with  the  more  complex  aesthetic  attributes 
which  belong  to  music  by  virtue  of  the  fact  that  it 
is  a  true  form  of  thought.  To  apprehend  the  unity 
of  a  musical  composition  of  any  structural  com 
plexity,  such  as  is  found  in  almost  all  good  music, 
is  an  intellectual  process  of  no  trivial  or  insignifi 
cant  character.  It  is  the  perception  of  a  mental 
ideal  in  sensuous  form,  the  interpretation  of  sense 
symbolism  in  terms  of  the  most  abstract  form  of 
thought.  To  pass  judgment  upon  a  composition 
as  to  its  originality  or  its  strength  demands  the 


240  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

highest  degree  of  exact  discrimination,  of  compari 
son,  and  of  mental  synthesis.  The  appreciation 
of  gracefulness  betokens  a  sensitiveness  to  fine 
distinction  of  form  and  meaning  which  may  prove 
most  beneficial,  not  only  in  art,  but  in  mental  pro 
cesses  both  intellectual  and  moral.  Whether  or 
not  intellectual  discipline  is  to  be  found  in  the 
study  of  music,  therefore,  depends  altogether  upon 
the  manner  and  purpose  of  such  study.  It  may  be 
merely  a  reflex  response  to  instinctive  elements,  or 
it  may  be  a  critical  analytic  study  which  will  give 
both  acumen  and  balance  to  the  intellect,  and  that 
sensitiveness  to  fine  shades  of  beauty  in  which  we 
as  a  nation  with  vigorous  constitutions  and  indus 
trial  ideals  are  so  noticeably  lacking. 

5.  The  third  suggestion  of  Aristotle  as  to  the 
educational  value  of  music,  viz.,  that  music  has  a 
profound  influence  upon  character,  is  worthy  of 
careful  notice  in  this  connection.  Is  it  true,  as  the 
Greeks  believed,  that  music  does  in  some  subtle 
way  so  influence  the  soul  that  it  has  value  as  a  means 
of  developing  character  ?  Under  the  Greek  con 
ception,  where  the  good  and  the  beautiftd  were  so 
conjoined  that  they  were  almost  identical,  this 
teaching  is  not  hard  to  appreciate;  but  in  terms  of 
our  stricter  discrimination  between  the  moral  and 
the  aesthetic,  can  music  still  be  utilized  for  moral 
training  and  moral  development  ? 

Upon  such  an  open  question  as  this  it  is  not  strange 
that  opinions  directly  contradictory  to  one  another 
should  be  held  and  often  expressed.  At  the  one 
extreme  there  is  the  belief,  justified  by  many  un 
fortunate  examples,  that  as  a  profession  music  is  a 
severe  strain  upon  character  and  even  inherently  and 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC         241 

positively  destructive  of  moral  rectitude.  On  the 
other  hand,  it  has  been  believed  from  the  time  of 
Aristotle  until  now  that  music  and  morality  are  not 
inconsistent,  but  are  mutually  helpful.  Philosophers 
have  not  been  slow  to  call  attention  to  the  fact  that 
elements  of  beauty  are  to  be  found  in  the  moral  ideal, 
and  elements  of  morality  in  the  beautiful.  In  such 
extreme  positions,  however,  there  is  such  a  notice 
able  lack  of  scientific  accuracy  that  they  serve  to 
do  little  more  than  to  call  our  attention  to  the  fact 
that  there  is  here  a  problem  worthy  of  the  most 
careful  examination.  In  the  first  case,  it  is  plainly 
nothing  more  than  an  opinion  founded  upon  in 
dividual  examples  more  than  upon  analysis;  in 
the  second,  the  truth  is  so  abstract  that  it  needs 
men  philosophically  disposed  to  appreciate  it.  The 
problem  is  too  comprehensive  for  an  adequate  dis 
cussion  here,  though  some  suggestion  following 
from  our  analysis  of  music  may  prove  helpful. 

In  what  has  been  said  concerning  music  as  a  form 
of  recreation,  we  have  already  called  attention  to 
one  way  in  which  music  may  be  utilized  for  the  moral 
uplift  of  society.  Reforms  never  come  by  merely 
execrating  what  is  disapproved,  but  by  offering  a 
substitute  for  the  evil  to  be  overcome.  Especially 
is  this  true  in  regard  to  amusements  and  forms  of 
recreation.  All  the  maledictions  of  the  just  are 
not  so  potent  to  remove  evil  and  keep  it  removed 
as  the  less  exciting,  more  arduous  labor  of  showing 
people  plainly  the  value  of  things  that  are  wholesome. 
Music  has  those  attributes  which  adapt  it  to  sup 
plant  many  of  the  lower  forms  of  amusement,  and 
to  give  a  taste  for  those  things  wrhich  are  refined 
and  noble  and  beautiful.  To  do  this  would  require 


242  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

intelligent  instruction  and  guidance,  but  there  is  no 
form  of  wholesome  recreation  that  could  so  easily 
be  introduced  or  could  more  readily  serve  as  a  means 
of  bringing  to  the  great  mass  of  the  people  the 
pleasures  and  the  benefits  of  true  art  ideas.  If  art 
is  a  work  of  culture,  it  is  worth  while  to  cultivate 
it  among  those  who  now  know  so  little  of  its  true 
meaning  or  benefits.  If  art  in  general,  or  music  in 
particular,  is  a  suitable  subject  to  engage  the  thought 
and  energies  of  the  higher  stratum  of  society,  it  is 
a  suitable  subject  for  cultivation  by  those  whose 
intellectual  attainments  are  not  their  chief  source 
of  self -congratulation. 

In  considering  the  moral  aspect  of  music,  some 
attention  must  be  given  to  the  close  relation  music 
holds  to  religious  experience.  So  closely  are  music 
and  religion  associated  that  it  is  hard  to  believe  that 
there  is  not  some  potent  bond  between  music  and 
the  moral  life.  Without  music  religion  would  lose 
one-half  its  power,  not  because  religion  is  less 
strong,  but  because  music  has  the  peculiar  power  of 
leading  the  mind  to  an  attitude  of  prayer  and 
solemn  praise.  The  church  bell  may  call  the  people 
to  the  outer  courts  of  the  temple,  but  it  is  the  or 
gan  and  song  that  purify  the  heart  so  that  they  may 
pass  into  the  inner  court  where  those  who  worship, 
worship  in  sincerity  and  in  truth.  So  close  is  the 
relation  in  modern  thought  between  religion  and 
morality  that  in  the  light  of  these  facts  it  is  hard 
to  believe  that  music  does  not  have  also  some  pro 
found  though  subtle  influence  over  character. 

The  principle  according  to  which  the  question  of 
the  moral  significance  of  music  must  be  determined 
has  appeared  in  our  discussion.  There  is  in  music 


243 

besides  the  intellectual  element,  which  has  only  a 
nominal  relation  to  morality,  a  strong  emotional 
factor  which  may  well  be  the  very  source  and  inspira 
tion  of  much  that  is  inherently  and  characteristically 
moral.  We  neglect,  therefore,  the  intellectual  as 
pects  of  music,  though  it  is  not  altogether  negligible, 
that  we  may  emphasize  the  more  the  point  which 
is  most  vital.  We  shall  accept,  then,  as  our  work 
ing  principle  the  fact,  that  the  moral  value  of  music 
is  found  in  the  direct  and  powerful  effect  which  it 
exerts  upon  the  emotional  consciousness.  If  experi 
ence  and  reflection  have  shown  that  knowledge  is 
not  virtue,  or  even  a  guarantee  of  moral  earnestness, 
psychological  and  sociological  investigations  have 
emphasized  the  fact  that  in  the  emotions  are  the 
springs  of  both  moral  and  immoral  action.  It  is  in 
this  line  of  investigation,  therefore,  that  the  solution 
of  the  riddle  must  be  found. 

'"'More  than  any  other  art,  better  than  almost  any 
other  mental  stimulus,  music,  through  the  direct 
and  powerful  factor  of  rhythm,  and  through  the 
inherited  biological  significance  of  sound,  stimulates 
the  mind  emotionally.  In  this  fact  lie  both  its 
strength  and  its  weakness;  strength,  because  it  can 
play  with  a  master  hand  over  the  whole  gamut 
of  man's  emotional  life;  weakness,  because  there 
is  about  the  emotions  music  awakens  an  indefinite- 
ness  that  leaves  them  unattached,  as  it  were,  to 
any  conceptual  thought  or  ideal  of  conduct.  And 
as  Professor  James  has  told  us,  pure  emotionalism 
tends  to  weaken  character  rather  than  to  strengthen 
it.  It  is  just  here  that  we  find  the  difference  in  the 
moral  value  of  music  and  of  the  sermon  in  the 
services  of  the  church.  Music  stimulates  the  emo- 


244  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

tions  and  brings  the  attitude  of  worship,  but  it 
leaves  the  emotions  unattached  to  ideals  of  action 
or  of  conduct.  The  minister  finds  the  heart,  through 
the  services  of  music,  receptive  and  aglow,  but  he 
must  take  these  emotions  and  connect  them  con 
sciously  with  right  actions,  right  thoughts,  or  they 
will  evanesce  and  the  mind  that  felt  them  intensely, 
it  may  be,  will  have  received  no  permanent  good. 
Music  can  awaken  the  emotions,  but  it  cannot 
direct  them  or  connect  them  with  proper  ideals  of 
ethical  action. 

Judged  in  the  light  of  the  relation  between  the 
emotions  and  conduct,  a  just  evaluation  of  the  moral 
value  is  not  so  difficult  as  it  might  otherwise  appear. 
Granted  that  the  moral  significance  of  music  comes 
through  its  emotional  power,  it  remains  only  to 
show  the  relation  between  the  emotion  music  pro 
duces  and  conduct.  And  this  fortunately  is  not  such 
a  very  obscure  psychological  problem.  We  note 
first  certain  fundamental  differences  between  ethical 
and  aesthetical  emotions. 

The  distinguishing  marks  of  the  ethical  feelings 
are  found  in  their  personal  character  and  in  the 
authority  they  claim  in  all  matters  of  conduct. 
Their  right  to  primacy  is  a  part  of  their  reality; 
they  do  not  advise,  they  do  not  dissuade,  they  regard 
not  desires  or  pleasure,  but  they  summarily  and 
categorically  dictate  what  ought  to  be  done,  what 
must  be  done.  Interpreted  for  our  present  pur 
poses,  this  means  that  the  motor  element  is  a  domi 
nant  one.  It  is  a  part  of  their  true  character  to 
actualize  themselves  in  conduct.  The  ethical  emo 
tion  of  justice  includes  the  command,  "be  thou 
just;"  the  feeling  of  mercy  enjoins  us  to  be  merciful. 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC         245 

In  all  the  ethical  emotions  there  is  always  the  feel 
ing  of  personal  obligation  to  let  the  sentiment  bear 
fruit  in  deed. 

The  aesthetic  emotions,  on  the  other  hand,  are  as 
truly  characterized  by  the  lack  as  the  ethical 
emotions  by  the  presence  of  this  same  personal  and 
obligatory  element.  One  of  the  first  characteristics 
of  the  aesthetic  experience  is  that  we  tend  to  project 
ourselves  into  the  work  of  art,  to  lose  the  feeling 
of  personal  identity,  as  it  were,  by  living  intently 
for  the  time  the  conception  represented.  Personal 
self-consciousness  dwindles  and  the  artist's  idea 
looms  large  in  consciousness.  That  is,  for  the 
time  we  live  vicariously  in  the  conception  of  the 
artist.  In  the  same  way  the  feeling  of  obligation, 
the  quintessence  of  the  moral  feeling,  is  hardly 
present  at  all  in  the  aesthetic  emotions.  There  are 
certain  principles  of  art  which  are  the  criteria  of 
right  judgment  and  good  taste,  but  they  are  not 
binding  in  the  same  uncompromising  way  as  are 
ethical  laws.  It  is  more  a  lack  than  a  positive  fault 
if  my  judgments  do  not  accord  with  them.  The 
obligation  I  am  under  to  regard  these  principles  of 
good  taste  is  nothing  more  than  a  conventional 
ought,  and  lacks  altogether  the  categorical  impera 
tiveness  which  Kant  tells  us  is  the  essence  of  the 
moral  law. 

Such  being  the  case,  it  is  evident  that  music,  or 
any  other  form  of  aesthetic  culture,  in  itself  will  not 
suffice  as  a  system  of  ethical  training;  the  emotions 
engendered  by  such  experience,  though  varied  and 
strong,  are  lacking  in  just  that  personal  reference 
which  is  the  vital  element  in  all  ethical  experience. 
In  order  to  develop  moral  force  and  stamina,  the 


246  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

volitional  nature  must  receive  a  more  direct,  a  more 
heroic  discipline  than  comes  from  the  chance  sug 
gestion  of  the  aesthetic  sentiments.  While  the 
musician  must  live  in  the  realm  of  the  emotions 
largely,  these  emotions,  being  aesthetic  rather  than 
ethical  in  character,  have  only  a  nominal  value  for 
real  moral  discipline.  Thus  it  is  that  we  sometimes 
find  men  whose  education  has  been  largely  artistic, 
whether  musical  or  some  other  form  there  is  little 
difference,  who  through  neglect  of  these  other  factors 
are  from  the  moral  point  of  view  ill-balanced  and 
unstable.  But  the  source  of  the  trouble  is  not  witl 
the  education  they  have  received,  but  with  the  part 
that  has  been  neglected. 

We  conclude,  therefore,  that  music  as  a  profession 
is  not  inconsistent  with  a  thoroughly  moral  character, 
but  that  it  alone  is  not  sufficient  for  the  proper  train 
ing  of  the  will  implied  in  character.  The  aesthetic  emo 
tions,  though  strong  and  inspiring,  lack  that  personal 
factor  in  the  ethical  sentiments  which  leads  to  their 
application  in  conduct.  The  difficulty,  therefore,  is 
not  that  art  and  morality  are  contradictory  or  in  any 
way  inconsistent,  but  merely  that  in  the  emotional 
life  these  two  aspects  fail  to  meet  at  the  most 
crucial  point. 

Thus  far  we  have  spoken  only  of  the  limitations  of 
music  considered  as  a  form  of  moral  training;  there 
is,  however,  a  more  positive  aspect  of  the  problem 
too  important  to  be  overlooked.  Sometimes  it  is 
true,  and  never  more  frequently  than  in  moral  train 
ing,  that  what  cannot  be  gained  by  a  rigorous,  logical 
method  can  be  accomplished  by  indirect  methods  and 
without  showing  the  iron  hand  that  leads  the  way. 

It  is  well  to  remember,  therefore,  that  something 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC         247 

more  than  a  rigorous  training  of  the  will,  however 
essential  that  may  be,  is  required  to  raise  virtue 
from  the  austere  sphere  of  law  and  duty  to  the 
plane  of  a  great  enthusiasm,  capable  of  enlisting  the 
sympathies  and  whole-hearted  allegiance  of  the 
developed  man.  What  is  required  for  the  most 
effective  morality  is  not  a  constant,  half -morbid 
self-analysis  of  motives,  but  that  the  individual 
shall  lose  himself,  as  it  were,  by  becoming  identified, 
heart  and  soul,  with  some  great  purpose  in  life.  And 
high  purposes,  lofty  ambitions,  effective  zeal,  are 
born  of  great  hopes,  great  emotions.  The  day  of 
puritanic  ideals,  of  constant  self-denial,  is  past;  the 
day  when  conduct  is  to  be  determined  more  by 
loyalty  to  some  world-wide,  altruistic  purpose  has 
already  dawned.  Thus,  the  part  of  the  emotions 
in  determining  conduct  is  destined  to  be  greater 
than  ever  before.  And  music,  through  its  great 
emotional  power,  is  peculiarly  adapted  to  enlarge 
the  scope  of  man's  mind,  to  reveal  to  man  the  un- 
fathomed  depth  of  his  own  spirit,  to  awaken  long 
ings  for  the  infinitely  perfect,  to  create  in  the  heart 
that  divine  harmony  of  mental  equipoise  which 
may  give  birth  to  inspired  ambitions  and  to  pur 
poses  of  the  most  gloriously  unselfish  character. 

The  ethical  and  the  sesthetical  ideals,  notwith 
standing  their  points  of  difference,  are  by  no 
means  unrelated.  In  a  very  comprehensive,  very 
forceful  way  it  can  be  readily  shown  that  the 
charm  and  attractiveness  of  the  moral  ideal  is 
to  no  small  extent  due  to  its  aesthetic  qualities. 
The  Good  is  beautiful  in  many  profound  respects. 
The  cultivation  of  the  aesthetic  sentiments,  and 
sensitiveness  for  the  elements  of  beauty,  will,  as 


248  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

Plato  said,  serve  to  cultivate  a  taste  for  what  is 
wholesome  and  fair.  Not  only  will  music  rightly 
used  enlarge  the  emotional  nature,  making  possible 
great  enthusiasm  and  great  ambition,  but  it  will 
also  prove  a  safeguard  from  what  is  ignoble  and 
base.  He  who  has  a  refined  taste  for  the  deeper 
beauty  of  literature  or  painting  or  music,  is  cer 
tainly  not  worse,  but  better  prepared  to  be  at 
tracted  by  what  is  morally  high  and  unselfish  and 
motived  by  right  principles. 

If  it  is  recalled,  it  will  be  found  to  be  the  rule  that 
even  the  faults  of  our  artistic  fraternity  are  not  the 
worst  in  the  category  of  crime  or  sin.  The  strong 
emotionalism  of  such  characters  may  lead  to  certain 
excesses,  to  such  an  overstepping  of  the  conventions 
and  customs  of  society  that  punishment  must  be 
meted  out ;  but  maliciousness  and  satanic  heartless- 
ness  and  hardness  are  not  the  ruling  faults  of  men 
of  this  profession.  So  exclusively  scientific  and  in 
tellectual  have  our  educational  ideals  and  practices 
become,  that  we  stand  much  in  need  of  some  sub 
jects  which  will  develop  in  its  finer  reactions  the 
emotional  side  of  human  nature.  Music  properly 
used  is  eminently  adapted  to  fill  such  a  place  in  our 
educational  practice. 

6.  But  the  question  now  arises,  are  we  in  our 
current  use  of  music  utilizing  it  to  the  best  ad 
vantage?  Music,  in  our  system  of  schools,  is  being 
taught,  on  the  whole,  efficiently;  is  not  this  training 
adapted,  and  adequate  to  meet  all  the  requirements 
of  the  best  educational  interests  ? 

There  are  two  principal  reasons  why  this  train 
ing  as  now  given  in  our  schools  is  not  entirely  ade 
quate  to  meet  the  demand  we  have  the  right  to 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE  OF  MUSIC         249 

expect  from  the  place  it  holds  in  our  educational 
practice. 

In  the  first  place,  the  training  there  given  is  for  the 
most  part,  if  not  entirely,  vocal;  and  while  this  is 
important,  it  will  not  serve  to  open  up  to  the  pupils 
the  best  treasures  of  modern  music.  I  doubt 
whether  the  training  in  reading  music,  such  as  is 
given  in  our  schools,  will  go  very  far  toward  making 
the  pupils  appreciative  listeners  to  music  of  the 
better  class.  It  is  all  essential,  but  not  adequate. 

Then,  again,  and  this  is  by  far  the  weightier  reason, 
there  is  such  a  profound  difference  between  a  capacity 
to  sing  or  to  play  correctly,  and  a  refined  and  appre 
ciative  musical  taste,  that  something  should  be  done 
to  insure  the  latter  as  well  as  to  cultivate  the  former. 
We  are  not  so  inconsistent,  fortunately,  in  regard 
to  literature.  We  do  not  believe  that  the  ability 
to  read  intelligently  will  give  a  taste  for  Shakespeare, 
or  Browning,  or  Tennyson,  when  the  more  exciting 
forms  of  story  and  novel  are  at  the  hand  of  the 
pupil.  We  have  learned  that  the  only  way  to  cul 
tivate  a  taste  for  good  literature  is  to  study  the 
masterpieces  and  to  become  acquainted  with  their 
richness  of  thought  and  beauties  of  expression. 
Taste  for  an  author  is  developed  only  by  studying 
his  works,  and  for  good  literature  only  by  becoming 
acquainted  with  it.  The  teaching  of  music  in  our 
schools  must  necessarily  be  of  the  rudiments  and 
without  sufficient  time  to  lead  up  through  technical 
knowledge  to  a  correct  taste  for  the  highest  and  best 
in  music.  This  may  be  possible  in  musical  schools 
and  conservatories,  but  manifestly  not  in  the  public 
schools.  Consequently,  the  question  arises  whether 
something  more  directly  in  the  line  of  cultivating 


250  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

a  good  taste  might  not  be  undertaken  with  profit  ? 
The  importance  of  good  taste  here  is  hard  to  over 
emphasize.  As  compared  with  technical  skill  or 
knowledge,  it  should  be  much  the  more  strongly 
insisted  upon.  Skill  may  be  employed  on  what  is 
idle  and  useless  as  well  as  upon  what  is  beautiful 
and  helpful.  But  once  good  taste  is  acquired,  we 
have  introduced  an  ever-potent,  uplifting  influence, 
which  will  not  only  point  to  the  upward  road,  but 
will  lead  toward  what  is  refined  and  noble,  and  so 
elevating  both  morally  and  intellectually.  Taste 
in  the  aesthetic  world  is  what  character  is  in  the 
moral  world,  a  settled  principle  of  choice,  a  habitual 
and  proper  method  of  responding  to  stimuli.  What 
is  needed,  therefore,  if  we  are  to  derive  the  best 
returns  from  musical  education,  is  that  there  be 
some  general  attempt  to  raise  the  standard  of 
musical  taste  so  that  there  will  be  a  wider  appre 
ciation  of  music  of  this  higher  sort. 

An  objection  likely  to  be  raised  by  musicians  to 
any  such  plan  as  this  is  that  there  is  no  other  way 
to  musical  appreciation  than  the  road  through 
technical  musical  'knowledge.  While  we  grant  the 
value  of  such  knowledge,  and  are  only  restrained 
from  urging  this  as  the  proper  gateway  to  musical 
appreciation  by  the  many  demands  made  upon 
our  time  and  energy  by  an  ever-increasing  course 
of  study,  we  still  contend  that  there  is  a  shorter  road 
that  will  greatly  increase  our  appreciative  knowledge 
of  music,  though  it  may  be  entirely  inadequate  for 
a  critical  knowledge.  Not  every  one  who  enjoys 
Shakespeare  on  the  stage  is  fitted  to  be  a  dramatic 
critic;  nor  is  the  average  reader  of  poetry,  he  who 
reads  it  for  the  pure  pleasure  it  brings,  always 


EDUCATIONAL  VALUE   OF   MUSIC         251 

capable  of  stating  explicitly  just  the  source  of  the 
pleasure  he  finds.  On  the  whole,  it  is  an  open 
question  just  how  far  an  exact,  critical  knowledge 
of  an  art  stands  in  direct  proportion  to  the  pleasure 
it  gives.  And  the  advantages  we  are  interested  to 
secure  are  those  which  come  partly  through  enjoy 
ment — an  appreciative  enjoyment — not  through  a 
critical  knowledge  of  art. 

Let  us,  then,  accept  as  the  practical  method  of 
securing  these  benefits  the  method  used  in  securing 
like  results  in  literature,  the  only  other  art  seriously 
studied  in  the  schools.  The  way  to  cultivate  a  taste 
for  good  music  is  to  hear  it,  to  have  it  explained  so 
as  to  be  able  to  recognize  the  various  elements  intro 
duced,  their  nature  and  their  use.  Can  this  be  done, 
you  ask,  except  through  a  musical  education  ?  We 
believe  that  it  can,  and  shall  conclude  our  discussion 
by  offering  a  suggestion  for  a  simple,  easy,  economical 
method  of  securing  these  eminently  desirable  results. 

Let  the  pupils  of  our  secondary  schools  and  the 
students  in  our  higher  institutions  of  learning  have 
an  hour  once  a  week,  or  even  once  in  two  weeks, 
devoted  to  music  in  this  practical  way,  and  I  am 
sure  the  results  would  more  than  justify  the  expense 
in  time  and  money.  Let  them  hear  good  music  and 
have  its  structural  and  aesthetic  attributes  pointed 
out  to  them,  as  attention  is  called  to  the  elements 
of  beauty  in  a  work  of  literature,  and  they  will 
learn  to  appreciate  good  music  as  they  learn  to 
appreciate  good  literature.  Let  them  hear  it  in 
properly  graded  series,  not  once  or  twice,  but  often 
enough  to  get  acquainted  with  it  to  recognize  the 
more  obvious  characteristics,  and  a  taste  for  what  is 
artistic  and  what  is  valuable  can  be  formed.  A  few 


252  THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  MUSIC 

hundred  dollars  a  year  would  provide  a  teacher  in 
this  new  work,  for  only  the  hour  would  be  required, 
and  the  other  work  of  the  school  would  not  lose 
but  gain  from  a  period  devoted  to  the  cultivation  of 
a  taste  for  what  is  in  the  best  sense  beautiful. 
Thus  might  the  benefits  now  confined  to  the  chosen 
few  be  made  the  common  possession  of  thousands, 
to  whom  the  true  beauty  of  music  is  now  a  riddle 
they  cannot  solve,  a  mystery  they  cannot  understand.